[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2015046780A1 - Method for transmitting uplink data and apparatus for same - Google Patents

Method for transmitting uplink data and apparatus for same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015046780A1
WO2015046780A1 PCT/KR2014/008311 KR2014008311W WO2015046780A1 WO 2015046780 A1 WO2015046780 A1 WO 2015046780A1 KR 2014008311 W KR2014008311 W KR 2014008311W WO 2015046780 A1 WO2015046780 A1 WO 2015046780A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
base station
uplink
information
terminal
cell
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/KR2014/008311
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
홍성표
이경준
최우진
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
KT Corp
Original Assignee
KT Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from KR20140030422A external-priority patent/KR20150034588A/en
Priority claimed from KR1020140043696A external-priority patent/KR101930114B1/en
Application filed by KT Corp filed Critical KT Corp
Priority to US15/024,484 priority Critical patent/US10362590B2/en
Priority to CN201480053616.3A priority patent/CN105580419B/en
Publication of WO2015046780A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015046780A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/15Setup of multiple wireless link connections

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting uplink data to a base station by a terminal, wherein the terminal configuring dual connectivity with a plurality of base stations is connected to the user data traffic of uplink and downlink through a plurality of carriers.
  • the present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving an uplink path differently from a downlink path.
  • the present invention is the amount of data available for transmission from the uplink buffers of the terminal to the base station in the terminal in the small cell environment to transmit the uplink user data by configuring dual connectivity with one or more base stations (dual connectivity)
  • a method and apparatus for transmitting a buffer status report used for providing information regarding data available for transmission.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-Advanced of the 3GPP series require high-speed large-capacity communication systems capable of transmitting and receiving various data such as video and wireless data, beyond voice-oriented services.
  • the speed and power consumption are also important. Therefore, while using a plurality of cells for a high-speed large-capacity communication system, the transmission speed for uplink data transmitted by the terminal while reducing power consumption for uplink data transmission needs to be increased. To this end, a specific procedure related to a method of transmitting and receiving uplink and downlink data in a small cell environment is required.
  • the terminal when the terminal transmits a large amount of data at high speed using a plurality of base stations, the terminal needs to transmit the correct amount of data to be transmitted on the uplink to the base station. There is also a need for a specific method of transmitting uplink data to be transmitted by a terminal.
  • the terminal configures a dual connection using a small cell according to the above-described request, it is necessary to set uplink transmission paths separately from downlinks in order to reduce power consumption for uplink data transmission.
  • the terminal transmits uplink data through the macro cell base station and the small cell base station, so that the path loss of the uplink data transmitted to the macro cell base station is relatively increased or transmitted to the small cell base station as the terminal moves. There is a problem in that uplink data is lost.
  • the present invention needs to transmit the buffer status information transmitted to the one or more base stations so that the buffer status information transmitted to the one or more base stations does not overlap or be omitted when the terminal configuring the radio bearer with one or more base stations.
  • a method for transmitting uplink data in a terminal comprising: receiving higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with a first base station and a second base station and a higher layer; Establishing a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station based on signaling and a PDCP entity is peered to a first base station or a second base station based on higher layer signaling PDCP PDUs for each of one or more radio bearers; A method is provided that includes submitting to a configured RLC entity.
  • the at least one radio bearer provides a method characterized in that the radio bearer is configured to be split (split) to the first base station and the second base station.
  • the higher layer signaling characterized in that it further comprises an index or identification information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station.
  • the index or classification information for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the first base station and uplink data through the second base station It provides a method comprising a value for configuring to transmit.
  • the method further includes performing a logical channel priority procedure at the MAC entity peered to the first base station or the second base station.
  • the logical channel priority procedure provides a method for performing a logical channel priority procedure for the logical channels to carry the uplink data through the first base station or the second base station.
  • the present invention provides a method for controlling uplink data transmission by a first base station, the method comprising: generating higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with a terminal and transmitting higher layer signaling to the terminal. And configuring a split radio bearer for the terminal.
  • the higher layer signaling characterized in that it further comprises an index or identification information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station. to provide.
  • the index or classification information for transmitting the uplink data to the second base station a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the first base station and to configure the uplink data through the second base station It provides a method comprising a value for.
  • the present invention provides a terminal for transmitting uplink data, comprising: a receiver for receiving higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with a first base station and a second base station, and a first base station and a first base station based on higher layer signaling.
  • a control unit configured to configure dual connectivity with 2 base stations, and control a PDCP entity to submit a PDCP PDU for each of one or more radio bearers to an RLC entity configured to be peered to the first base station or the second base station based on the higher layer signaling It provides a terminal device including a.
  • the at least one radio bearer provides a terminal device characterized in that the radio bearer is configured to be split (split) to the first base station and the second base station.
  • the higher layer signaling further includes an index or identification information for identifying an uplink cell or an uplink base station for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station. Provide the device.
  • the index or classification information for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the first base station and uplink data through the second base station It provides a terminal device comprising a value for configuring to transmit.
  • the controller provides a terminal device, characterized in that the control to perform a logical channel priority procedure in the MAC entity peered to the first base station or the second base station.
  • the logical channel priority procedure provides a terminal device, characterized in that performing a logical channel priority procedure for the logical channels for transmitting the uplink data through the first base station or the second base station.
  • the present invention provides a first base station for controlling uplink data transmission of a terminal, comprising: a control unit for generating higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with the terminal, and a transmitting unit for transmitting higher layer signaling to the terminal.
  • the control unit provides a base station apparatus for controlling to configure a split radio bearer for the terminal.
  • the base station further comprises an index or identification information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station. Provide the device.
  • the index or classification information for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the first base station and uplink data through the second base station It provides a base station apparatus comprising a value for configuring to transmit.
  • a method for transmitting buffer status information by a terminal includes: configuring and separating one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to a split bearer according to higher layer signaling so as to be dually connected with a first base station and a second base station; A method comprising transmitting to a first base station or a second base station the amount of data available for transmission in a PDCP layer of at least one logical channel or logical channel group mapped to a bearer.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount includes information on the available data amount of PDCP to be transmitted by the terminal uplink, and is distinguished from a buffer status report, at least one of the first base station and the second base station It provides a way to be transmitted.
  • the PDCP buffer status information is provided in the MAC control element is transmitted.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount is distributed and included in each of the buffer status report sent to the first base station and the buffer status report sent to the second base station.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount provides a method to be distributed based on configuration information received from the first base station or the second base station.
  • the configuring of the logical channel or the logical channel group mapped to the split bearer according to the higher layer signaling may include configuring a buffer status report (BSR) timer for each base station or cell group. Provide a way to.
  • BSR buffer status report
  • the PDCP layer available data amount is included in only one of the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station or the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station according to the higher layer signaling is transmitted. To provide.
  • the present invention provides a method for receiving buffer status information by a first base station, comprising: configuring a dual connection between a second base station and a terminal for at least one logical channel or logical channel group mapped to a split bearer through higher layer signaling; It provides a method comprising the step of receiving the PDCP layer available data amount from the terminal.
  • the amount of PDCP layer available data is provided separately from the buffer status report.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount is also included in the MAC control element to provide a method for receiving.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount is information distributed by the terminal and provides a method of being included in a buffer status report.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount is included in only the buffer status report received by the first base station according to the higher layer signaling, or included in only the buffer status report received by the second base station and received by the first base station. It provides a way to be received without being included in the report.
  • a terminal for transmitting buffer status information includes a control unit and a split bearer configured to dually connect one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to the split bearer according to higher layer signaling with the first base station and the second base station.
  • a terminal apparatus including a transmitter for transmitting PDCP layer available data amounts of one or more logical channels or logical channel groups to be mapped to a first base station or a second base station.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount includes information on the available data amount of PDCP to be transmitted by the terminal uplink, and is distinguished from a buffer status report, at least one of the first base station and the second base station It provides a terminal device characterized in that the transmission.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount provides a terminal device, characterized in that transmitted in the MAC control element.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount is distributed and included in each of the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station and the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station.
  • the PDCP layer usable data amount is distributed based on configuration information received from the first base station or the second base station.
  • the controller provides a terminal device comprising the logical channel or logical channel group including a buffer status report (BSR) timer for each base station or cell group according to higher layer signaling. .
  • BSR buffer status report
  • the PDCP layer available data amount is included in only one of the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station or the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station according to the higher layer signaling is transmitted.
  • a terminal device is provided.
  • the present invention provides a first base station for receiving buffer status information, comprising: a control unit and a terminal configuring a dual connection between a second base station and a terminal for one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to a split bearer through higher layer signaling;
  • a base station apparatus including a receiving unit for receiving a PDCP layer available data amount.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount provides a base station apparatus, characterized in that received separately from the buffer status report.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount is provided in the base station apparatus, characterized in that received in the MAC control element.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount is information distributed by the terminal and is included in a buffer status report to provide the base station apparatus.
  • the PDCP layer available data amount is included in the buffer status report received from the terminal to the first base station according to the higher layer signaling, or included in only the buffer status report received to the second base station and received at the first base station.
  • a base station apparatus is provided which is received without being included in a buffer status report.
  • the terminal can transmit the uplink data traffic through a specific base station with a small path loss with the terminal in an environment in which a dual connection with a plurality of base stations. This reduces the power consumption of the terminal and has the effect of improving the uplink data transmission speed.
  • the terminal may transmit uplink data traffic through a specific base station having large coverage in an environment in which the terminal configures a dual connection with a plurality of base stations. Through this, there is an effect that can reduce the data loss due to the movement of the terminal.
  • an uplink buffer status report and a logical channel priority procedure may be independently performed for a specific cell or a specific base station even under a dual connectivity structure.
  • the terminal when the terminal transmits the buffer status information for uplink transmission, there is an effect that the transmitted buffer status information is transmitted so as not to be duplicated or missing to one or more base stations.
  • the radio resource in transmitting buffer status information of a logical channel or a logical channel group mapped to a split bearer configured as a dual connection, the radio resource by accurately transmitting the available data amount information of the PDCP object buffer to one or more base stations It has the effect of providing efficient use of.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates an uplink layer 2 structure in a carrier aggregation configuration.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a downlink layer 2 structure in a carrier aggregation configuration.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating another example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating another example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a layer 2 protocol structure for user plane data transmission.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates another example of a layer 2 protocol structure for user plane data transmission.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a view showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of SeNBSCellToAddMod according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a layer 2 structure of a master base station and a secondary base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • 16 is a diagram illustrating a layer 2 structure of a master base station and a secondary base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 17 is a diagram illustrating a layer 2 structure of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG 18 illustrates an example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.
  • FIG 19 shows another example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.
  • FIG 20 shows another example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.
  • 21 is a signal diagram illustrating operations of a terminal and a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 24 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 25 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a MAC configuration diagram of a conventional terminal.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a bearer split user plane structure.
  • FIG. 29 is an exemplary diagram of an available data amount of a logical channel mapped to a split bearer in a terminal for explaining the present invention.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a MAC PDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of an LCID value for UL-SCH according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of each PDCP BSR MAC control element format.
  • 33 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 34 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 35 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a user terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • 36 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the wireless communication system in the present invention is widely deployed to provide various communication services such as voice, packet data, and the like.
  • the wireless communication system includes a user equipment (UE) and a base station (base station, BS, or eNB).
  • a user terminal is a generic concept meaning a terminal in wireless communication.
  • user equipment (UE) in WCDMA, LTE, and HSPA, as well as mobile station (MS) in GSM, user terminal (UT), and SS It should be interpreted as a concept that includes a subscriber station, a wireless device, and the like.
  • a base station or a cell generally refers to a station that communicates with a user terminal, and includes a Node-B, an evolved Node-B, an Sector, a Site, and a BTS.
  • Other terms such as a base transceiver system, an access point, a relay node, a remote radio head (RRH), a radio unit (RU), and a small cell may be called.
  • RRH remote radio head
  • RU radio unit
  • a base station or a cell is a generic meaning indicating some areas or functions covered by a base station controller (BSC) in CDMA, a Node-B in WCDMA, an eNB or a sector (site) in LTE, and the like. It should be interpreted as, and it is meant to cover all the various coverage areas such as megacell, macrocell, microcell, picocell, femtocell and relay node, RRH, RU, small cell communication range.
  • BSC base station controller
  • the base station may be interpreted in two senses. i) A device providing a mega cell, a macro cell, a micro cell, a pico cell, a femto cell, a small cell in relation to a radio area, or ii) may indicate the radio area itself. In i) all devices which provide a given wireless area are controlled by the same entity or interact with each other to cooperatively configure the wireless area to direct the base station.
  • the base station may indicate the radio area itself to receive or transmit a signal from a viewpoint of a user terminal or a neighboring base station.
  • megacells macrocells, microcells, picocells, femtocells, small cells, RRHs, antennas, RUs, low power nodes (LPNs), points, eNBs, transmit / receive points, transmit points, and receive points are collectively referred to as base stations. do.
  • the user terminal and the base station are two transmitting and receiving entities used to implement the technology or technical idea described in this specification in a comprehensive sense and are not limited by the terms or words specifically referred to.
  • the user terminal and the base station are two types of uplink or downlink transmitting / receiving subjects used to implement the technology or the technical idea described in the present invention, and are used in a generic sense and are not limited by the terms or words specifically referred to.
  • the uplink (Uplink, UL, or uplink) refers to a method for transmitting and receiving data to the base station by the user terminal
  • the downlink (Downlink, DL, or downlink) means to transmit and receive data to the user terminal by the base station It means the way.
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
  • FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • OFDM-FDMA OFDM-TDMA
  • OFDM-CDMA OFDM-CDMA
  • One embodiment of the present invention can be applied to resource allocation in the fields of asynchronous wireless communication evolving to LTE and LTE-Advanced through GSM, WCDMA, HSPA, and synchronous wireless communication evolving to CDMA, CDMA-2000 and UMB.
  • the present invention should not be construed as being limited or limited to a specific wireless communication field, but should be construed as including all technical fields to which the spirit of the present invention can be applied.
  • the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission may use a time division duplex (TDD) scheme that is transmitted using different times, or may use a frequency division duplex (FDD) scheme that is transmitted using different frequencies.
  • TDD time division duplex
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • a standard is configured by configuring uplink and downlink based on one carrier or a pair of carriers.
  • the uplink and the downlink include a Physical Downlink Control CHannel (PDCCH), a Physical Control Format Indicator CHannel (PCFICH), a Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator CHannel (PHICH), a Physical Uplink Control CHannel (PUCCH), an Enhanced Physical Downlink Control CHannel (EPDCCH), and the like.
  • Control information is transmitted through the same control channel, and data is configured by a data channel such as a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) and a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • control information may also be transmitted using an enhanced PDCCH (EPDCCH or extended PDCCH).
  • EPDCCH enhanced PDCCH
  • extended PDCCH extended PDCCH
  • a cell means a component carrier having a coverage of a signal transmitted from a transmission / reception point or a signal transmitted from a transmission point or a transmission / reception point, and the transmission / reception point itself. Can be.
  • a wireless communication system to which embodiments are applied may be a coordinated multi-point transmission / reception system (CoMP system) or a coordinated multi-antenna transmission scheme in which two or more transmission / reception points cooperate to transmit a signal.
  • antenna transmission system a cooperative multi-cell communication system.
  • the CoMP system may include at least two multiple transmission / reception points and terminals.
  • the multiple transmit / receive point is at least one having a base station or a macro cell (hereinafter referred to as an eNB) and a high transmission power or a low transmission power in a macro cell region, which is wired controlled by an optical cable or an optical fiber to the eNB. May be RRH.
  • an eNB a base station or a macro cell
  • a high transmission power or a low transmission power in a macro cell region which is wired controlled by an optical cable or an optical fiber to the eNB. May be RRH.
  • downlink refers to a communication or communication path from a multiple transmission / reception point to a terminal
  • uplink means a communication or communication path from a terminal to multiple transmission / reception points.
  • a transmitter may be part of multiple transmission / reception points, and a receiver may be part of a terminal.
  • a transmitter may be part of a terminal, and a receiver may be part of multiple transmission / reception points.
  • a situation in which a signal is transmitted and received through a channel such as a PUCCH, a PUSCH, a PDCCH, an EPDCCH, and a PDSCH may be expressed in the form of 'sending and receiving a PUCCH, a PUSCH, a PDCCH, an EPDCCH, and a PDSCH.
  • a description of transmitting or receiving a PDCCH or transmitting or receiving a signal through the PDCCH may be used as a meaning including transmitting or receiving an EPDCCH or transmitting or receiving a signal through the EPDCCH.
  • the physical downlink control channel described below may mean PDCCH or EPDCCH, and may also be used to include both PDCCH and EPDCCH.
  • the EPDCCH which is an embodiment of the present invention, may be applied to the portion described as the PDCCH, and the EPDCCH may be applied to the portion described as the EPDCCH as an embodiment of the present invention.
  • high layer signaling described below includes RRC signaling for transmitting RRC information including an RRC parameter.
  • the eNB performs downlink transmission to the terminals.
  • the eNB includes downlink control information and an uplink data channel (eg, a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), which is a primary physical channel for unicast transmission, and scheduling required to receive the PDSCH.
  • a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) for transmitting scheduling grant information for transmission on a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) may be transmitted.
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • Low power nodes represent nodes that use lower transmit (Tx) power than typical macro nodes.
  • a small cell can be constructed using a low power remote radio head (RRH), which is a geographically dispersed antenna within macro cell coverage.
  • RRH remote radio head
  • the macro cell and the RRH cell are constructed to be scheduled under the control of one base station.
  • an ideal backhaul is required between the macro cell node and the RRH.
  • An ideal backhaul means a backhaul that exhibits very high throughput and very low latency, such as optical fiber, dedicated point-to-point connections using LOS microwaves (Line Of Sight microwave).
  • non-ideal backhaul backhaul that exhibits relatively low throughput and large delay, such as digital subscriber line (xDSL) and Non LOS microwaves.
  • the plurality of serving cells may be merged through a single base station-based carrier aggregation (CA) technology described above to provide a service to a terminal. That is, a plurality of serving cells may be configured for a UE in a radio resource control (hereinafter referred to as 'RRC') CONNECTED state, and when an ideal backhaul is established between the macro cell node and the RRH, the macro cell And the RRH cell may be configured with serving cells to provide a service to the terminal.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the terminal may have only one RRC connection with the network.
  • one serving cell is a Non-Access Stratum (hereinafter referred to as 'NAS') mobility information (e.g. TAI: Tracking Area Identity) and one serving cell provides security input in RRC connection reset / handover.
  • 'NAS' Non-Access Stratum
  • TAI Tracking Area Identity
  • SCells Secondary Cells
  • SCells may be configured as a serving cell together with a PCell.
  • the configuration of the above-described SCell may vary depending on the traffic amount, so that the SCell may be configured only with a downlink component carrier (CC).
  • CC downlink component carrier
  • the use of uplink resources for each SCell can be configured in addition to the downlink resources. That is, the SCell may not be configured to use only uplink resources.
  • the PCell must always be configured with a downlink CC and an uplink CC.
  • one base station that processes PCell and SCells has different carriers (DL / UL PCC: Downlink / Uplink Primary Component Carrier, DL / UL SCC: Downlink / Uplink Secondary Component Carrier) in the physical layer, but MAC (Medium Access) Only control layer can be affected. Further layers (RLC / PDCP) do not affect the RLC / PDCP layer before carrier aggregation is introduced. That is, the CA operation cannot be distinguished in the RLC / PDCP layer.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates an uplink layer 2 structure in a carrier aggregation configuration.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates a downlink layer 2 structure in a carrier aggregation configuration.
  • the multi-carrier attributes of the physical layer according to the CA based on the single eNB affect only the MAC layer (Medium Access Control).
  • the MAC layer has one independent Hybrid Automatic Retransmit reQuest (HARQ) entity per serving cell in the uplink and downlink.
  • HARQ Hybrid Automatic Retransmit reQuest
  • Each HARQ entity processes a data stream of a component carrier (CC).
  • CC component carrier
  • the MAC layer according to the SCell addition and removal in a single base station-based CA forms an independent HARQ entity in each of the serving cells in the uplink and the downlink to form a data stream of the CC. Treated.
  • the macro cell and the small cell had to be scheduled under one eNB control in order to use the small cell using a carrier aggregation technology.
  • a problem that requires an ideal backhaul construction between the macro cell node and the small cell node. Therefore, when a macro cell and a small cell are constructed through separate eNBs through non-ideal backhaul, there is a problem in that carrier aggregation technology cannot be used.
  • uplink / downlink can provide optimal performance in the downlink and uplink. Due to the different cell borders, the performance of uplink / downlink cell borders may be degraded.
  • the PCell is always configured to handle uplink and downlink traffic, and could not configure a SCell for uplink traffic only. That is, in case of using carrier aggregation technology, even if a small cell having a small path loss with a terminal is configured as an SCell, uplink traffic could be delivered through a macro cell configured as a PCell. Due to such a problem, there is a problem that the terminal consumes more power by using a macrocell with a large path loss for transmitting uplink traffic.
  • the present invention devised to solve such a problem is that between the macro cell and the small cell or under the control of the macro cell in an environment in which the macro cell and the small cell are established through separate eNBs through a non-ideal backhaul in a mobile communication network. It is an object of the present invention to provide a method of separating and transmitting an uplink traffic path and a downlink traffic path in transmitting user plane data traffic through cooperation. That is, the present invention provides a method of providing different uplink traffic paths and downlink traffic paths of a specific data radio bearer.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.
  • the macro cell 302 and the small cells 301 may have the same carrier frequency F1.
  • the first base station 310 providing the macro cell and the second base station 332, 334, 336 providing each small cell are connected through a non-ideal backhaul.
  • Small cells are built in an overlapped macro cell 302 network.
  • An outdoor small cell environment and a small cell cluster 301 may be considered.
  • the UE may be provided with a plurality of serving cells through a dual connection with the macro cell and the small cell in the small cell cluster 301.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating another example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.
  • the macro cell 402 and the small cells 401 may have different carrier frequencies F1 and F2.
  • the first base station 410 providing the macro cell and the second base station 432, 434, 436 providing each small cell are connected via non-ideal backhaul.
  • Small cells are built in an overlapped macro cell 402 network.
  • An outdoor small cell environment and a small cell cluster 401 may be considered.
  • the UE may be provided with a plurality of serving cells through a dual connection with the macro cell and the small cell in the small cell cluster 401. In this case, the frequency of each serving cell may be different from F1 and F2 as shown in FIG. 4.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating another example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.
  • a case in which a plurality of small cells forms a small cell cluster 501 may be considered.
  • the small cell base stations 510, 512, and 514 providing the small cells are connected through non-ideal backhaul.
  • Indoor small cell environment and small cell cluster 501 are considered.
  • the same carrier frequency may be used between the small cells, or different carrier frequencies may be used. Coverage may overlap between small cells.
  • the small cell eNB or the specific small cell eNB in the scenario of FIG. 5 may operate as a stand-alone eNB. That is, the UE may establish one RRC connection with the small cell eNB and control one or more Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) for control plane data transmission. For user plane data transmission, the UE may have a small cell eNB and one or more Data Radio Bearers (DRBs).
  • SRBs Signaling Radio Bearers
  • DRBs Data Radio Bearers
  • the UE may transmit user plane data through one or more small cell eNBs or through cooperation between the macro cell eNB and one or more small cell eNBs under the control of the macro cell eNB.
  • the UE establishes one RRC connection with the macro cell eNB and sets one or more Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) for control plane data transmission.
  • SRBs Signaling Radio Bearers
  • the UE may establish one or more Data Radio Bearers (DRBs) with the macrocell eNB and / or the small cell eNB.
  • DRBs Data Radio Bearers
  • the UE may be controlled through one or more other small cell eNBs under the control of one small cell eNB, or through cooperation between one small cell eNB and one or more other small cell eNBs.
  • User plane data can be sent. That is, the UE establishes one RRC connection with one small cell eNB and sets one or more Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) for control plane data transmission.
  • SRBs Signaling Radio Bearers
  • the UE may establish one or more Data Radio Bearers (DRBs) with one small cell eNB and / or another small cell eNB for user plane data transmission.
  • DRBs Data Radio Bearers
  • FIGS. 3 and 4 will be described as an example for convenience of explanation and understanding, and may be applied to the case of FIG. 5.
  • the terminal when the terminal configures dual connectivity, forms an RRC connection with the terminal, terminates the base station or S1-MME providing a PCell as a reference for handover, and mobility anchor (mobility anchor) to the core network
  • the base station which acts as a master base station or a 1st base station is described.
  • the master base station or the first base station may be a base station providing the above-described macro cell, and may be a base station providing any one small cell in a dual connectivity situation between the small cells.
  • a base station that is distinguished from a master base station in a dual connectivity environment and provides additional radio resources to a terminal is described as a secondary base station or a second base station.
  • the first base station (master base station) and the second base station (secondary base station) may provide at least one cell to the terminal, respectively, and the first base station and the second base station may be connected through an interface between the first base station and the second base station.
  • a cell associated with a first base station may be referred to as a macro cell
  • a cell associated with a second base station may be referred to as a small cell.
  • a cell associated with the first base station may also be described as a small cell.
  • the macro cell in the present invention may mean each of at least one or more cells, and may be described as a generic term for all cells associated with the first base station.
  • the small cell may also mean each of at least one or more cells, and may also be described as a generic term for all cells associated with the second base station.
  • the cell may be a cell associated with the first base station.
  • the cell of the second base station may be described as another small cell or another small cell.
  • the terminal may perform communication through the plurality of cells associated with the first base station and the plurality of cells associated with the second base station, and in this case, the PCell function of the plurality of cells associated with the first base station is performed.
  • the specific cell may be described as the first base station PCell.
  • a specific cell among a plurality of cells associated with the second base station may be described as the second base station PCell.
  • the second base station PCell refers to a cell that performs all or part of the functions of the aforementioned PCell among the cells associated with the second base station.
  • the second base station PCell may perform a PUCCH transmission / reception function.
  • the dual connectivity is configured in the terminal, the cell associated with the first base station or the serving cell associated with the first base station is referred to as a master cell group, and the cell associated with the second base station or the serving cell associated with the second base station is referred to as a secondary cell group. can do.
  • the cell group is used as a concept for distinguishing a base station from the terminal point of view.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a layer 2 protocol structure for user plane data transmission.
  • user plane data may be transmitted using radio resources provided through a first base station and a second base station for each data radio bearer using the protocol structure as shown in FIG. 6.
  • the PDCP entity of the first base station may submit a PDCP PDU to the first base station RLC entity and the second base station RLC entity.
  • the specific radio bearer may be configured by splitting the first base station and the second base station.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates another example of a layer 2 protocol structure for user plane data transmission.
  • the user plane data may be transmitted only through the first base station or the user plane data only through the second base station for each data radio bearer using the protocol structure as shown in FIG. 7.
  • the UE of the present invention uploads user plane data through one or more secondary base stations under the control of the master base station, or through cooperation between the master base station and one or more secondary base stations. It is possible to separate link traffic and downlink traffic. That is, an eNB that can provide an optimized transmission rate may be selected in consideration of load, path loss, and coverage for a given uplink and downlink data traffic. For example, the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic are separated and delivered. The uplink traffic for all DRBs is transmitted through the terminal and the secondary base station with low path loss, and the downlink traffic for all DRBs (or RBs) is transferred to the master base station. Can pass through.
  • uplink traffic for a particular DRB (s) is passed through the secondary base station
  • downlink traffic for another particular DRB (s) is passed through the master base station
  • another specific DRB (s) For traffic, both uplink downlinks can pass through the master base station and the secondary base station. That is, for a specific data radio bearer transmitting user plane data using radio resources provided through the first base station and the second base station as shown in FIG. 6, uplink traffic is transmitted only through the second base station, and downlink traffic is transmitted. It can be delivered through the first base station and the second base station. Alternatively, for another specific data radio bearer transmitting user plane data using radio resources provided through the first base station and the second base station as shown in FIG.
  • uplink traffic is transmitted through the first base station and the second base station. Downlink traffic may be forwarded only through the first base station. Alternatively, for another specific data radio bearer transmitting user plane data by using radio resources provided through the first base station and the second base station as shown in FIG. 6, both the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic may be the first base station and the second base station. It may be delivered through a base station.
  • uplink / downlink user plane data traffic may be transmitted only through a first base station for a specific data radio bearer as shown in FIG. 7.
  • uplink / downlink user plane data traffic may be transmitted only through the second base station for another specific data radio bearer.
  • the method for the UE to separately transmit and receive transmission paths of the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic may be transmitted and received by dividing the paths by various implementation methods as well as the above-described examples.
  • First embodiment Method for separating up and down traffic transmission path in units of a radio bearer (RB).
  • RB radio bearer
  • the UE When the UE establishes an RRC connection with a first base station providing a cell that operates as a PCell and is in an RRC Connected state, the UE sets a cell associated with a second base station connected through a non-ideal backhaul to a second base station SCell (or serving cell). Can be added as
  • the second base station SCell information (SeNBSCellToAddMod) to be added / modified of the second base station SCell list to be added / modified may include the following information.
  • CellIdentification Includes Physical Cell ID (PCI) and Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) information of the second base station SCell.
  • PCI Physical Cell ID
  • ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
  • Radio Resource Configuration Common SCell Information (radioResourceConfigCommonScell): Essential information for UE to operate in SCell, which includes common radio resource configuration information in system information.
  • radioResourceConfigCommonScell Essential information for UE to operate in SCell, which includes common radio resource configuration information in system information.
  • common radio resource configuration information physical layer parameters, random access parameters, and the like may be included.
  • RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell Contains UE-specific configuration information (e.g. physicalConfigDedicatedSCell, mac-MainConfigSCell) applicable to the SCell.
  • the cell information (cell addition modification information) to be added so that the terminal can distinguish the second base station SCell from the base station SCell linked to the existing PCell may include the second base station identification information.
  • the second base station SCell index value may be set differently from the SCell index value of the base station linked to the existing PCell to distinguish the cell associated with the second base station. For example, in order to use a value other than the value used as the SCell index of the base station linked to the existing PCell, the SCell index, which can have an integer value from 1 to 7, currently has an integer value from 1 to 14 You can do that.
  • an integer value of 1 to 7 may be used as an index for SCells of a base station linked to a PCell, and an integer value of 8 to 14 may be used as an index for a second base station.
  • the SCell index and the indication information field indicating that the SCell through the second base station may be configured and transmitted together.
  • the UE is included in the received radio resource configuration common SCell information and the radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information. Accordingly, the second base station SCell corresponding to the cell identifier is added. That is, when the second base station SCell is not configured for the UE, the second base station SCell corresponding to the cell identifier is added according to the received radio resource configuration common SCell information and the radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information.
  • the UE modifies the second base station SCell according to the received radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information. . That is, in the case of the second base station SCell configured for the UE, the second base station SCell is modified according to the received radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information.
  • the information included in the above-described second base station SCell information to be added / modified is the first base station and the second base station before the first base station providing the cell operating as the PCell adds / modifies the second base station SCell through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Interrogation can be made through the X2 interface.
  • the information included in the second base station SCell information to be added / modified may be preconfigured in the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell, stored in advance through operations, administration and maintenance (OAM), or previously generated. 2 may be stored and used in a base station SCell addition / modification procedure.
  • the UE may distinguish the CC associated with the second base station or the second base station in adding / modifying the second base station.
  • the UE of the present invention can distinguish a transmission / reception path of downlink data (traffic) and uplink data (traffic).
  • a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may be configured as follows for a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell and / or a second base station providing a cell operating as an SCell through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure.
  • the same method can be used to configure radio resources.
  • a specific embodiment of configuring a radio resource will be described with reference to the drawings.
  • a method of including cell / base station index / division information for data transmission path establishment in RadioResourceConfigDedicated is a method of including cell / base station index / division information for data transmission path establishment in RadioResourceConfigDedicated.
  • a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell uses a radio bearer addition modification list (DRB-ToAddModList) or radio bearer release list (DRB-ToReleaseList) information of radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicated).
  • Radio resources may be configured for a second base station providing a cell operating as a serving first base station and / or a second base station SCell (or serving cell). For example, by adding / modifying a specific radio bearer of a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell to a second base station providing a cell operating as a first base station and / or a second base station SCell (or serving cell). Can be configured.
  • the wireless bearer additional modification information DRB-ToAddMod of the wireless bearer addition modification list drb-ToAddModList is eps-BearerIdentity (EPS bearer identifier), drb-Identity, and PDCP configuration information.
  • EPS bearer identifier eps-BearerIdentity
  • drb-Identity eps-BearerIdentity
  • PDCP configuration information eps-BearerIdentity
  • pdcp-Config eps-BearerIdentity
  • rlc-Config one or more of RLC configuration information
  • logicalChannelIdentity logicalChannelConfig
  • the radio bearer modification information DRB-ToAddMod of the radio bearer addition modification list drb-ToAddModList may be eps-BearerIdentity (EPS bearer identifier), drb-Identity, second base station.
  • EPS bearer identifier eps-BearerIdentity
  • drb-Identity eps-BearerIdentity
  • second base station eps-BearerIdentity
  • PDCP entity configuration information pdcp-Config
  • RLC entity configuration information (rlc-Config) peered to the second base station RLC entity
  • logicalChannelIdentity logicalChannelConfig.
  • a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may separate uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and transmit the uplink cell identifier (eg, uplink cell identifier) to the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod).
  • uplink cell identifier eg, uplink cell identifier
  • DRB-ToAddMod radio bearer modification information
  • PCI PCI
  • downlink cell identifier e.g. PCI
  • the index / division information for distinguishing may be included.
  • the first base station operating as a PCell may separate the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and deliver the same through the specific cell or the specific second base station SCell or the specific CC or the specific eNB.
  • Uplink Cell Identifier eg PCI
  • Downlink Cell Identifier eg PCI
  • Uplink SCell Index / Downlink SCell (or PCell) Index
  • Uplink eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information for distinguishing uplink / downlink cell / base station.
  • the UE may use the uplink cell identifier (eg PCI) / downlink cell identifier (eg PCI) or uplink SCell index / downlink SCell index or uplink eNB identifier /
  • the uplink / downlink traffic of the radio bearer is respectively transmitted to the uplink cell / downlink cell or uplink SCell /
  • a cell group associated with a downlink SCell or an uplink CC / downlink CC or an uplink eNB / downlink eNB or an uplink eNB may be classified and transmitted through a cell group associated with the downlink eNB.
  • the aforementioned uplink cell identifier eg PCI
  • downlink cell identifier eg PCI
  • uplink SCell index / downlink SCell index or uplink eNB
  • the above-described radio bearer does not distinguish between the uplink and the downlink. It can be delivered without. That is, the radio bearer may be delivered through a macro cell, a primary component carrier (PCC), or a first base station. As another example, the radio bearer may be delivered through the serving cell or the serving cell eNB. For example, it may be delivered through a cell group associated with the first base station and the second base station or the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • PCC primary component carrier
  • Uplink traffic may be delivered through the cell or the base station or a cell group associated with the base station.
  • the terminal may transmit downlink traffic for the corresponding radio bearer through a macro cell or a cell associated with the first base station or the first base station.
  • the terminal may deliver uplink traffic for the radio bearer through the cell, the base station, or a cell group associated with the base station.
  • the terminal may transmit downlink traffic through the serving cell or the serving cell eNB for the corresponding radio bearer. That is, the terminal may transmit downlink traffic for the corresponding radio bearer through the macro cell and the small cell, the first base station and the second base station, or the cell group associated with the first base station and the cell group associated with the second base station.
  • the information included in the radio bearer addition modification list (drb-ToAddModList) described above as an example is described before the first base station operating as a PCell adds / modifies and / or releases the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. It may be generated through a procedure through the X2 interface between the second base station.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • the above-described radio resource configuration information may include uplink cell identifiers (eg, PCI) / downlink cell identifiers (eg, PCI) or uplink SCell index /
  • the downlink SCell index or uplink eNB identifier / downlink eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information for distinguishing the uplink / downlink cell / base station. That is, the uplink cell identifier (eg PCI) / downlink cell identifier (eg PCI) or uplink SCell index / downlink SCell index or uplink eNB in the radio bearer add modification information (DRB-ToAddMod).
  • DRB-ToAddMod radio bearer add modification information
  • Radio resource configuration information including an identifier / downlink eNB identifier or index / division information for identifying a cell / base station to which the UE will transmit uplink traffic and / or a cell / base station to transmit downlink traffic is an example. It can be configured together.
  • the ENBIndex may be configured to have an integer value between 1 and 5 as a specific base station index value for transmitting uplink traffic.
  • the ENBIndex may be configured to have a value of True if configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the second base station, or False otherwise (eg, configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the first base station).
  • the ENBIndex is a value for distinguishing the configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through the second base station, a value for distinguishing the configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through the first base station, the first base station and the second. It may be configured to be able to distinguish a value for distinguishing what is configured to transmit uplink traffic through the base station.
  • ENBIndex may have SCellIndex / ENBIndex as a value list. That is, ENBIndex may have two index values when downlink traffic is processed through two base stations.
  • a first base station operating as a PCell may use an uplink cell identifier (eg, an uplink cell identifier (DRB-ToAddMod)) in order to separate and transmit uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer.
  • an uplink cell identifier eg, an uplink cell identifier (DRB-ToAddMod)
  • DRB-ToAddMod uplink cell identifier
  • PCI uplink cell identifier
  • uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or index / division information for identifying the cell / base station to which the UE will carry uplink traffic.
  • the first base station may transmit uplink traffic for a specific radio bearer to the small cell configured with the second base station SCell in the uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) in the radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) or
  • the uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information for identifying the cell / base station to which the uplink traffic will be delivered.
  • the first base station may transmit the uplink traffic for a specific radio bearer to the radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) to deliver uplink traffic through a specific cell or a specific second base station SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB.
  • PCI or an uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or an index / division information for identifying a cell / base station to which the UE will carry uplink traffic.
  • an uplink cell identifier for example, PCI
  • the uplink traffic of the radio bearer is transmitted through the cell or the second base station SCell or the secondary component carrier (SCC) or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station based on the radio bearer modification information. I can deliver it.
  • the downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted through a macro cell, a PCC, or a first base station.
  • downlink traffic of the corresponding radio bearer may be transmitted through a serving cell or a serving cell eNB.
  • the downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted through a cell group associated with the first base station and the second base station or the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • the aforementioned uplink cell identifier for example, PCI
  • uplink SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or cell / base station for the UE to transmit uplink traffic is used.
  • the radio bearer may be transmitted without distinguishing the uplink and the downlink. That is, the radio bearer may be delivered through a macro cell, a primary component carrier (PCC), or a first base station. Alternatively, the radio bearer may be delivered through a serving cell or a serving cell eNB. For example, it may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • the information included in the above-described radio bearer addition modification list may be applied to the first base station and the second base station before the first base station operating as the PCell adds / modifies and / or releases the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Can be created through a procedure via an inter X2 interface.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • the radio bearer add modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) included in the above-described radio resource configuration information may be an uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) or an uplink SCell index or an uplink eNB identifier or UE. It may include index / division information for identifying a cell / base station to carry uplink traffic.
  • the ENBIndex may be configured to have an integer value between 1 and 5 as a specific base station index value for transmitting uplink traffic.
  • the ENBIndex may be configured to have a value of True if configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the second base station, and False otherwise (eg, configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the first base station).
  • the ENBIndex is a value for distinguishing the configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through the second base station, a value for distinguishing the configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through the first base station, the first base station and the second. It may be configured to be able to distinguish a value for distinguishing what is configured to transmit uplink traffic through the base station.
  • ENBIndex may have a list of indices as a value. For example, ENBIndex may include two index values when processing downlink traffic through two base stations.
  • a first base station operating as a PCell is a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell by using a radio bearer modification list (DRB-ToAddModList) or a radio bearer release list (DRB-ToReleaseList) of radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicated). And / or configure a radio resource for a second base station providing a cell that operates as a second base station SCell (or serving cell). For example, a specific radio bearer of a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may be added / modified to a second base station operating as a first base station and / or a second base station SCell (or serving cell). .
  • the wireless bearer additional modification information DRB-ToAddMod of the wireless bearer addition modification list drb-ToAddModList is eps-BearerIdentity (EPS bearer identifier), drb-Identity, and PDCP configuration information.
  • EPS bearer identifier eps-BearerIdentity
  • drb-Identity eps-BearerIdentity
  • PDCP configuration information eps-BearerIdentity
  • pdcp-Config eps-BearerIdentity
  • rlc-Config one or more of RLC configuration information
  • logicalChannelIdentity logicalChannelConfig
  • the radio bearer modification information DRB-ToAddMod of the radio bearer addition modification list drb-ToAddModList may be eps-BearerIdentity (EPS bearer identifier), drb-Identity, second base station.
  • EPS bearer identifier eps-BearerIdentity
  • drb-Identity eps-BearerIdentity
  • second base station eps-BearerIdentity
  • PDCP entity configuration information pdcp-Config
  • RLC entity configuration information (rlc-Config) peered to the second base station RLC entity
  • logicalChannelIdentity logicalChannelConfig.
  • the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell is a cell identifier (eg, PCI) in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) to separate and transmit uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer.
  • the second base station SCell index or eNB identifier or UE may include index / division information for identifying a cell / base station.
  • the first base station separates uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and delivers it through a specific cell or a specific second base station SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB, so as to add radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod).
  • the cell identifier eg, PCI
  • the second base station SCell index or the eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information for identifying the cell / base station.
  • the radio bearer additional modification information may further include uplink / downlink discrimination information (eg, UpDownIndicator).
  • the UE may transmit uplink (or downlink) traffic of the radio bearer through a specific cell or a specific SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB according to uplink / downlink classification information.
  • uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to a downlink value
  • the downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted only through the cell / base station included in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod).
  • DRB-ToAddMod radio bearer modification information
  • the uplink and downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted only through the cell / base station included in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). have.
  • the information included in the drb-ToAddModList includes X2 between the first base station and the second base station before the first base station operating as a PCell adds / modifies and / or releases the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Can be created through a procedure through an interface.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • radio resource configuration information may be defined in a cell identifier (for example, PCI) or a second base station SCell index or an eNB identifier or a UE in a radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). Index / division information and uplink / downlink division information may be included.
  • a cell identifier for example, PCI
  • DRB-ToAddMod radio bearer additional modification information
  • uplink / downlink discrimination information may be divided into uplink, downlink, and / or bidirectional (uplink / downlink) through an integer value of 0 to 3.
  • uplink traffic of the radio bearer is transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. You can do that.
  • downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station or a macrocell.
  • the downlink traffic may be delivered through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell associated with the first base station and a cell associated with the second base station.
  • uplink traffic of the radio bearer is transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. can do.
  • uplink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or the macrocell.
  • uplink traffic may be delivered through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell associated with the first base station and a cell associated with the second base station.
  • the uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to a bidirectional value, the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic of the radio bearer are transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. You can do that.
  • uplink / downlink discrimination information may deliver traffic by classifying uplink and downlink through an integer value of 0 to 1 or a true / false value. For example, if the uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to 0 or True, uplink traffic may be delivered only through the cell or the corresponding second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the corresponding base station or the corresponding base station. In this case, the downlink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell. Or, in this case, the downlink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • UpDownIndicator may deliver traffic by classifying uplink and downlink through an integer value of 0 to 1 or a true / false value. For example, if the uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to 0 or True, uplink traffic may be delivered
  • the downlink traffic may be transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station.
  • uplink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell.
  • uplink traffic may be delivered through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • a method of including uplink cell index and downlink cell index in the SeNB / SCell radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell).
  • a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell operates as a PCell by using a radio bearer addition modification list (DRB -ToAddModList) or a radio bearer release list (DRB -ToReleaseList) of the first base station Radio Resource Configuration Information (RadioResourceConfigDedicated).
  • Radio resources may be configured for a first base station providing a cell.
  • the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell adds a radio bearer additional modified list (DRB -ToAddModList) to a second base station radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell) or delivers a radio bearer through a second base station SCell.
  • Radio resource may be configured for a second base station providing a cell that operates as a second base station SCell by adding information for indicating the information.
  • a specific radio bearer of a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may be configured in addition to a second base station providing a cell operating as a first base station and / or a second base station SCell (or serving cell). Can be.
  • radio resources may be configured for the first base station and / or the second base station by adding a radio bearer additional modified list (DRB-ToAddModList) to the second base station radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell).
  • the radio bearer addition modification list DRB-ToAddModList may be configured in the same manner as described above.
  • a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may separate uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and transmit the uplink cell identifier (eg, uplink cell identifier) to the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod).
  • uplink cell identifier eg, uplink cell identifier
  • DRB-ToAddMod radio bearer modification information
  • PCI uplink cell identifier
  • downlink cell identifier e.g. PCI
  • the first base station separates the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and delivers the radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) for delivery through a specific cell or a specific second base station SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB.
  • Uplink cell identifier eg PCI
  • downlink cell identifier eg PCI
  • uplink SCell index / downlink SCell index
  • uplink eNB identifier / downlink eNB identifier or UE uplink / It may also include index / division information for identifying the downlink cell / base station.
  • Uplink cell identifier eg PCI
  • downlink cell identifier eg PCI
  • the link eNB identifier / downlink eNB identifier or the UE receives the index / division information for distinguishing the uplink / downlink cell / base station
  • the uplink / downlink traffic of the corresponding radio bearer is respectively applied to the corresponding uplink cell / downlink.
  • Cell or uplink SCell / downlink SCell or uplink CC / downlink CC or uplink eNB / downlink eNB can be delivered separately.
  • an uplink cell identifier eg PCI
  • downlink cell identifier eg PCI
  • an uplink SCell index / downlink SCell index or uplink eNB identifier When the downlink eNB identifier or the UE receives radio resource configuration information that does not include an index / division information for distinguishing an uplink / downlink cell / base station, the corresponding radio bearer forwards without distinguishing the uplink and the downlink.
  • the radio bearer may be delivered through a macro cell, a primary component carrier (PCC), or a first base station.
  • the radio bearer may be delivered through a serving cell or a serving cell eNB. For example, it may be delivered through a cell group associated with the first base station and the second base station or the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • the information included in the above-described radio bearer addition modification list may be used before the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell before adding / modifying and / or releasing the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. It may be generated through a procedure through the X2 interface between the second base station.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • the above-described radio resource configuration information may be defined in a cell identifier (eg, PCI) or a second base station SCell index or an eNB identifier or a UE in a radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). It may include an index / classification information for.
  • the ENBIndex may be configured to have an integer value between 1 and 5 as a specific base station index value to transmit uplink traffic.
  • the ENBIndex may be configured to have a value of True if configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the second base station, and False otherwise (eg, configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the first base station).
  • ENBIndex is a value for distinguishing configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through a second base station, a value for distinguishing configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through a first base station, a first base station and a second base station. It may be configured to identify a value for distinguishing the configuration to transmit the uplink traffic through.
  • the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may separate the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and transmit the uplink cell identifier (DRB-ToAddMod) to the uplink cell identifier (DRB-ToAddMod).
  • DRB-ToAddMod uplink cell identifier
  • PCI uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or the UE may include the index / classification information for identifying the cell / base station to carry the uplink traffic.
  • the first base station separates uplink traffic for a specific radio bearer and delivers the uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) to the radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) to deliver the small cell configured with the second base station SCell.
  • uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or index / division information for identifying the cell / base station to which the UE will carry uplink traffic.
  • the first base station separates uplink traffic for a specific radio bearer and delivers the uplink to the radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) for delivery through a specific cell or a specific second base station SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB.
  • the cell identifier (eg PCI) or the uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information for identifying the cell / base station to which the uplink traffic will be delivered.
  • the aforementioned uplink cell identifier eg, PCI
  • uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or cell / base station to which the UE will carry uplink traffic is identified.
  • the uplink traffic of the corresponding radio bearer may be transmitted through the aforementioned cell or the second base station SCell or SCC or eNB.
  • downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted through a macro cell, a PCC, or a first base station.
  • downlink traffic of the corresponding radio bearer may be transmitted through a serving cell or a serving cell eNB.
  • the downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted through a cell group associated with the first base station and the second base station or the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • an uplink cell identifier eg, PCI
  • the radio bearer may be transmitted without distinguishing the uplink and the downlink. That is, the radio bearer may be delivered through a macro cell, a primary component carrier (PCC), or a first base station. Alternatively, the radio bearer may be delivered through a serving cell or a serving cell eNB. For example, it may be delivered through a cell group associated with the first base station and the second base station or the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • the information included in the drb-ToAddModList includes X2 between the first base station and the second base station before the first base station operating as a PCell adds / modifies and / or releases the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Can be created through a procedure through an interface.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • the above-described second base station radio resource configuration information may be included in a cell identifier (for example, PCI) or a second base station SCell index or eNB identifier or a UE in a radio bearer addition modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). It may include index / division information for identifying the base station.
  • the ENBIndex may be configured to have an integer value between 1 and 5 as a specific base station index value to transmit uplink traffic.
  • the ENBIndex may be configured to have a value of True if configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the second base station, and False otherwise (eg, configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the first base station).
  • ENBIndex is a value for distinguishing configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through a second base station, a value for distinguishing configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through a first base station, a first base station and a second base station. It may be configured to identify a value for distinguishing the configuration to transmit the uplink traffic through.
  • a method of including uplink / downlink discrimination information in SeNB / SCell radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell).
  • a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell operates as a PCell by using a radio bearer addition modification list (DRB -ToAddModList) or a radio bearer release list (DRB -ToReleaseList) of the first base station Radio Resource Configuration Information (RadioResourceConfigDedicated).
  • Radio resources can be configured for the first base station.
  • the first base station operating as a PCell adds a radio bearer modified list (DRB-ToAddModList) to the second base station radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell) or indicates that a radio bearer is delivered through a second base station SCell.
  • a radio resource may be configured for a second base station providing a cell that operates as an SCell.
  • a specific radio bearer of a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may be configured in addition to a second base station providing a cell operating as a first base station and / or a second base station SCell (or serving cell). Can be.
  • radio resources may be configured for the first base station and / or the second base station by adding a radio bearer additional modified list (DRB-ToAddModList) to the second base station radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell).
  • the radio bearer addition modification list DRB-ToAddModList may be configured in the same manner as in the above-described method.
  • the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell is a cell identifier (eg, PCI) in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) to separate and transmit uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer.
  • the second base station SCell index or eNB identifier or UE may include index / division information for identifying a cell / base station.
  • the first base station separates the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and delivers the same through a specific cell or a specific SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB, and the cell identifier in the DRB-ToAddMod.
  • the radio bearer additional modification information may further include uplink / downlink discrimination information (eg, UpDownIndicator).
  • the radio bearer modification information may be included in a cell identifier (e.g., PCI) or a second base station SCell index or eNB identifier or a UE only when it is included in the information of the radio resource configuration dedicated (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell). It may also include index / division information for identifying the base station.
  • a cell identifier e.g., PCI
  • a second base station SCell index or eNB identifier e.g., a second base station SCell index or eNB identifier or a UE only when it is included in the information of the radio resource configuration dedicated (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell). It may also include index / division information for identifying the base station.
  • the UE transmits uplink (or downlink) traffic of the radio bearer according to uplink / downlink discrimination information to a specific cell or a specific second base station SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB or a specific eNB. Can be delivered through a group of cells associated with.
  • the uplink traffic for that radio bearer will be delivered only through the cell / base station included in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod).
  • DRB-ToAddMod radio bearer modification information
  • downlink traffic for the radio bearer may be delivered through the first base station or the macrocell.
  • the downlink traffic for the radio bearer may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic for the radio bearer may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • the downlink traffic for the radio bearer may be transmitted only through the cell / base station included in the radio bearer modification information DRB-ToAddMod.
  • the uplink traffic for the radio bearer may be delivered through the first base station or the macro cell.
  • the uplink traffic for the radio bearer may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic for the radio bearer may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • the uplink / downlink classification information is set to a bidirectional value, the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic for the corresponding radio bearer will be transmitted only through the cell / base station included in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). Can be.
  • the information included in the drb-ToAddModList includes X2 between the first base station and the second base station before the first base station operating as a PCell adds / modifies and / or releases the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Can be created through a procedure through an interface.
  • FIG. 13 is a view showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.
  • the second base station radio resource configuration information may be included in a cell identifier (for example, PCI) or a second base station SCell index or an eNB identifier or a UE in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). It may include index / division information and uplink / downlink discrimination information for discriminating.
  • a cell identifier for example, PCI
  • DRB-ToAddMod radio bearer modification information
  • uplink / downlink discrimination information may distinguish uplink, downlink, and / or bidirectional (uplink / downlink) through an integer value of 0-3.
  • the uplink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell associated with the base station or the base station.
  • the downlink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell.
  • the downlink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. .
  • uplink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or the macrocell.
  • uplink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic of the radio bearer are transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. Can be.
  • the uplink / downlink discrimination information may deliver traffic by classifying uplink and downlink through an integer value of 0 to 1 or true / false value.
  • uplink traffic may be delivered through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station.
  • the downlink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell.
  • the downlink traffic may be delivered through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • the downlink traffic may be transmitted through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station.
  • uplink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or the macrocell.
  • uplink traffic may be delivered through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • Second embodiment A method of separating uplink traffic transmission path by cell, CC, or eNB.
  • the UE When the UE establishes an RRC connection with a first base station providing a cell that operates as a PCell and is in an RRC Connected state, the UE sets a cell associated with a second base station connected through a non-ideal backhaul to a second base station SCell (or serving cell). Can be added as
  • the first base station providing a cell acting as a PCell detects a new second base station SCell candidate, to add cells associated with the second base station to the second base station SCell, or to modify the configured second base station SCell;
  • the first base station operating as the PCell adds / modifies the second base station SCell through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure.
  • the UE If the UE includes a second base station SCell list (SeNBSCellToAddModList) to be added / modified to the received RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, the UE performs addition or modification of the second base station SCell.
  • a second base station SCell list (SeNBSCellToAddModList) to be added / modified to the received RRC Connection Reconfiguration message
  • the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell includes the following information in the SCell information (SeNBSCellToAddMod) to be added / modified in the second base station SCell list to be added / modified in order to separate and transmit uplink traffic and downlink traffic. Can be.
  • the first base station operating as a PCell may add / modify the above-described second base station SCell list to be added / modified to separate the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic and deliver them through a specific cell or a specific SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB.
  • SCell information (SeNBSCellToAddMod) may include the following information.
  • Second Base Station SCell Index (SeNBSCellIndex): Contains index information used to identify one second base station SCell within second base station SCells configured for the UE.
  • CellIdentification Includes Physical Cell ID (PCI) and Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) information of the second base station SCell.
  • PCI Physical Cell ID
  • ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
  • Radio Resource Configuration Common SCell Information (radioResourceConfigCommonScell):
  • the essential information for the UE to operate in the SCell is the common radio resource configuration information (eg, physical layer parameters, random access parameters) in the system information (System information). Include.
  • Radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information (radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell): Contains UE-specific configuration information applicable to the SCell (for example, physicalConfigDedicatedSCell, mac-MainConfigSCell).
  • Uplink / downlink distinguishing information (eg, UpDownIndicatorSeNB, UpDownIndicatorSCell) of the second base station or the second base station SCell: for the direction (uplink / downlink) of traffic to be transmitted through the second base station or the second base station SCell.
  • the cell information (cell addition modification information) to be added so that the terminal can distinguish the second base station SCell from the base station SCell linked to the existing PCell may include the second base station identification information.
  • the second base station SCell index value may be set differently from the SCell index value of the base station linked to the existing PCell to distinguish the cell associated with the second base station. For example, in order to use a value other than the value used as the SCell index of the base station linked to the existing PCell, the SCell index, which can have an integer value from 1 to 7, currently has an integer value from 1 to 14 You can do that.
  • An integer value of 1 to 7 may be used as an index for SCells of a base station linked to a PCell, and 8 to 14 may be used as an index for a second base station.
  • the SCell index and the indication information field indicating that the SCell through the second base station may be transmitted together.
  • the UE is included in the received radio resource configuration common SCell information and the radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information. Accordingly, the second base station SCell corresponding to the cell identifier is added. That is, when the second base station SCell index is not the second base station SCell configured for the UE, the second base station SCell corresponding to the cell identifier is added according to the received radio resource configuration common SCell information and radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information.
  • the UE modifies the second base station SCell according to the received radio resource configuration-specific SCell information when the second base station SCell index included in the second base station SCell information to be added / modified is a current UE configuration part. That is, when the second base station SCell index is the second base station SCell configured for the UE, the second base station SCell is modified according to the received radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information.
  • the information included in the above-described second base station SCell information to be added / modified is the first base station and the second base station before the first base station providing the cell operating as the PCell adds / modifies the second base station SCell through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Interrogation can be made through the X2 interface.
  • the information included in the second base station SCell information to be added / modified is pre-configured in the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell, stored in advance through operations, administration and maintenance (OAM), or a previous second base station. It may be stored and used in the SCell add / modify procedure.
  • the second base station SCell information described above may be configured as shown in FIG. 14.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of SeNBSCellToAddMod according to the present invention.
  • the above-described second base station SCell information (SeNBSCellToAddMod) to be added / modified may be configured to include SCell uplink / downlink classification information.
  • uplink / downlink discrimination information (eg, UpDownIndicatorSeNB or UpDownIndicatorSCell) of the second base station or the second base station SCell may be uplink, downlink, and / or bidirectional (through an integer value of 0 to 3).
  • Uplink / downlink may be uplink, downlink, and / or bidirectional (through an integer value of 0 to 3).
  • the uplink traffic of all user plane data is associated with the second base station or the second base station SCell or the second base station. It can only be transmitted through cell groups.
  • downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station or a macrocell.
  • the downlink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell associated with the first base station and a cell associated with the second base station.
  • downlink traffic of all user plane data may be transmitted only through the second base station or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the second base station.
  • uplink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell.
  • uplink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic of all user plane data may be transmitted only through the second base station or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the second base station. can do.
  • the above-described second base station or second base station SCell uplink / downlink discrimination information may be uplink or downlink through an integer value of 0 to 1 or a True / False value. To separate traffic.
  • uplink traffic may be delivered through the cell group associated with the second base station or the second base station SCell or the second base station. Can be.
  • the downlink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell.
  • the downlink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • downlink traffic may be delivered through a cell group associated with the second base station or the second base station SCell or the second base station. Can be.
  • uplink traffic may be delivered through a macrocell base station or a macrocell.
  • uplink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.
  • radio resource configuration information and a second base station SCell addition / modification procedure for separating and transmitting uplink and downlink traffic transmission / reception paths according to embodiments of the present invention have been described.
  • 15 is a diagram illustrating a layer 2 structure of a master base station and a secondary base station according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a Layer2 protocol structure of a first base station (macrocell eNB) and a second base station (small cell eNB) for separately transmitting an uplink traffic path and a downlink traffic path.
  • downlink traffic is transmitted through a first base station and uplink data traffic is transmitted through a second base station for one data radio bearer (DRB).
  • DRB data radio bearer
  • the first base station generates one PDCP entity for one DRB in the PDCP layer.
  • An RLC entity for processing downlink traffic and one RLC entity for processing uplink traffic may be separated from a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer that performs segmentation and ARQ (Automatic Repeat ReQeuest). That is, for the Acknowledgment Mode (AM) RLC processing, the first base station may have an entity (or an entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station) for the Acknowledgment Mode (AM) RLC processing for the downlink data.
  • the second base station may have an entity (or entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station) for AM (Acknowledged Mode) RLC processing on the uplink data.
  • Entity (or entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station) and the entity for AM (Acknowledged Mode) RLC processing for uplink data described above
  • the entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station may perform an Automatic Repeat ReQeuest (ARQ) operation through a backhaul between the first base station and the second base station.
  • ARQ Automatic Repeat ReQeuest
  • a DL AM RLC entity (or entity for AM RLC processing in a first base station) for downlink traffic may be received via a UL AM RLC entity (or entity for AM RLC processing in a second base station).
  • Retransmission may be performed based on the feedback (eg, RLC status report).
  • the AM RLC entity may send a status report to its peer AM RLC entity to provide positive and / or negative acknowledgments of the RLC PDUs.
  • an entity for downlink Acknowledgment Mode (AM) RLC processing of the UE (or an entity for in-terminal AM RLC processing peered to an entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station) is received through the first base station. Transmit positive and / or negative acknowledgments of downlink RLC PDUs through the second base station.
  • the entity for downlink Acknowledgment Mode (AM) RLC processing of the UE is a DL AM RLC entity (or an AM RLC entity in the first base station) for downlink traffic in the first base station through the second base station. You can send a status report to.
  • the first base station may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to deliver downlink traffic and related control information (eg, L1 control information).
  • HARQ Hybrid automatic repeat request
  • the second base station may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to deliver uplink traffic and related control information (eg, L1 control information).
  • HARQ Hybrid automatic repeat request
  • 16 is a diagram illustrating a layer 2 structure of a master base station and a secondary base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 shows another example of a Layer 2 protocol structure of a first base station (macrocell eNB) and a second base station (small cell eNB) for separately transmitting uplink traffic and downlink traffic according to the present invention.
  • downlink traffic for one data radio bearer is delivered through a first base station (macrocell eNB) and a second base station (small cell eNB), and uplink data traffic is transmitted to the second base station.
  • Is passed through. 16 may be similarly applied to processing a plurality of DRBs.
  • the first base station generates one PDCP entity for one DRB in the PDCP layer.
  • the first base station performs an acknowledgment mode (AM) RLC for downlink traffic. It may have an entity for processing (or an entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station).
  • the second base station may have an entity (or entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station) for AM (Acknowledged Mode) RLC processing for uplink traffic and downlink traffic.
  • the entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station and the entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station are each operated by Automatic Repeat ReQeuest (ARQ) through a cell associated with the first base station and a cell associated with the second base station.
  • ARQ Automatic Repeat ReQeuest
  • an entity for AM RLC processing in a first base station configured in a first base station sends an RLC PDU for downlink user plane data traffic through a macrocell or a group of cells associated with the first base station or PCC or the first base station.
  • ARQ Automatic Repeat ReQeuest
  • the entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station configured in the first base station is the feedback of the RLC receiver for downlink traffic received through the macrocell or the first base station or a cell group associated with the PCC or the first base station (one For example, retransmission may be performed based on an RLC status report.
  • the entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station configured in the second base station transmits and receives RLC PDUs for uplink and downlink user plane data traffic through the small cell or the cell associated with the second base station or the SCC or the second base station. .
  • the entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station is the feedback of the RLC receiver for uplink traffic received through the small cell or the second base station or the cell associated with the SCC or the second base station (eg, RLC status report) Can be sent to the UE.
  • the entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station is the feedback of the RLC receiver for downlink traffic transmitted through the small cell or the second base station or the cell associated with the SCC or the second base station (eg, RLC status report) Through RLC retransmission can be performed.
  • the first base station may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to deliver downlink traffic and related feedback (and / or control information).
  • the second base station may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to convey uplink and downlink traffic and associated feedback (and / or control information).
  • HARQ Hybrid automatic repeat request
  • 17 is a diagram illustrating a layer 2 structure of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the terminal may have a Layer2 protocol structure for separately transmitting uplink traffic and downlink traffic.
  • one PDCP entity is created in the PDCP layer for one data radio bearer (DRB).
  • the terminal is a cell associated with a macrocell or a first base station (macrocell eNB) or a PCC or a first base station for processing an acknowledgment mode (AM) RLC in a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer for one data radio bearer (DRB).
  • Group for uplink and downlink traffic through the small cell or second base station (small cell eNB) or SCC and the entity for the Acknowledgment Mode (AM) RLC processing of downlink traffic through the group (the entity peered to the MeNB AM RLC entity). It may have an entity for an AM (Acknowledged Mode) RLC processing (an entity peered to a SeNB AM RLC entity).
  • AM RLC entity for processing downlink traffic through a macrocell or a cell associated with a first base station or PCC or a first base station receives a downlink RLC PDU through a macrocell or cell associated with a first base station or PCC or a first base station
  • a feedback eg, an RLC status report
  • the first base station may perform RLC retransmission based on the feedback of the RLC receiver for downlink traffic.
  • the AM RLC entity for processing uplink, downlink traffic through a small cell or a cell associated with a second base station or an SCC or a second base station is uplinked through a cell associated with the small cell or the second base station or an SCC or a second base station.
  • the UE may transmit and receive downlink RLC PDUs.
  • the UE may perform RLC retransmission based on feedback of an RLC receiver (eg, an RLC status report) to uplink user plane data traffic transmitted through a small cell or a second base station or a cell group associated with an SCC or a second base station. Can be.
  • logical channels for carrying uplink traffic through a small cell configured with a second base station SCell or a cell group associated with a second base station or a CC or a second base station of the small cell are transferred to the second base station SCell. It may be mapped to a transport channel (eg, an uplink shared channel, UL-SCH) through a configured small cell or a second base station or a cell group associated with a CC or a second base station of the small cell.
  • the UE may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to convey downlink traffic and related feedback (and / or control information).
  • the UE may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to convey uplink traffic and related feedback (and / or control information).
  • the uplink user plane data is transmitted only through the second base station.
  • the transmission of uplink user plane data only through the first base station may be equally applied in the scope of the present invention. have.
  • the UE may configure an RLC entity peered with the first base station and the second base station, respectively.
  • the UE may receive downlink traffic through the RLC entity peered to the RLC entity of the first base station and transmit uplink traffic through the RLC entity peered to the RLC entity of the second base station.
  • the UE may receive downlink traffic through an RLC entity peered to the RLC entity of the first base station and an RLC entity peered to the RLC entity of the second base station.
  • the uplink traffic can be processed only through the RLC entity configured to be peered to the RLC entity of the second base station.
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • DRB data radio bearer
  • the first base station of the present invention divides it into radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) of the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • Information for example, feedback AM-RLC information or uplink downlink division indication information or uplink cell / base station index / division information may be included.
  • FIG 18 illustrates an example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message may include the above-described classification information in the RLC-Config information for the AM RLC included in the radio bearer addition modification information (DRB-ToAddMod).
  • the aforementioned ul-AM-RLC-SeNB may include configuration information for an RLC entity that processes uplink traffic through a second base station.
  • the dl-AM-RLC-SeNB may include configuration information for an RLC entity that processes downlink traffic through the second base station.
  • the ul-AM-RLC-MeNB-Feedback may include configuration information for an RLC entity for transmitting RLC feedback on the uplink through a first base station.
  • the dl-AM-RLC-MeNB may include configuration information for an RLC entity that processes downlink traffic through the first base station.
  • FIG 19 shows another example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message may include RLC-Config information for AM RLC in radio bearer addition modification information (DRB-ToAddMod).
  • DRB-ToAddMod radio bearer addition modification information
  • the above-described up-down-split-indicator information may include information indicating uplink downlink separation, respectively. That is, it indicates that an RLC entity necessary for processing an RLC data or feedback information, which is peered to an RLC entity configured in each base station to an existing RLC entity, must be additionally configured.
  • FIG 20 shows another example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.
  • an RRC reconfiguration message indicates an uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) or an uplink second base station SCell for configuring a cell / base station to transmit uplink data to radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod).
  • the index or uplink eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information or uplink / downlink discrimination information for identifying an uplink cell / base station.
  • the RLC-Config information for the AM RLC may allow the UE to additionally configure an RLC entity according to the information before 3GPP Rel-11.
  • the first base station radio resource configuration information (or radio bearer information included therein) is included in the first base station radio resource configuration information (or included therein) together with the first base station RLC-Config.
  • Radio bearer information may include a second base station RLC-Config.
  • the uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) or uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or UE described in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) of the RRC reconfiguration message may be assigned to an uplink cell /
  • the PDCP entity for the radio bearer may be an uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) or an uplink second base station SCell index or A base station (e.g., a second base station) or a corresponding base station (e.g., a second base station) configured by an uplink eNB identifier or a UE through an index / division information or uplink / downlink identification for identifying an uplink cell / base station
  • the PDCP PDU can be delivered to the AM RLC entity in the UE peered to the AM RLC entity configured in the cell associated with the C-P. In this manner, the terminal
  • the PDCP entity of the terminal is an AM RLC entity in the terminal peered to the RLC entity of the first base station or the second base station for uplink data transmission using one or more of the above-described index, identifier, and identification information. You can submit only.
  • the PDCP entity of the terminal may submit the PDU as an AM RLC entity in the terminal peered to the RLC entity of the first base station or as an AM RLC entity in the terminal peered to the RLC entity of the second base station.
  • the first base station or the second base station will be described as a specific base station.
  • the Logical Channel Prioritization (LCP) procedure is used to construct a MAC PDU by determining the amount of data from each logical channel and MAC control element type to be included in the MAC PDU.
  • logical channels for transmitting uplink traffic are transmitted through a small cell configured with a second base station SCell or a cell group associated with a second base station or a CC of a small cell or a second base station. It may be mapped to a transport channel (Uplink Shared Channel, UL-SCH) through a small cell configured with a 2 base station SCell or a cell group associated with a CC or a second base station of a second base station or a small cell.
  • UL-SCH Uplink Shared Channel
  • the UE may perform a logical channel prioritization procedure for each cell group associated with the small cell configured with the second base station SCell or the second base station or the small cell CC or the second base station.
  • the UE of the present invention may be applied to a specific small cell or a second base station or a small cell CC configured as an SCell in the following steps for each small cell or second base station or small cell CC configured as an SCell or for each cell group associated with the second base station.
  • Resources may be allocated to logical channels to which they belong.
  • Step 1) The UE allocates resources in decreasing priority order to all logical channels of Bj> 0 belonging to a specific small cell or a second base station configured as an SCell or a cell group associated with the small cell CC or the second base station.
  • Step 2 The UE reduces Bj to the total size of MAC SDUs serviced in the logical channel of step 1.
  • Step 3 If the UE has any resources remaining, all logical channels belonging to a specific small cell or second base station or small cell CC configured as SCell are strict decreasing priority order until data or uplink grant for the logical channel is exhausted. Serviced.
  • the UE may consider the priority for each small cell or second base station or small cell CC configured with the SCell.
  • the present invention provides a mobile station through a small cell under the control of the macro cell or through cooperation between the macro cell and the small cell in an environment in which the macro cell and the small cell are established through separate eNBs through a non-ideal backhaul in a mobile communication network.
  • a method for delivering user plane data using radio resources provided by the first base station and the second base station is provided.
  • the UE according to the present invention has an effect of transmitting uplink data traffic through a small cell consisting of a terminal and a second base station SCell having a low path loss, or a cell group associated with a second base station or a small cell CC or a second base station. have.
  • the uplink buffer status reporting and Logical Channel Prioritization (LCP) procedure may be performed in a small cell configured with a second base station SCell or a second base station or small cell even under a dual connectivity structure through a first base station and a second base station.
  • LCP Logical Channel Prioritization
  • 21 is a signal diagram illustrating operations of a terminal and a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the terminal 2101 may receive higher layer signaling from the first base station 2102 (S2110).
  • higher layer signaling may be an RRC Reconfiguration message.
  • higher layer signaling is an index / identifier capable of distinguishing a specific base station (eg, a second base station) or a cell associated with a specific base station or a cell group associated with a specific base station to transmit uplink user plane data according to each of the above-described embodiments. / Delimited information, and the like.
  • the terminal 2101 may configure dual connectivity with the first base station 2102 and the second base station 2103.
  • the radio bearer through the first base station and the radio bearer through the second base station may be configured.
  • the radio bearer through both the first base station and the second base station may be split to the first base station and the second base station and configured similarly to FIG. 6. That is, one PDCP entity and one or more RLC entities peered to RLC entities of each of the first base station and the second base station may be configured.
  • the terminal 2101 may configure an RLC entity peered to each base station.
  • the PDCP entity of the terminal 2101 may be configured by using the information included in the above-described higher layer signaling in submitting a PDCP PDU for uplink traffic to the RLC entity. That is, it may be transmitted to the RLC entity peered to the RLC entity of the specific base station (for example, the second base station) by using one or more information of the above-described index, identifier, and discrimination information (S2130).
  • the transmitted uplink data is transmitted to the second base station 2103 through the MAC layer (S2140).
  • the terminal, the first base station, and the second base station may be implemented with various modified steps or information according to the above-described embodiments.
  • the terminal of the present invention configures a dual connection including a first base station and a second base station and a split radio bearer, and downlink data can be received through the first base station and the second base station.
  • the terminal may transmit only to a specific base station (for example, the second base station).
  • FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • a higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with a first base station and a second base station and higher layer signaling
  • a higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with a first base station and a second base station and higher layer signaling
  • a specific base station e.g., a second base station
  • the terminal may receive higher layer signaling including information for configuring dual connectivity with the first base station and the second base station (S2210).
  • higher layer signaling may include an index or identifying information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting uplink data to a specific base station (eg, a second base station). That is, it may include one or more pieces of information of the index, the identifier, the identification information of each of the above-described embodiments.
  • the higher layer signaling may include radio resource configuration information and may be an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the terminal may configure a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station based on higher layer signaling (S2220). For example, the terminal may configure one or more RLC entities to form a dual connection with a plurality of base stations connected by non-ideal backhaul, configure a dedicated radio bearer with each base station, and split radio bearers with a plurality of base stations. bearer) may be configured.
  • the PDCP entity of the UE may further include submitting PDCP PDUs for each of the one or more radio bearers to an RLC entity peered to a specific base station (eg, a second base station) based on higher layer signaling (see FIG. S2230).
  • the one or more radio bearers may be radio bearers configured to be split into a first base station and a second base station. That is, in transmitting uplink user plane data, the PDCP entity of the terminal may submit a PDCP PDU to the RLC entity in the terminal configured by peering the PDCP PDU to the RLC entity of a specific base station (for example, the second base station). . Through this, the terminal may transmit only uplink data to the second base station.
  • the UE may further include performing a logical channel priority procedure in the MAC entity peered to the second base station.
  • the logical channel priority procedure may perform a logical channel priority procedure for logical channels to carry uplink data through the second base station.
  • the terminal may perform an operation required to perform the present invention of each embodiment described above.
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • a first base station may include generating higher layer signaling and higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with the terminal.
  • the method may include transmitting to a terminal and configuring a split radio bearer for the terminal.
  • the first base station may generate higher layer signaling including information for configuring dual connectivity with the terminal (S2310).
  • higher layer signaling may further include index or segmentation information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting uplink data to a particular base station (eg, a second base station).
  • the higher layer signaling may include one or more pieces of information among the index, the identifier, and the distinguishing information of the above-described embodiments.
  • the first base station may transmit the generated higher layer signaling to the terminal (S2320).
  • higher layer signaling may include radio resource configuration information and may be transmitted in an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the first base station may configure a dual connection with the second base station to the terminal, may configure a split radio bearer (S2330).
  • the first base station may configure a dual connection with the terminal, and may configure a split radio bearer and / or a dedicated radio bearer as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7.
  • the UE configures a dual connection based on the information of the higher layer signaling received from the first base station, and can transmit uplink data for the split bearer only to a specific base station (for example, the second base station).
  • the base station may perform operations required to carry out the present invention of each of the above-described embodiments.
  • 24 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the terminal 2400 may include a receiver 2410 for receiving higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station and based on the higher layer signaling.
  • a receiver 2410 for receiving higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station and based on the higher layer signaling.
  • It may include a control unit 2420 to control to.
  • a user terminal 2400 includes a receiver 2410, a controller 2420, and a transmitter 2430.
  • the receiver 2410 may receive higher layer signaling, downlink control information, data, and a message from a base station through a corresponding channel.
  • higher layer signaling may include an index or segment for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting uplink data to a particular base station (eg, a second base station). That is, it may include one or more pieces of information of the index, the identifier, the identification information of each of the above-described embodiments.
  • the higher layer signaling may include radio resource configuration information and may be an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the control unit 2420 may be configured to deliver different uplink traffic paths and downlink traffic paths when a plurality of base stations form a dual connection to a terminal in a mobile communication network required to perform the above-described embodiments of the present invention. Control the overall operation of the terminal according.
  • the controller 2420 may configure a radio bearer configured to be split into the first base station and the second base station.
  • the controller 2420 may control the PDCP entity of the terminal to submit a PDCP PDU for each of one or more radio bearers to an RLC entity configured to be peered to a specific base station (eg, a second base station) based on higher layer signaling. have.
  • the one or more radio bearers may be radio bearers that are split and configured at the first base station and the second base station. That is, the controller 2420 may control one PDCP entity to submit the PDCP PDU to the RLC entity in the terminal configured to be peered to the RLC entity of a specific base station (for example, the second base station).
  • controller 2420 may control to perform a logical channel priority procedure in the MAC entity peered to the second base station.
  • the control may be performed to perform a logical channel priority procedure for logical channels to transmit uplink data through the second base station.
  • the transmitter 2430 transmits uplink control information, data, and messages to the base station through the corresponding channel.
  • the transmitter 2430 may transmit uplink data for the split bearer only to a specific base station (for example, the second base station).
  • 25 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the first base station 2500 is a control unit 2510 for generating a higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection to the terminal in controlling uplink data transmission of the terminal and Including a transmitter 2520 for transmitting higher layer signaling to the terminal, the controller 2510 may control to configure a split radio bearer for the terminal.
  • a base station 2500 includes a controller 2510, a transmitter 2520, and a receiver 2530.
  • the control unit 2510 is configured to configure the uplink traffic path and the downlink traffic path differently when a plurality of base stations form a dual connection to the terminal in the mobile communication network required to perform the above-described embodiments of the present invention. To control the overall operation of the base station.
  • the controller 2510 may generate higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with the terminal.
  • higher layer signaling may further include index or segmentation information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting uplink data to a particular base station (eg, a second base station).
  • the higher layer signaling may include one or more pieces of information among the index, the identifier, and the distinguishing information of the above-described embodiments.
  • the controller 2510 may configure a split radio bearer in the second base station and the terminal. Alternatively, a dedicated wireless bearer and a split wireless bearer may be configured together.
  • the transmitter 2520 transmits the generated higher layer signaling to the terminal.
  • higher layer signaling may include radio resource configuration information and may be transmitted in an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the transmitter 2520 may transmit downlink data to the terminal.
  • the receiver 2530 is used to receive a signal, a message, and data necessary for carrying out the above-described present invention with the terminal.
  • uplink data of the terminal may be transmitted through a specific base station (for example, the second base station) and transmitted to the first base station.
  • the specific base station is the first base station
  • uplink data of the terminal may be transmitted only to the first base station.
  • the terminal can transmit the uplink data traffic through a specific base station in an environment in which a dual connection with a plurality of base stations.
  • uplink data may be transmitted through the terminal and the second base station with little path loss, thereby reducing power consumption and improving uplink data transmission speed of the terminal.
  • uplink data may be transmitted through a first base station having a wide coverage, thereby improving mobility performance.
  • an uplink buffer status report and a logical channel priority procedure may be performed only for a specific cell or a specific base station even under a dual connectivity structure.
  • a terminal configures a radio bearer with one or more base stations, and transmits buffer status information for uplink transmission.
  • the first embodiment and the second embodiment to be described below mean each embodiment of the method for transmitting the buffer status report of the terminal for the uplink transmission of the present invention, the first embodiment of the present invention for the uplink transmission An embodiment different from the first embodiment and the second embodiment is meant.
  • 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a MAC configuration diagram of a conventional terminal.
  • the MAC layer may perform various functions. For example, the MAC layer may perform mapping between logical channels and transport channels. In addition, the MAC layer may perform a function of multiplexing MAC Service Data Units (SDUs) into transport blocks (TBs) transmitted from one or different logical channels to transport channels of the physical layer. . In addition, the MAC layer may perform a function of de-multiplexing MAC Service Data Units (SDUs) from transport blocks (TBs) transmitted on physical layer transport channels from one or different logical channels. do. In addition, a function such as logical channel prioritization and error correction through a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) may be performed. In addition, the MAC layer provides a data transfer service for logical channels.
  • SDUs MAC Service Data Units
  • TBs transport blocks
  • HARQ hybrid automatic repeat request
  • MAC layer provides a data transfer service for logical channels.
  • Each logical channel type may be defined according to what type of information is transmitted.
  • one radio bearer is mapped to one logical channel.
  • 27 and 28 are diagrams illustrating respective examples of a bearer split user plane structure.
  • radio resources of a plurality of base stations may be merged and used for bearer transmission.
  • each base station needs to have an independent scheduler.
  • RLC entity and MAC entity may be configured in each of the first base station and the second base station.
  • a first base station has one PDCP entity, an RLC entity, and a MAC entity for a specific radio bearer in a bearer separation structure in which one radio bearer is divided into a second base station.
  • the second base station may have an RLC entity and a MAC entity for the radio bearer.
  • the radio bearer provided through the RLC entity and the MAC entity to each of the first base station and the second base station as in the right radio bearer of FIG. 27 is referred to as a split radio bearer as shown in FIG. 6.
  • a bearer may have a first base station separated from an RLC entity.
  • the first base station may have one PDCP entity, RLC entity, and MAC entity for a specific radio bearer.
  • the second base station may have one MAC entity separately from the first base station in the bearer configured by bearer separation for the radio bearer. As another example, it may further have an RLC entity.
  • the buffer status report procedure is a procedure used to provide the serving cell base station with information about the amount of available data for transmission in terminal uplink (UL) buffers.
  • the specific buffer status reporting procedure is described in Section 5.4.4 of 3GPP TS 36.321.
  • the Buffer Status Report (BSR) should be triggered when the following events occur.
  • Uplink data is available for one logical channel belonging to one logical channel group (LCG) for transmission in a Radio Link Control (RLC) entity or a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) entity. Lose. And the data belongs to a logical channel group belonging to any logical channel group and having a higher priority than the priority of the logical channels for the already available data, or among the logical channels belonging to one logical channel group. No data is available for anything.
  • the buffer status report in this case is called "Regular BSR".
  • a buffer status report is called a "Padding BSR" when an uplink resource is allocated and the number of padding bits is equal to or greater than the size of the buffer status report MAC control element plus its subheader.
  • the buffer status report when the retransmission buffer status report timer (retxBSR-Timer) expires and the terminal has available data for transmission to any of the logical channels belonging to the logical channel group is also referred to as "Regular BSR".
  • Period BSR-Timer The buffer status report when the periodic buffer status report timer (periodicBSR-Timer) expires is called "Periodic BSR".
  • One MAC Protocol Data Unit may include at most one MAC Buffer Status Report Control Element (BSR control element).
  • BSR control element MAC Buffer Status Report Control Element
  • the UE should transmit at most one Regular / Periodic BSR within one Transmission Time Interval (TTI). If the UE is requested to transmit a plurality of MAC PDUs in one TTI, the UE may include a padding BSR to any of the MAC PDUs not including the Regular / Periodic BSR.
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • All BSRs sent in one TTI always indicate the buffer status after all MAC PDUs have been created for this TTI.
  • Each logical channel group should report at most one buffer status value per TTI. This value must be reported in all buffer status reports (BSRs) that report the buffer status for this logical channel group.
  • the UE For the purpose of reporting buffer status of the MAC layer, the UE should consider the following as the amount of data available in the RLC layer.
  • the UE should consider PDCP control PDUs and the following as the amount of data available in the PDCP layer.
  • the SDU itself is considered. Also, if there is an SDU processed by PDCP for an SDU for which a PDU is not submitted to a lower layer, the PDU is considered.
  • a specific bearer such as a right bearer (split bearer) terminates the S1-U interface at the first base station for one bearer and uses a bearer split user plane structure. To be processed through the first base station and the second base station.
  • bearer separated bearers may have schedulers in a plurality of base stations for one bearer transmission.
  • the amount of available data provided through the existing buffer state reporting for uplink transmission is calculated by summing the amount of available data of the RLC layer and the PDCP layer.
  • a problem may occur.
  • the amount of available data of the PDCP layer may be calculated in duplicate when calculating the uplink buffer through the first base station and when calculating the uplink buffer through the second base station. Therefore, when performing uplink scheduling at the first base station or uplink scheduling at the second base station, excessive scheduling may occur compared to the total uplink buffer amount of the terminal. That is, since the information on the amount of available data included in one PDCP entity is included in a plurality of buffer status reports, the information on the amount of actual available data may not be correctly transmitted to the base station.
  • data may be transmitted by merging radio resources through a plurality of base stations.
  • separate schedulers are required for individual base stations for one bearer transmission.
  • the terminal may calculate an uplink buffer through the first base station.
  • the terminal may calculate the uplink buffer through the second base station and when the amount of available data of the PDCP layer may overlap. Therefore, a problem may occur that causes waste of radio resources by inducing scheduling that exceeds the total uplink buffer amount of the terminal.
  • the present invention devised to solve such a problem is a method that can be accurate buffer status report even when different base stations are configured to transmit data by merging radio resources through a separate scheduler for a specific bearer separated bearer. to provide. For example, it is possible to provide a method for efficiently using radio resources by allowing a terminal to report the amount of available data corresponding to the total amount of uplink buffers for logical channels of a corresponding radio bearer to individual base stations. The purpose.
  • FIG. 29 is an exemplary diagram of an available data amount of a logical channel mapped to a split bearer in a terminal for explaining the present invention.
  • the terminal has an RLC entity (RLC-M) in the terminal peered to the RLC entity of the master base station for the split bearer and an RLC entity (RLC-S) in the terminal peered to the RLC entity of the secondary base station.
  • the terminal also has an in-terminal MAC entity (MAC-M) peered to the MAC entity of the master base station and the in-terminal MAC entity (MAC-S) peered to the MAC entity of the secondary base station.
  • a logical channel mapped to a MAC layer of a terminal or a MAC entity of a terminal or a MAC entity of a terminal is calculated by summing up the available data amounts of a higher layer, thereby calculating BSR. You can ask too much.
  • the terminal may transmit a buffer status report to each base station.
  • the MAC entity (MAC-M: MAC-Master) peered to the MAC entity of the master base station is in the buffer status report sent to the first base station to the available data amount 500 of the PDCP entity and the first base station RLC entity
  • the available data amount 200 of the peered RLC entity (RLC-M: RLC-Master) may include 700 available data amount information, which is added up.
  • the MAC entity (MAC-S: MAC-Secondary) peered to the MAC entity of the secondary base station may use the amount of data 500 and RLC (RLC-S :) of the PDCP entity in the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station.
  • the available data amount 100 of the RLC-Secondary layer may include 600 available data amount information, which is added up. Accordingly, there is a problem in that the amount of available data of 500 is excessively transmitted compared to 800 (500 + 200 + 100), which is the total amount of available data included in each layer of the terminal.
  • the present invention provides an efficient buffer status report method based on the embodiments described below.
  • a logical channel mapped to a split bearer is mainly described as an example for convenience of explanation, and the same method may be applied to a logical channel group as well as a logical channel.
  • the PDCP buffer status information means the amount of available data of the PDCP layer.
  • First embodiment A method of transmitting PDCP buffer status information of a logical channel mapped to a split bearer separately from a buffer status report.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a MAC PDU (Protocol Data Unit) according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • MAC PDU Protocol Data Unit
  • a MAC PDU includes one MAC header, zero or more MAC Service Data Units (SDUs), zero or more MAC control elements, and optionally includes padding. do.
  • SDUs MAC Service Data Units
  • the MAC PDU header consists of one or more MAC PDU subheaders 3001. Each subheader 3001 corresponds to one MAC SDU, one MAC control element or padding (A MAC PDU header consists of one or more MAC PDU subheaders; each subheader corresponds to either a MAC SDU, a MAC control element or padding).
  • the Logical Channel ID (LCID) field included in the MAC header identifies the logical channel instance of the corresponding MAC SDU or the type of the corresponding MAC control element or padding.
  • a terminal may transmit PDCP buffer status information for a logical channel or a logical channel group mapped to a split bearer differently from a buffer status report to a base station.
  • a PDCP for a logical channel (or a logical channel group including logical channels) mapped to the split bearer may be separately transmitted to the base station.
  • the PDCP buffer status information may be delivered through a MAC control element.
  • a separate Logical Channel ID (LCID) value may be defined.
  • the separate LCID value may be defined as exemplarily shown in FIG. 31.
  • FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of an LCID value for UL-SCH according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the terminal may transmit PDCP buffer status information to the first base station and / or the second base station. Accordingly, the PDCP buffer status information is duplicated and transmitted separately without being included in the buffer status report, thereby delivering information on the exact amount of available data.
  • the PDCP buffer status information may be included in the MAC control element and transmitted to the first base station and / or the second base station.
  • the format of the PDCP buffer status information MAC control elements may be classified into a PDCP Short BSR format, a PDCP Truncated BSR, and a PDCP Long BSR format. That is, the PDCP buffer status report can be transmitted using the BSR format, and can be distinguished from the existing BSR using a specific index.
  • 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of each PDCP BSR MAC control element format.
  • the terminal may transmit PDCP buffer status information to the first base station and / or the second base station.
  • the terminal may transmit the PDCP buffer status information using the BSR format.
  • a BSR transmitted including only PDCP buffer status information may be divided into separate indexes as shown in FIG. 31.
  • the PDCP Short BSR / PDCP Truncated BSR format 3200 includes one Logical Channel Group ID (LCG ID) field and one corresponding buffer size field as shown in FIG. 32.
  • the logical channel group ID field is a field for identifying a logical channel group for which buffer status information is to be reported, and may be configured in 2-bit length.
  • the PDCP Long BSR format may include four buffer size fields 3210, 3220, and 3230 corresponding to LCG IDs # 0 to # 3.
  • FIG. 32 illustrates that the buffer size is composed of six bits
  • the PDCP BSR may be designed with a value smaller than six bits by applying a level different from the existing BSR. For example, it may be designed with three bits that can have eight indices, four bits that can have sixteen indices, five bits that can have thirty-two indexes, and the like.
  • the buffer size field of FIG. 32 is the total amount of data available in the PDCP layer for a logical channel (or logical channel group containing bearer split logical channels) mapped to split bearers through a first base station and a second base station. It may include information about.
  • the base station receiving the PDCP buffer status information may estimate the amount of available data of the PDCP layer that can be processed through each base station.
  • the base station multiplies each base station by multiplying the distribution ratio from the PDCP layer (or entity) in the terminal to the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the first base station and the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the second base station. It is possible to calculate the amount of available data of the PDCP layer that can be processed through. That is, the total available data amount of the PDCP layer can be distributed according to the distribution ratio to check buffer state information of the PDCP layer to be processed at each base station.
  • Each of the first base station and the second base station has a PDCP buffer state to be processed in each base station described above in an existing buffer status report (short BSR or Truncated BSR or Long BSR) calculated by summing the available data amounts of the RLC layer and the PDCP layer. By subtracting the value of the information, the amount of available data of the RLC layer of each base station can be confirmed. Accordingly, each base station can determine the amount of available data to be transmitted uplink through each base station by adding the available data amount of the RLC layer for each base station and the available data amount of the distributed PDCP layer according to the distribution ratio. Each base station may calculate an actual uplink radio resource (uplink grant) to be scheduled through each base station in the above-described manner and allocate uplink radio resources that should be provided through each base station.
  • uplink grant uplink radio resource
  • the distribution ratio from the PDCP layer (or entity) in the terminal to the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the first base station and the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the second base station is static between the first base station and the second base station.
  • the first base station may be configured when configuring a dual connection for a split bearer in the terminal through signaling with the second base station. Or, it may be dynamically changed according to radio quality and exchanged periodically or according to a specific event through signaling through an interface between the first base station and the second base station.
  • the distribution ratio is dynamically calculated, one or more information of a calculation cycle for calculating the distribution ratio, a change cycle for changing the distribution ratio, and a trigger condition for interface signaling may be exchanged together.
  • the first base station or the first 2 The base station may provide this information to the terminal through RRC signaling or MAC signaling.
  • the buffer size field of FIG. 32 calculates the total amount of data available in the PDCP layer for the logical channel (or logical channel group including bearer split logical channels) of the split bearer over the first base station and the second base station. It may include ratio information for.
  • the base station receiving the PDCP buffer status information determines the total amount of available data of the PDCP layer from the existing BSR (short BSR or Truncated BSR or Long BSR), which is calculated by summing the available data amounts of the RLC layer and the PDCP layer.
  • the total amount of available data of the PDCP layer may be calculated by multiplying the ratio to calculate.
  • the base station subtracts the available data amount of the RCP layer from the existing BSR (short BSR or Truncated BSR or Long BSR) calculated by summing the available data amounts of the RLC layer and the PDCP layer. Able to know.
  • Each base station that calculates an uplink radio resource may allocate an uplink radio resource to be provided through each base station.
  • the distribution ratio from the PDCP layer (or entity) in the terminal to the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the first base station and the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the second base station is static between the first base station and the second base station.
  • the first base station may be configured when configuring a dual connection for a split bearer in the terminal through signaling with the second base station.
  • the distribution ratio may be dynamically changed according to radio quality and exchanged periodically or according to a specific event through signaling through an interface between the first base station and the second base station.
  • the distribution ratio is dynamically calculated, one or more information of a calculation cycle for calculating the distribution ratio, a change cycle for changing the distribution ratio, and a trigger condition for interface signaling may be exchanged together.
  • the distribution ratio from the PDCP layer (or entity) in the terminal to the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the first base station and the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the second base station is dynamically changed, the first base station or the first 2 The base station may provide this information to the terminal through RRC signaling or MAC signaling.
  • the UE may transmit PDCP buffer status information related to the amount of available data of the PDCP layer separately from the existing BSR.
  • Second embodiment A method for a terminal to calculate and transmit available data for each base station according to a distribution ratio.
  • the amount of data available for the logical channel (or logical channel group) mapped to the aforementioned split bearer is calculated by classifying the base stations. Reporting can be made through existing BSR (short BSR or Truncated BSR or Long BSR) MAC CE.
  • the UE uses a bearer split user plane structure in a PDCP layer for a logical channel (or logical channel group) mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station.
  • the available data amount of the existing PDCP layer can be calculated in consideration of the distribution ratio to individual base stations.
  • the terminal may use a bearer split user plane structure to map a logical channel (or logic) to a split bearer configured to process data through the first base station and the second base station (or through one or more base stations).
  • Channel state can calculate the buffer state information (available data amount) of the PDCP layer for each base station (or for each cell group) in proportion to the uplink grant information received in the corresponding TTI for each base station.
  • the terminal may calculate buffer state information (available data amount) of the PDCP layer for each base station (or for each cell group) based on an uplink grant average during a previous or recent TTI multiple period.
  • each base station is multiplied by the ratio of the available data of the PDCP layer for the corresponding logical channel by the ratio of the uplink grant (or the average of the uplink grants during the previous (most recent) TTI multiple times) to the corresponding TTI received for each base station.
  • Buffer status information of the star (or cell group) PDCP layer may be calculated. For example, when the first base station uplink grant is a and the second base station uplink grant is b, the uplink grant ratio a / (a + b) is multiplied by the total amount of available data in the PDCP layer to give the first base station. Buffer status information of the PDCP layer may be calculated.
  • each base station (or cell group) PDCP is included in the RRC message in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may include TTI period information for calculating the available data amount of the layer and / or information for indicating the same. Alternatively, the above-described information for calculating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer in the terminal may be preset.
  • the terminal may use a bearer split user plane structure to map a logical channel (or logic) to a split bearer configured to process data through the first base station and the second base station (or through one or more base stations).
  • Channel status can calculate buffer status information (available data amount) for each base station of the PDCP layer in proportion to the uplink grant during periodicBSR-Timer included in the MAC-MainConfig information element for each base station. have.
  • the terminal may calculate buffer state information (available data amount) for each base station (or cell group) of the PDCP layer in proportion to the uplink grant during the retxBSR-Timer included in the MAC-MainConfig information element.
  • the terminal receives new information (eg, a calculation cycle) necessary for calculating a ratio on the RRC message and is proportional to each base station (or cell group) of the PDCP layer in proportion to an uplink grant calculated according to the corresponding information.
  • Buffer status information (available data amount) can be calculated. That is, the available amount of data of the PDCP layer for the corresponding logical channel is multiplied by the uplink grant rate during periodicBSR-Timer or retxBSR-Timer for each base station to enable the use of the PDCP layer for each base station (or cell group). The amount of data can be calculated.
  • the ratio of a / (a + b) is fully available to the PDCP layer.
  • the amount of available data of the PDCP layer of the first base station may be calculated by multiplying the amount of data.
  • the downlink allocation may be used in place of the above-mentioned uplink grant, or the uplink grant and the downlink allocation may be combined.
  • each base station (per cell group) PDCP layer is included in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information on the RRC message. May include periodic information for calculating the amount of available data and / or information for indicating the amount of available data. Alternatively, the above-described information for calculating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer in the terminal may be preset.
  • the above-described MAC-MainConfig information element for each base station may include individual configuration parameters for the MAC entity for each base station or each cell group when dual connectivity is configured for the terminal.
  • the secondary base station MAC-MainConfig (MAC-MainConfigSeNB or MAC-MainConfigSCG) is a buffer state independent of the buffer status report timers (eg periodicBSR-Timer and / or retxBSR-Timer) contained within the master base station MAC-MainConfig. May include report timers.
  • the terminal may be configured to process a logical channel (or mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station (or through one or more base stations) using a bearer split user plane structure.
  • Buffer status information of PDCP layer by each base station (or cell group) by equally allocating available data amount of PDCP layer for existing logical channel for each base station (or cell group) (Amount of available data) can be calculated.
  • each base station (or cell group) PDCP is included in the RRC message in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may also include information for calculating the amount of available data of the layer and / or information for indicating it. Alternatively, the above-described information for calculating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer in the terminal may be preset.
  • the terminal may be configured to process a logical channel (or mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station (or through one or more base stations) using a bearer split user plane structure.
  • Calculate PDCP buffer status information (available data amount) for each base station (or cell group) based on a ratio calculated based on radio quality status or RRM measurement information between a terminal and each base station for a logical channel group). can do. That is, the amount of available data of each base station (or cell group) PDCP layer can be calculated by allocating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer for the corresponding logical channel in proportion to or inversely proportional to the radio quality state or RRM measurement information. have.
  • each base station (or cell group) PDCP is included in the RRC message in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may include one or more of information for calculating the amount of available data of the layer, measurement period, measurement event, information for displaying it. Alternatively, the above-described information may be preset in the terminal.
  • the terminal may use a bearer split user plane structure to map a logical channel (or to a split bearer configured to process data through the first base station and the second base station (or through one or more base stations).
  • Logical channel group may be calculated based on available data amount information of the RLC layer peered to the terminal and each base station. That is, buffer status information of the PDCP layer for each base station is allocated by allocating the available data amount of the PDCP layer for the corresponding logical channel in proportion to or inversely proportional to the available data amount information of the RLC layer peered to each of the first base station and the second base station. (Amount of data available) can also be calculated.
  • each base station (or cell group) PDCP is included in the RRC message in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may also include information for calculating the amount of available data of the layer and / or information for indicating it. Alternatively, the above-described information for calculating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer in the terminal may be preset.
  • the terminal may be configured to process a logical channel (or mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station (or through one or more base stations) using a bearer split user plane structure.
  • PDCP layer for each base station by receiving ratio information for distributing available data amount of PDCP layer or method information for distributing for each base station (or for each cell group)
  • the buffer status information (available data amount) of can be calculated.
  • the terminal may receive the aforementioned ratio information or distribution method information through a first base station (master base station) in which an RRC connection is established.
  • the terminal may receive the aforementioned ratio information or distribution method information through a second base station (secondary base station) confirmed by the first base station (master base station) in which the RRC connection is established.
  • the terminal may receive the aforementioned ratio information or distribution method information through the first base station, and the corresponding information may be transmitted by the second base station supporting the first base station through the first base station.
  • each base station (or cell group) PDCP is included in the RRC message in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may also include ratio information for calculating the amount of available data of the layer and / or information for indicating it.
  • the above-described information for calculating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer in the terminal may be preset.
  • the aforementioned ratio information may be received with a new MAC control element defined.
  • the newly defined MAC control element may be a first base station established through an RRC connection (or a first base station confirmed by a second base station) or a first base station confirmed by a first base station with an RRC connection established.
  • the terminal may be transmitted through a second base station supporting the base station or through a second base station supporting the first base station.
  • the terminal may transmit / submit data (PDU) from the PDCP layer in the terminal to the RLC entity in the terminal mapped to the RLC entity of each base station based on the ratio information received from the base station.
  • PDU submit data
  • the terminal may calculate PDCP buffer status information for each base station.
  • the terminal may add the calculated PDCP buffer status information for each base station (or cell group) with the available data amount of the RLC layer peered to each base station and transmit a buffer status report to each base station. That is, in the second embodiment, the PDCP buffer status report is included in the existing buffer status report (BSR) and not transmitted separately.
  • BSR buffer status report
  • PDCP buffer status information included in the buffer status report transmitted for each base station is information calculated by dividing each base station by each method described above.
  • the MAC entity for each base station (or for each cell group) in the terminal may transmit a buffer status report to each base station.
  • each base station receives the amount of available data to be processed through each base station through the BSR, which can efficiently allocate uplink radio resources according to the buffer size information of the received BSR, and buffer status information of the PDCP layer. It can solve the problem of duplicate transmission of.
  • Third embodiment A method of reporting different data calculation methods available for each base station.
  • a method of calculating the amount of available data for a logical channel (or logical channel group) mapped to the aforementioned split bearer differs for each base station. It can be reported through the existing BSR (short BSR or Truncated BSR or Long BSR) MAC CE.
  • the terminal may be configured to include a first logical channel (or logical channel group) mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station by using a bearer split user plane structure.
  • the amount of available data through the base station (or the master cell group or the first base station MAC entity or the first base station MAC entity in the terminal peered to the first base station MAC entity) may use the existing available data amount calculation method. That is, the UE may perform BSR reporting by summing the available data amount of the PDCP layer and the available data amount of the RLC layer for the first base station with the available data amount through the first base station. have.
  • the terminal is an RLC layer for the second base station in the terminal with the amount of available data through the second base station (or the secondary cell group or the second base station MAC entity or the second base station MAC entity in the terminal peered to the second base station MAC entity).
  • the BSR reporting can be performed using the available data amount of. That is, the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station may not include the buffer status information (available data amount) of the PDCP layer.
  • the UE determines this according to radio conditions (quality) or adds the available data amount of the PDCP layer for the logical channel mapped to the corresponding split bearer through the first base station where the RRC connection is established to the amount of available data through the first base station.
  • Information for display may be received and configured (processed).
  • the RRC message or the MAC CE may be used for the message transmitted from the base station to the terminal.
  • the terminal is configured to include the amount of available data of the PDCP layer for the split bearer in the amount of available data through the first base station
  • the terminal includes the PDCP PDU for the split bearer in the terminal peered to the first base station RLC entity. It can only be submitted as an RLC entity. That is, the uplink data for the bearer may be transmitted only through the first base station.
  • the second terminal may be configured with respect to a logical channel (or logical channel group) mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station by using a bearer split user plane structure.
  • the amount of available data through the base station (or the secondary cell group or the second base station MAC entity or the second base station MAC entity in the terminal peered to the second base station MAC entity) may use the existing available data amount calculation method. That is, the UE may perform BSR reporting by summing the available data amount of the PDCP layer and the available data amount of the RLC layer for the second base station with the available data amount through the second base station. have.
  • the terminal may perform BSR reporting using the available data amount of the RLC layer for the first base station in the terminal as the amount of available data through the first base station. That is, the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station may not include the buffer status information (available data amount) of the PDCP layer.
  • the UE determines this according to the radio condition (quality) or receives the confirmation by the first base station through which the RRC connection is established (or through the first base station by confirmation of the second base station) or by the first base station through which the RRC connection is established.
  • the amount of available data of the PDCP layer for the corresponding logical channel is added to the amount of available data through the second base station through a second base station supporting one base station or a second base station supporting a first base station through the first base station.
  • the message transmitted from the base station to the terminal may include new information in the RRC message or a new MAC CE may be defined and used.
  • the terminal When the terminal is configured to include the amount of available data of the PDCP layer for the split bearer in the amount of available data through the second base station, the terminal includes the PDCP PDU for the split bearer in the terminal peered to the second base station RLC entity. You can only submit as an RLC entity. That is, the uplink data for the bearer may be transmitted only through the second base station.
  • the terminal may be configured for a logical channel mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station (or through one or more base stations) using a bearer split user plane structure.
  • a base station to first allocate the available data amount of the PDCP layer may be selected based on radio quality status or RRM measurement information between the terminal and each base station.
  • the amount of available data of the PDCP layer is first assigned to the RRC message to the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information, the radio resource configuration-only information, or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may include one or more pieces of information of the base station information, information for selecting the base station to be assigned first, a measurement period, a measurement event and information for displaying the same.
  • the above-described information may be preset in the terminal.
  • each base station receives the amount of available data to be processed through each base station through the BSR, so that each base station can efficiently allocate uplink radio resources according to the requested buffer size. That is, by including the PDCP buffer status information only in the buffer status report transmitted to any one of the base stations, it is possible to solve the problem that the PDCP buffer status information is repeatedly transmitted to the base station.
  • each base station may allocate radio resources only for the amount of available data actually needed. Thus, there is an effect of efficiently allocating radio resources.
  • 33 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • a terminal In a method for transmitting buffer status information, a terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention is configured to dually connect one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to a split bearer by higher layer signaling with a first base station and a second base station. And configuring the PDCP layer available data amount of one or more logical channels or logical channel groups to the first base station or the second base station.
  • the terminal may configure dual connectivity for at least one logical channel or logical channel group mapped to the split base bearer with the first base station and the second base station according to higher layer signaling (S3310). ). That is, the terminal may configure a bearer with at least one base station as illustrated in FIGS. 27 and 28, and the at least one bearer may be configured separately from the first base station and the second base station.
  • S3310 higher layer signaling
  • the UE may transmit the PDCP layer available data amount of the logical channel mapped to the above-described separated bearer or logical channel group including the corresponding logical channel to the first base station or the second base station (S3320).
  • the terminal may include the existing buffer status report in the above-described embodiment and transmit the same.
  • the transmission may be included only in the buffer status report transmitted to any one base station as in the third embodiment.
  • the terminal may include a buffer status report (BSR) timer for each base station or cell group according to higher layer signaling.
  • BSR buffer status report
  • the PDCP layer available data amount may be included in only one of the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station or the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station according to higher layer signaling.
  • the terminal may transmit the PDCP layer available data amount so as not to overlap with the first base station or the second base station, and the first base station and the second base station can efficiently allocate radio resources.
  • 34 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • a first base station comprises: configuring a dual connection between a second base station and a terminal for at least one logical channel or logical channel group mapped to a split bearer; Receiving a layer available data amount from the terminal.
  • the first base station may configure dual connectivity with the terminal (S3410). That is, the first base station may configure a dual connection with the terminal along with the second base station for one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to the split bearer. For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 27 and 28, the first base station may separate one or more bearers to configure dual connectivity with the second base station.
  • the first base station may receive the PDCP layer available data amount from the terminal (S3420).
  • the first base station allocates an uplink radio resource to the terminal based on the received buffer status report.
  • the first base station may receive the PDB by including it in an existing buffer status report according to the above-described embodiment. When received in the existing buffer status report, it is included in the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station and not included in the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station as in the third embodiment.
  • the available data amount of PDCP may be included in only the buffer status report received by the first base station according to higher layer signaling. That is, the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station may not include information on the amount of available data of the PDCP layer.
  • the first base station may calculate a radio resource to be allocated to the terminal based on the existing buffer status report.
  • the method described in each embodiment described above may be used.
  • the first base station may allocate the calculated radio resource to the terminal and receive an uplink from the terminal.
  • the second base station In the case of the second base station, the same operation as that of the first base station may be performed. However, when the PDCP layer available data amount is included only in the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station, the second base station may receive a buffer status report in which the PDCP layer available data amount is excluded.
  • 35 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a user terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the terminal for transmitting the buffer status information configured to dually connect one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to the split bearer with the first base station and the second base station and
  • the transmitter 3530 may transmit a PDCP layer available data amount of one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to the split bearer to the first base station or the second base station.
  • a user terminal 3500 includes a receiver 3510, a controller 3520, and a transmitter 3530.
  • the receiver 3510 receives downlink control information, data, and a message from a base station through a corresponding channel. That is, downlink information such as uplink radio resource allocation information can be received.
  • the controller 3520 controls the operation of the terminal required to form a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station required to carry out the above-described present invention.
  • the controller 3520 may control the operation of the terminal according to the distribution or division and transmission of the amount of PDCP layer available data of the logical channel or logical channel group configured by bearer separation according to each embodiment described above.
  • the transmitter 3530 transmits uplink control information, data, and a message through a corresponding channel.
  • the terminal may perform all operations necessary for performing each of the above-described embodiments.
  • 36 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the control unit 3610 configures a dual connection between the second base station and the terminal for one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to the split bearer And a receiver 3630 that receives the amount of PDCP layer available data from the terminal.
  • the base station 3600 includes a controller 3610, a transmitter 3620, and a receiver 3630.
  • the controller 3610 may control an operation of the base station required to configure a dual connection with the terminal together with the second base station. In addition, the controller 3610 may allocate an uplink radio resource based on a buffer status report received from the terminal according to each embodiment.
  • the transmitter 3620 may transmit downlink control information and a message to the terminal.
  • the receiver 3630 may receive a PDCP layer available data amount from the terminal.
  • the receiver 3630 may receive the PDCP layer available data amount in the buffer status report according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention.
  • the receiver 3630 may receive an uplink signal, a message, or data necessary for carrying out the present invention.
  • the base station may perform all the operations necessary for performing each of the above-described embodiments.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for transmitting uplink data from a terminal to base stations, wherein a terminal establishing dual connectivity with a plurality of base station transreceives, while distinguishing paths, when transreceiving uplink and downlink traffic through a plurality of carriers. More specifically, the present invention provides a method and an apparatus, the method for transmitting uplink data from the terminal comprising the steps of: receiving upper layer signaling which includes information for establishing dual connectivity with a first base station and a second base station; establishing dual connectivity between the first base station and the second base station, based on the upper layer signaling; and submitting a PDCP PDU for each of one or more wireless bearers, from a PDCP object to an RLC entity, which is a peer to the second station, based on the upper layer signaling.

Description

업링크 데이터 전송 방법 및 그 장치Uplink data transmission method and apparatus therefor

본 발명은 단말이 기지국으로 업링크 데이터를 전송하는 방법 및 그 장치에 관한 것으로, 복수의 기지국과 이중 연결(Dual connectivity)을 구성하는 단말이 복수의 캐리어를 통해 업링크 및 다운링크의 사용자 데이터 트래픽을 송수신함에 있어서 업링크 경로를 다운링크 경로와 다르게 송수신하는 방법 및 장치에 관한 것이다.The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting uplink data to a base station by a terminal, wherein the terminal configuring dual connectivity with a plurality of base stations is connected to the user data traffic of uplink and downlink through a plurality of carriers. The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving an uplink path differently from a downlink path.

또한, 본 발명은 스몰셀 환경에서 단말이 하나 이상의 기지국들과 이중 연결(Dual connectivity)을 구성하여 업링크 사용자 데이터를 전송하는데 있어서, 단말의 업링크 버퍼들에서 기지국으로 전송되기 위한 이용 가능한 데이터양(data available for transmission)에 관한 정보를 제공하는데 사용되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 전송 방법 및 그 장치에 관한 것이다.In addition, the present invention is the amount of data available for transmission from the uplink buffers of the terminal to the base station in the terminal in the small cell environment to transmit the uplink user data by configuring dual connectivity with one or more base stations (dual connectivity) A method and apparatus for transmitting a buffer status report used for providing information regarding data available for transmission.

통신 시스템이 발전해나감에 따라 사업체들 및 개인들과 같은 소비자들은 매우 다양한 무선 단말기들을 사용하게 되었다.As communication systems have evolved, consumers, such as businesses and individuals, have used a wide variety of wireless terminals.

현재의 3GPP 계열의 LTE(Long Term Evolution), LTE-Advanced 등의 이동 통신 시스템에서는 음성 위주의 서비스를 벗어나 영상, 무선 데이터 등의 다양한 데이터를 송수신할 수 있는 고속 대용량의 통신 시스템이 요구되고 있다.Currently, mobile communication systems such as Long Term Evolution (LTE) and LTE-Advanced of the 3GPP series require high-speed large-capacity communication systems capable of transmitting and receiving various data such as video and wireless data, beyond voice-oriented services.

이러한 고속 대용량의 통신 시스템을 위해서 소형 셀을 활용하여 단말의 용량을 늘릴 수 있는 기술이 요구되고 있다. 즉, 단말이 넓은 커버리지를 가지는 매크로 셀과 상대적으로 좁은 커버리지를 갖는 소형 셀을 이용하여 데이터를 송수신하여 트래픽 처리량을 늘리는 기술이 요구되고 있다.There is a demand for a technology capable of increasing the capacity of a terminal by using a small cell for such a high-speed large-capacity communication system. That is, a technique for increasing traffic throughput by transmitting and receiving data using a macro cell having a wide coverage and a small cell having a relatively narrow coverage is required.

또한, 단말이 데이터를 기지국으로 전송함에 있어서, 그 속도 및 소모 전력 도 중요하게 고려되고 있다. 따라서, 고속 대용량의 통신 시스템을 위해서 복수의 셀을 사용함과 동시에 단말이 업링크 데이터 전송을 위한 소모전력을 감소시키면서 전송하는 업링크 데이터에 대한 전송속도도 증대될 필요가 있다. 이를 위해서 소형 셀 환경에서 업링크 및 다운링크 데이터의 송수신 방법과 관련한 구체적인 절차가 요구되고 있다.In addition, when the terminal transmits data to the base station, the speed and power consumption are also important. Therefore, while using a plurality of cells for a high-speed large-capacity communication system, the transmission speed for uplink data transmitted by the terminal while reducing power consumption for uplink data transmission needs to be increased. To this end, a specific procedure related to a method of transmitting and receiving uplink and downlink data in a small cell environment is required.

특히, 단말이 복수의 기지국을 이용하여 대용량의 데이터를 고속으로 송신하는 경우, 단말은 업링크로 전송할 정확한 데이터의 양을 기지국으로 전송할 필요가 있다. 또한, 단말이 전송할 업링크 데이터를 전송하는 구체적인 방법도 요구되고 있다.In particular, when the terminal transmits a large amount of data at high speed using a plurality of base stations, the terminal needs to transmit the correct amount of data to be transmitted on the uplink to the base station. There is also a need for a specific method of transmitting uplink data to be transmitted by a terminal.

전술한 요구에 따라서 단말이 소형 셀을 활용하여 이중 연결을 구성하는 경우에 있어서, 업링크 데이터 전송을 위한 소모전력을 줄이기 위해 업링크 전송 경로를 다운링크와 구분하여 설정할 필요가 있다.In the case where the terminal configures a dual connection using a small cell according to the above-described request, it is necessary to set uplink transmission paths separately from downlinks in order to reduce power consumption for uplink data transmission.

또한, 이중 연결 구성에서 단말은 매크로 셀 기지국과 스몰 셀 기지국을 통해서 업링크 데이터를 전송함으로써, 매크로 셀 기지국으로 송신되는 업링크 데이터의 경로 손실이 상대적으로 증대되거나 단말 이동에 따라 스몰 셀 기지국으로 송신되는 업링크 데이터가 손실되는 문제점이 있다.In addition, in a dual connectivity configuration, the terminal transmits uplink data through the macro cell base station and the small cell base station, so that the path loss of the uplink data transmitted to the macro cell base station is relatively increased or transmitted to the small cell base station as the terminal moves. There is a problem in that uplink data is lost.

또한, 본 발명은 하나 이상의 기지국과 무선 베어러를 구성한 단말이 업링크 전송을 위한 버퍼 상태 정보를 전송하는 경우에, 하나 이상의 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 정보가 중복되거나 누락되지 않도록 전송할 필요가 있다.In addition, the present invention needs to transmit the buffer status information transmitted to the one or more base stations so that the buffer status information transmitted to the one or more base stations does not overlap or be omitted when the terminal configuring the radio bearer with one or more base stations.

전술한 요구에 따라 안출된 본 발명은 단말이 업링크 데이터를 전송하는 방법에 있어서, 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 수신하는 단계와 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 상기 제 1 기지국 및 상기 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하는 단계 및 PDCP 개체가 하나 이상의 무선 베어러 각각에 대한 PDCP PDU를 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국에 피어링되어 구성된 RLC 개체로 제출하는 단계를 포함하는 방법을 제공한다.In accordance with the present invention, a method for transmitting uplink data in a terminal, the method comprising: receiving higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with a first base station and a second base station and a higher layer; Establishing a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station based on signaling and a PDCP entity is peered to a first base station or a second base station based on higher layer signaling PDCP PDUs for each of one or more radio bearers; A method is provided that includes submitting to a configured RLC entity.

또한, 상기 하나 이상의 무선 베어러는, 상기 제 1 기지국 및 상기 제 2 기지국에 스플릿(split)되어 구성된 무선 베어러인 것을 특징으로 하는 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the at least one radio bearer provides a method characterized in that the radio bearer is configured to be split (split) to the first base station and the second base station.

또한, 상기 상위계층 시그널링은, 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위해 업링크 셀 또는 업링크 기지국을 식별하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the higher layer signaling, characterized in that it further comprises an index or identification information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station. To provide.

또한, 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보는, 제 1 기지국을 통해 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값과 제 2 기지국을 통해 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the index or classification information for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station, a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the first base station and uplink data through the second base station It provides a method comprising a value for configuring to transmit.

또한, 상기 RLC 개체로 제출하는 단계 이후에, 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국에 피어링되어 구성된 MAC 개체에서 논리채널 우선순위 프로시져를 수행하는 단계를 더 포함하는 방법을 제공한다.Further, after the step of submitting to the RLC entity, the method further includes performing a logical channel priority procedure at the MAC entity peered to the first base station or the second base station.

또한, 상기 논리채널 우선순위 프로시져는, 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국을 통해 상기 업링크 데이터를 전달할 논리채널들에 대해 논리채널 우선순위 절차를 수행하는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법을 제공한다. In addition, the logical channel priority procedure provides a method for performing a logical channel priority procedure for the logical channels to carry the uplink data through the first base station or the second base station.

본 발명은 제 1 기지국이 단말의 업링크 데이터 전송을 제어하는 방법에 있어서, 단말과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 생성하는 단계와 상위계층 시그널링을 상기 단말로 전송하는 단계 및 단말에 대해 스플릿 무선베어러를 구성하는 단계를 포함하는 방법을 제공한다.The present invention provides a method for controlling uplink data transmission by a first base station, the method comprising: generating higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with a terminal and transmitting higher layer signaling to the terminal. And configuring a split radio bearer for the terminal.

또한, 상기 상위계층 시그널링은, 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위해 업링크 셀 또는 업링크 기지국을 식별하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the higher layer signaling, characterized in that it further comprises an index or identification information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station. to provide.

또한, 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보는, 제 1 기지국을 통해 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값과 제 2 기지국을 통해 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the index or classification information for transmitting the uplink data to the second base station, a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the first base station and to configure the uplink data through the second base station It provides a method comprising a value for.

본 발명은 업링크 데이터를 전송하는 단말에 있어서, 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 수신하는 수신부 및 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하고, PDCP 개체가 하나 이상의 무선 베어러 각각에 대한 PDCP PDU를 상기 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2기지국에 피어링되어 구성된 RLC 개체로 제출하도록 제어하는 제어부를 포함하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.The present invention provides a terminal for transmitting uplink data, comprising: a receiver for receiving higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with a first base station and a second base station, and a first base station and a first base station based on higher layer signaling. A control unit configured to configure dual connectivity with 2 base stations, and control a PDCP entity to submit a PDCP PDU for each of one or more radio bearers to an RLC entity configured to be peered to the first base station or the second base station based on the higher layer signaling It provides a terminal device including a.

또한, 상기 하나 이상의 무선 베어러는, 상기 제 1 기지국 및 상기 제 2 기지국에 스플릿(split)되어 구성된 무선 베어러인 것을 특징으로 하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.In addition, the at least one radio bearer provides a terminal device characterized in that the radio bearer is configured to be split (split) to the first base station and the second base station.

또한, 상기 상위계층 시그널링은, 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위해 업링크 셀 또는 업링크 기지국을 식별하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.The higher layer signaling further includes an index or identification information for identifying an uplink cell or an uplink base station for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station. Provide the device.

또한, 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보는, 제 1 기지국을 통해 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값과 제 2 기지국을 통해 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.In addition, the index or classification information for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station, a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the first base station and uplink data through the second base station It provides a terminal device comprising a value for configuring to transmit.

또한, 상기 제어부는, 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국에 피어링되어 구성된 MAC 개체에서 논리채널 우선순위 프로시져를 수행하도록 제어하는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.In addition, the controller provides a terminal device, characterized in that the control to perform a logical channel priority procedure in the MAC entity peered to the first base station or the second base station.

또한, 상기 논리채널 우선순위 프로시져는, 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국을 통해 상기 업링크 데이터를 전달할 논리채널들에 대해 논리채널 우선순위 절차를 수행하는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.In addition, the logical channel priority procedure provides a terminal device, characterized in that performing a logical channel priority procedure for the logical channels for transmitting the uplink data through the first base station or the second base station.

본 발명은 단말의 업링크 데이터 전송을 제어하는 제 1 기지국에 있어서, 단말과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 생성하는 제어부 및 상위계층 시그널링을 상기 단말로 전송하는 송신부를 포함하되, 제어부는 단말에 대해 스플릿 무선베어러를 구성하도록 제어하는 기지국 장치를 제공한다.The present invention provides a first base station for controlling uplink data transmission of a terminal, comprising: a control unit for generating higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with the terminal, and a transmitting unit for transmitting higher layer signaling to the terminal. However, the control unit provides a base station apparatus for controlling to configure a split radio bearer for the terminal.

또한, 상기 상위계층 시그널링은, 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위해 업링크 셀 또는 업링크 기지국을 식별하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국 장치를 제공한다.In addition, the higher layer signaling, the base station further comprises an index or identification information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station. Provide the device.

또한, 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보는, 제 1 기지국을 통해 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값과 제 2 기지국을 통해 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국 장치를 제공한다.In addition, the index or classification information for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station, a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the first base station and uplink data through the second base station It provides a base station apparatus comprising a value for configuring to transmit.

본 발명은 단말이 버퍼 상태 정보를 전송하는 방법에 있어서, 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹을 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결되도록 구성하는 단계 및 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹의 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양(data available for transmission in a PDCP layer)을 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국으로 전송하는 단계를 포함하는 방법을 제공한다.According to the present invention, a method for transmitting buffer status information by a terminal includes: configuring and separating one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to a split bearer according to higher layer signaling so as to be dually connected with a first base station and a second base station; A method comprising transmitting to a first base station or a second base station the amount of data available for transmission in a PDCP layer of at least one logical channel or logical channel group mapped to a bearer.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 단말이 상향링크로 전송할 PDCP의 이용 가능 데이터양에 대한 정보를 포함하며, 버퍼 상태 리포트와는 구분되어 상기 제 1 기지국 및 상기 제 2 기지국 중 하나 이상의 기지국으로 전송되는 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the PDCP layer available data amount includes information on the available data amount of PDCP to be transmitted by the terminal uplink, and is distinguished from a buffer status report, at least one of the first base station and the second base station It provides a way to be transmitted.

또한, 상기 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보는, MAC 제어 요소에 포함되어 전송되는 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the PDCP buffer status information is provided in the MAC control element is transmitted.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 제 1 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 및 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 각각에 분배되어 포함되는 방법을 제공한다.Further, the PDCP layer available data amount is distributed and included in each of the buffer status report sent to the first base station and the buffer status report sent to the second base station.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로부터 수신되는 구성정보에 기초하여 분배되는 방법을 제공한다. 또한, 상기 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹을 구성하는 단계는, 기지국별 또는 셀그룹별 버퍼 상태 리포트(Buffer Status Report, BSR) 타이머를 포함하여 구성하는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the PDCP layer available data amount provides a method to be distributed based on configuration information received from the first base station or the second base station. The configuring of the logical channel or the logical channel group mapped to the split bearer according to the higher layer signaling may include configuring a buffer status report (BSR) timer for each base station or cell group. Provide a way to.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 상기 제 1 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 중 어느 하나의 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되어 전송되는 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the PDCP layer available data amount is included in only one of the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station or the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station according to the higher layer signaling is transmitted. To provide.

본 발명은 제 1 기지국이 버퍼 상태 정보를 수신하는 방법에 있어서, 상위 계층 시그널링을 통해 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹에 대해서 제 2 기지국과 단말에 이중 연결을 구성하는 단계 및 단말로부터 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 수신하는 단계를 포함하는 방법을 제공한다.The present invention provides a method for receiving buffer status information by a first base station, comprising: configuring a dual connection between a second base station and a terminal for at least one logical channel or logical channel group mapped to a split bearer through higher layer signaling; It provides a method comprising the step of receiving the PDCP layer available data amount from the terminal.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 버퍼 상태 리포트와는 구분되어 수신되는 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the amount of PDCP layer available data is provided separately from the buffer status report.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, MAC 제어 요소에 포함되어 수신되는 방법을 제공한다.The PDCP layer available data amount is also included in the MAC control element to provide a method for receiving.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 단말에 의해서 분배된 정보이며, 버퍼 상태 리포트에 포함되어 수신되는 방법을 제공한다. 또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 제 1 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되거나, 또는 제 2 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되어 제 1 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에는 포함되지 않고 수신되는 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the PDCP layer available data amount is information distributed by the terminal and provides a method of being included in a buffer status report. In addition, the PDCP layer available data amount is included in only the buffer status report received by the first base station according to the higher layer signaling, or included in only the buffer status report received by the second base station and received by the first base station. It provides a way to be received without being included in the report.

본 발명은 버퍼 상태 정보를 전송하는 단말에 있어서, 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹을 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결되도록 구성하는 제어부 및 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹의 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국으로 전송하는 송신부를 포함하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.According to the present invention, a terminal for transmitting buffer status information includes a control unit and a split bearer configured to dually connect one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to the split bearer according to higher layer signaling with the first base station and the second base station. Provided is a terminal apparatus including a transmitter for transmitting PDCP layer available data amounts of one or more logical channels or logical channel groups to be mapped to a first base station or a second base station.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 단말이 상향링크로 전송할 PDCP의 이용 가능 데이터양에 대한 정보를 포함하며, 버퍼 상태 리포트와는 구분되어 상기 제 1 기지국 및 상기 제 2 기지국 중 하나 이상의 기지국으로 전송되는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.In addition, the PDCP layer available data amount includes information on the available data amount of PDCP to be transmitted by the terminal uplink, and is distinguished from a buffer status report, at least one of the first base station and the second base station It provides a terminal device characterized in that the transmission.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, MAC 제어 요소에 포함되어 전송되는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.In addition, the PDCP layer available data amount provides a terminal device, characterized in that transmitted in the MAC control element.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 제 1 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 및 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 각각에 분배되어 포함되는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.The PDCP layer available data amount is distributed and included in each of the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station and the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로부터 수신되는 구성정보에 기초하여 분배되는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말 장치를 제공한다. 또한, 상기 제어부는, 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 기지국별 또는 셀그룹별 버퍼 상태 리포트(Buffer status report, BSR) 타이머를 포함하여 상기 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹을 구성하는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.The PDCP layer usable data amount is distributed based on configuration information received from the first base station or the second base station. In addition, the controller provides a terminal device comprising the logical channel or logical channel group including a buffer status report (BSR) timer for each base station or cell group according to higher layer signaling. .

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 제 1 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 중 어느 하나의 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되어 전송되는 것을 특징으로 하는 단말 장치를 제공한다.In addition, the PDCP layer available data amount is included in only one of the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station or the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station according to the higher layer signaling is transmitted. A terminal device is provided.

본 발명은 버퍼 상태 정보를 수신하는 제 1 기지국에 있어서, 상위 계층 시그널링을 통해 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹에 대해서 제 2 기지국과 단말에 이중 연결을 구성하는 제어부 및 단말로부터 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 수신하는 수신부를 포함하는 기지국 장치를 제공한다.The present invention provides a first base station for receiving buffer status information, comprising: a control unit and a terminal configuring a dual connection between a second base station and a terminal for one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to a split bearer through higher layer signaling; Provided is a base station apparatus including a receiving unit for receiving a PDCP layer available data amount.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 버퍼 상태 리포트와는 구분되어 수신되는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국 장치를 제공한다.In addition, the PDCP layer available data amount provides a base station apparatus, characterized in that received separately from the buffer status report.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, MAC 제어 요소에 포함되어 수신되는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국 장치를 제공한다.In addition, the PDCP layer available data amount is provided in the base station apparatus, characterized in that received in the MAC control element.

또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 단말에 의해서 분배된 정보이며, 버퍼 상태 리포트에 포함되어 수신되는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국 장치를 제공한다. 또한, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은, 상기 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 단말로부터 제 1 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되어거나 또는 제 2 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되어 제 1 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼상태 리포트에는 포함되지 않고 수신되는 것을 특징으로 하는 기지국 장치를 제공한다.The PDCP layer available data amount is information distributed by the terminal and is included in a buffer status report to provide the base station apparatus. In addition, the PDCP layer available data amount is included in the buffer status report received from the terminal to the first base station according to the higher layer signaling, or included in only the buffer status report received to the second base station and received at the first base station. A base station apparatus is provided which is received without being included in a buffer status report.

전술한 본 발명에 따르면, 단말이 복수의 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성한 환경에서 단말과 경로 손실이 적은 특정 기지국을 통해서 업링크 데이터 트래픽을 전송할 수 있는 효과가 있다. 이를 통해서 단말의 전력 소모를 감소시키고 업링크 데이터 전송 속도도 향상시킬 수 있는 효과가 있다. 또는 단말이 단말이 복수의 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성한 환경에서 커버리지가 큰 특정 기지국을 통해서 업링크 데이터 트래픽을 전송할 수 있는 효과가 있다. 이를 통해서 단말 이동에 따른 데이터 손실을 감소시킬 수 있는 효과가 있다.According to the present invention described above, there is an effect that the terminal can transmit the uplink data traffic through a specific base station with a small path loss with the terminal in an environment in which a dual connection with a plurality of base stations. This reduces the power consumption of the terminal and has the effect of improving the uplink data transmission speed. Alternatively, the terminal may transmit uplink data traffic through a specific base station having large coverage in an environment in which the terminal configures a dual connection with a plurality of base stations. Through this, there is an effect that can reduce the data loss due to the movement of the terminal.

또한, 본 발명에 따르면 이중 연결 구조하에서도 업링크 버퍼상태리포트 및 논리채널우선순위 프로시져를 특정 셀 또는 특정 기지국에 대해서 독립적으로 수행하는 효과도 있다.In addition, according to the present invention, an uplink buffer status report and a logical channel priority procedure may be independently performed for a specific cell or a specific base station even under a dual connectivity structure.

또한, 본 발명에 따르면, 단말은 업링크 전송을 위한 버퍼 상태 정보를 전송하는 경우에, 전송되는 버퍼 상태 정보가 하나 이상의 기지국으로 중복되거나 누락되지 않도록 전송하는 효과가 있다.In addition, according to the present invention, when the terminal transmits the buffer status information for uplink transmission, there is an effect that the transmitted buffer status information is transmitted so as not to be duplicated or missing to one or more base stations.

또한, 본 발명에 따르면, 이중 연결로 구성된 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹의 버퍼 상태 정보를 전송함에 있어서, 하나 이상의 기지국으로 PDCP 개체 버퍼의 이용 가능 데이터양 정보를 정확히 전송하여 무선자원의 효율적 사용을 제공하는 효과가 있다.In addition, according to the present invention, in transmitting buffer status information of a logical channel or a logical channel group mapped to a split bearer configured as a dual connection, the radio resource by accurately transmitting the available data amount information of the PDCP object buffer to one or more base stations It has the effect of providing efficient use of.

도 1은 캐리어 병합 구성 시 업링크 계층 2 구조를 도시한 도면이다.1 illustrates an uplink layer 2 structure in a carrier aggregation configuration.

도 2는 캐리어 병합 구성 시 다운링크 계층 2 구조를 도시한 도면이다.2 illustrates a downlink layer 2 structure in a carrier aggregation configuration.

도 3은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 네트워크 구성 시나리오의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.

도 4는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 네트워크 구성 시나리오의 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.4 is a diagram illustrating another example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.

도 5는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 네트워크 구성 시나리오의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.5 is a diagram illustrating another example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.

도 6은 사용자 플레인 데이터 전송을 위한 계층 2 프로토콜 구조의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a layer 2 protocol structure for user plane data transmission.

도 7은 사용자 플레인 데이터 전송을 위한 계층 2 프로토콜 구조의 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.7 illustrates another example of a layer 2 protocol structure for user plane data transmission.

도 8은 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.8 is a diagram illustrating an example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 9는 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.9 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 10은 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.10 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 11은 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.11 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 12는 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.12 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 13은 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.13 is a view showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 14는 본 발명에 따른 SeNBSCellToAddMod의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.14 is a diagram illustrating an example of SeNBSCellToAddMod according to the present invention.

도 15는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 마스터 기지국과 세컨더리 기지국의 계층 2 구조를 도시한 도면이다.15 illustrates a layer 2 structure of a master base station and a secondary base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 16은 본 발명의 다른 실시예에 따른 마스터 기지국과 세컨더리 기지국의 계층 2 구조를 도시한 도면이다.16 is a diagram illustrating a layer 2 structure of a master base station and a secondary base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 17은 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말의 계층 2 구조를 도시한 도면이다.17 is a diagram illustrating a layer 2 structure of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 18은 본 발명에 따른 AM RLC에 대한 RLC-Config의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.18 illustrates an example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.

도 19는 본 발명에 따른 AM RLC에 대한 RLC-Config의 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다. 19 shows another example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.

도 20은 본 발명에 따른 AM RLC에 대한 RLC-Config의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.20 shows another example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.

도 21은 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말 및 기지국의 동작을 도시한 신호도이다.21 is a signal diagram illustrating operations of a terminal and a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 22는 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말의 동작을 도시한 흐름도이다.22 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 23은 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 기지국의 동작을 도시한 흐름도이다.23 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 24는 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말의 구성을 도시한 도면이다.24 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 25는 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 기지국의 구성을 도시한 도면이다.25 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 26은 종래 단말의 MAC 구성도의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a MAC configuration diagram of a conventional terminal.

도 27는 베어러 분리 사용자 플레인 구조의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a bearer split user plane structure. FIG.

도 28은 베어러 분리 사용자 플레인 구조의 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.28 illustrates another example of a bearer split user plane structure.

도 29는 본 발명을 설명하기 위한 단말 내에서 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널의 이용 가능 데이터양에 대한 예시도이다.FIG. 29 is an exemplary diagram of an available data amount of a logical channel mapped to a split bearer in a terminal for explaining the present invention.

도 30은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 MAC PDU 구성의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a MAC PDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 31은 본 발명의 다른 실시예에 따른 UL-SCH를 위한 LCID 값의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.31 is a diagram illustrating an example of an LCID value for UL-SCH according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 32는 각 PDCP BSR MAC control element 포맷의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.32 is a diagram illustrating an example of each PDCP BSR MAC control element format.

도 33은 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말의 동작을 도시한 흐름도이다.33 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 34는 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 기지국의 동작을 도시한 흐름도이다.34 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 35는 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 사용자 단말의 구성을 도시한 도면이다. 35 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a user terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 36은 본 발명이 또 다른 실시예에 따른 기지국의 구성을 도시한 도면이다.36 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

이하, 본 발명의 일부 실시예들을 예시적인 도면을 통해 상세하게 설명한다. 각 도면의 구성요소들에 참조부호를 부가함에 있어서, 동일한 구성요소들에 대해서는 비록 다른 도면상에 표시되더라도 가능한 한 동일한 부호를 가지도록 하고 있음에 유의해야 한다. 또한, 본 발명을 설명함에 있어, 관련된 공지 구성 또는 기능에 대한 구체적인 설명이 본 발명의 요지를 흐릴 수 있다고 판단되는 경우에는 그 상세한 설명은 생략한다.Hereinafter, some embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail through exemplary drawings. In adding reference numerals to the components of each drawing, it should be noted that the same reference numerals are assigned to the same components as much as possible even though they are shown in different drawings. In addition, in describing the present invention, when it is determined that the detailed description of the related well-known configuration or function may obscure the gist of the present invention, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

본 발명에서의 무선통신시스템은 음성, 패킷 데이터 등과 같은 다양한 통신 서비스를 제공하기 위해 널리 배치된다. 무선통신시스템은 사용자 단말(User Equipment, UE) 및 기지국(Base Station, BS, 또는 eNB)을 포함한다. 본 명세서에서의 사용자 단말은 무선 통신에서의 단말을 의미하는 포괄적 개념으로서, WCDMA 및 LTE, HSPA 등에서의 UE(User Equipment)는 물론, GSM에서의 MS(Mobile Station), UT(User Terminal), SS(Subscriber Station), 무선기기(wireless device) 등을 모두 포함하는 개념으로 해석되어야 할 것이다.The wireless communication system in the present invention is widely deployed to provide various communication services such as voice, packet data, and the like. The wireless communication system includes a user equipment (UE) and a base station (base station, BS, or eNB). In the present specification, a user terminal is a generic concept meaning a terminal in wireless communication. In addition, user equipment (UE) in WCDMA, LTE, and HSPA, as well as mobile station (MS) in GSM, user terminal (UT), and SS It should be interpreted as a concept that includes a subscriber station, a wireless device, and the like.

기지국 또는 셀(cell)은 일반적으로 사용자 단말과 통신하는 지점(station)을 말하며, 노드-B(Node-B), eNB(evolved Node-B), 섹터(Sector), 싸이트(Site), BTS(Base Transceiver System), 액세스 포인트(Access Point), 릴레이 노드(Relay Node), RRH(Remote Radio Head), RU(Radio Unit), small cell 등 다른 용어로 불릴 수 있다.A base station or a cell generally refers to a station that communicates with a user terminal, and includes a Node-B, an evolved Node-B, an Sector, a Site, and a BTS. Other terms such as a base transceiver system, an access point, a relay node, a remote radio head (RRH), a radio unit (RU), and a small cell may be called.

즉, 본 명세서에서 기지국 또는 셀(cell)은 CDMA에서의 BSC(Base Station Controller), WCDMA의 Node-B, LTE에서의 eNB 또는 섹터(싸이트) 등이 커버하는 일부 영역 또는 기능을 나타내는 포괄적인 의미로 해석되어야 하며, 메가셀, 매크로셀, 마이크로셀, 피코셀, 펨토셀 및 릴레이 노드(relay node), RRH, RU, small cell 통신범위 등 다양한 커버리지 영역을 모두 포괄하는 의미이다. In other words, in the present specification, a base station or a cell is a generic meaning indicating some areas or functions covered by a base station controller (BSC) in CDMA, a Node-B in WCDMA, an eNB or a sector (site) in LTE, and the like. It should be interpreted as, and it is meant to cover all the various coverage areas such as megacell, macrocell, microcell, picocell, femtocell and relay node, RRH, RU, small cell communication range.

상기 나열된 다양한 셀은 각 셀을 제어하는 기지국이 존재하므로 기지국은 두 가지 의미로 해석될 수 있다. i) 무선 영역과 관련하여 메가셀, 매크로셀, 마이크로셀, 피코셀, 펨토 셀, 스몰 셀을 제공하는 장치 그 자체이거나, ii) 상기 무선영역 그 자체를 지시할 수 있다. i)에서 소정의 무선 영역을 제공하는 장치들이 동일한 개체에 의해 제어되거나 상기 무선 영역을 협업으로 구성하도록 상호작용하는 모든 장치들을 모두 기지국으로 지시한다. 무선 영역의 구성 방식에 따라 eNB, RRH, 안테나, RU, LPN, 포인트, 송수신포인트, 송신 포인트, 수신 포인트 등은 기지국의 일 실시예가 된다. ii) 에서 사용자 단말의 관점 또는 이웃하는 기지국의 입장에서 신호를 수신하거나 송신하게 되는 무선 영역 그 자체를 기지국으로 지시할 수 있다.Since the various cells listed above have a base station for controlling each cell, the base station may be interpreted in two senses. i) A device providing a mega cell, a macro cell, a micro cell, a pico cell, a femto cell, a small cell in relation to a radio area, or ii) may indicate the radio area itself. In i) all devices which provide a given wireless area are controlled by the same entity or interact with each other to cooperatively configure the wireless area to direct the base station. The eNB, RRH, antenna, RU, LPN, point, transmit / receive point, transmit point, receive point, and the like, according to the configuration of the radio region, become an embodiment of the base station. In ii), the base station may indicate the radio area itself to receive or transmit a signal from a viewpoint of a user terminal or a neighboring base station.

따라서, 메가셀, 매크로셀, 마이크로셀, 피코셀, 펨토셀, 스몰 셀, RRH, 안테나, RU, LPN(Low Power Node), 포인트, eNB, 송수신포인트, 송신 포인트, 수신포인트를 통칭하여 기지국으로 지칭한다.Therefore, megacells, macrocells, microcells, picocells, femtocells, small cells, RRHs, antennas, RUs, low power nodes (LPNs), points, eNBs, transmit / receive points, transmit points, and receive points are collectively referred to as base stations. do.

본 명세서에서 사용자 단말과 기지국은 본 명세서에서 기술되는 기술 또는 기술적 사상을 구현하는데 사용되는 두 가지 송수신 주체로 포괄적인 의미로 사용되며 특정하게 지칭되는 용어 또는 단어에 의해 한정되지 않는다. 사용자 단말과 기지국은, 본 발명에서 기술되는 기술 또는 기술적 사상을 구현하는데 사용되는 두 가지(Uplink 또는 Downlink) 송수신 주체로 포괄적인 의미로 사용되며 특정하게 지칭되는 용어 또는 단어에 의해 한정되지 않는다. 여기서, 상향링크(Uplink, UL, 또는 업링크)는 사용자 단말에 의해 기지국으로 데이터를 송수신하는 방식을 의미하며, 하향링크(Downlink, DL, 또는 다운링크)는 기지국에 의해 사용자 단말로 데이터를 송수신하는 방식을 의미한다.In the present specification, the user terminal and the base station are two transmitting and receiving entities used to implement the technology or technical idea described in this specification in a comprehensive sense and are not limited by the terms or words specifically referred to. The user terminal and the base station are two types of uplink or downlink transmitting / receiving subjects used to implement the technology or the technical idea described in the present invention, and are used in a generic sense and are not limited by the terms or words specifically referred to. Here, the uplink (Uplink, UL, or uplink) refers to a method for transmitting and receiving data to the base station by the user terminal, the downlink (Downlink, DL, or downlink) means to transmit and receive data to the user terminal by the base station It means the way.

무선통신시스템에 적용되는 다중 접속 기법에는 제한이 없다. CDMA(Code Division Multiple Access), TDMA(Time Division Multiple Access), FDMA(Frequency Division Multiple Access), OFDMA(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access), OFDM-FDMA, OFDM-TDMA, OFDM-CDMA와 같은 다양한 다중 접속 기법을 사용할 수 있다. 본 발명의 일 실시예는 GSM, WCDMA, HSPA를 거쳐 LTE 및 LTE-Advanced로 진화하는 비동기 무선통신과, CDMA, CDMA-2000 및 UMB로 진화하는 동기식 무선 통신 분야 등의 자원할당에 적용될 수 있다. 본 발명은 특정한 무선통신 분야에 한정되거나 제한되어 해석되어서는 아니 되며, 본 발명의 사상이 적용될 수 있는 모든 기술분야를 포함하는 것으로 해석되어야 할 것이다.There is no limitation on the multiple access scheme applied to the wireless communication system. Various multiple access techniques such as Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA), Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA), OFDM-FDMA, OFDM-TDMA, OFDM-CDMA Can be used. One embodiment of the present invention can be applied to resource allocation in the fields of asynchronous wireless communication evolving to LTE and LTE-Advanced through GSM, WCDMA, HSPA, and synchronous wireless communication evolving to CDMA, CDMA-2000 and UMB. The present invention should not be construed as being limited or limited to a specific wireless communication field, but should be construed as including all technical fields to which the spirit of the present invention can be applied.

상향링크 전송 및 하향링크 전송은 서로 다른 시간을 사용하여 전송되는 TDD(Time Division Duplex) 방식이 사용될 수 있고, 또는 서로 다른 주파수를 사용하여 전송되는 FDD(Frequency Division Duplex) 방식이 사용될 수 있다.The uplink transmission and the downlink transmission may use a time division duplex (TDD) scheme that is transmitted using different times, or may use a frequency division duplex (FDD) scheme that is transmitted using different frequencies.

또한, LTE, LTE-Advanced와 같은 시스템에서는 하나의 반송파 또는 반송파 쌍을 기준으로 상향링크와 하향링크를 구성하여 규격을 구성한다. 상향링크와 하향링크는, PDCCH(Physical Downlink Control CHannel), PCFICH(Physical Control Format Indicator CHannel), PHICH(Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator CHannel), PUCCH(Physical Uplink Control CHannel), EPDCCH(Enhanced Physical Downlink Control CHannel) 등과 같은 제어채널을 통하여 제어정보를 전송하고, PDSCH(Physical Downlink Shared CHannel), PUSCH(Physical Uplink Shared CHannel) 등과 같은 데이터채널로 구성되어 데이터를 전송한다. In addition, in systems such as LTE and LTE-Advanced, a standard is configured by configuring uplink and downlink based on one carrier or a pair of carriers. The uplink and the downlink include a Physical Downlink Control CHannel (PDCCH), a Physical Control Format Indicator CHannel (PCFICH), a Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator CHannel (PHICH), a Physical Uplink Control CHannel (PUCCH), an Enhanced Physical Downlink Control CHannel (EPDCCH), and the like. Control information is transmitted through the same control channel, and data is configured by a data channel such as a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) and a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).

한편 EPDCCH(enhanced PDCCH 또는 extended PDCCH)를 이용해서도 제어 정보를 전송할 수 있다.On the other hand, control information may also be transmitted using an enhanced PDCCH (EPDCCH or extended PDCCH).

본 명세서에서 셀(cell)은 송수신 포인트로부터 전송되는 신호의 커버리지 또는 송수신 포인트(transmission point 또는 transmission/reception point)로부터 전송되는 신호의 커버리지를 가지는 요소반송파(component carrier), 그 송수신 포인트 자체를 의미할 수 있다. In the present specification, a cell means a component carrier having a coverage of a signal transmitted from a transmission / reception point or a signal transmitted from a transmission point or a transmission / reception point, and the transmission / reception point itself. Can be.

실시예들이 적용되는 무선통신 시스템은 둘 이상의 송수신 포인트들이 협력하여 신호를 전송하는 다중 포인트 협력형 송수신 시스템(coordinated multi-point transmission/reception System; CoMP 시스템) 또는 협력형 다중 안테나 전송방식(coordinated multi-antenna transmission system), 협력형 다중 셀 통신시스템일 수 있다. CoMP 시스템은 적어도 두 개의 다중 송수신 포인트와 단말들을 포함할 수 있다. A wireless communication system to which embodiments are applied may be a coordinated multi-point transmission / reception system (CoMP system) or a coordinated multi-antenna transmission scheme in which two or more transmission / reception points cooperate to transmit a signal. antenna transmission system), a cooperative multi-cell communication system. The CoMP system may include at least two multiple transmission / reception points and terminals.

다중 송수신 포인트는 기지국 또는 매크로 셀(macro cell, 이하 'eNB'라 함)과, eNB에 광케이블 또는 광섬유로 연결되어 유선 제어되는, 높은 전송파워를 갖거나 매크로 셀 영역 내의 낮은 전송파워를 갖는 적어도 하나의 RRH일 수도 있다.The multiple transmit / receive point is at least one having a base station or a macro cell (hereinafter referred to as an eNB) and a high transmission power or a low transmission power in a macro cell region, which is wired controlled by an optical cable or an optical fiber to the eNB. May be RRH.

이하에서 하향링크(downlink)는 다중 송수신 포인트에서 단말로의 통신 또는 통신 경로를 의미하며, 상향링크(uplink)는 단말에서 다중 송수신 포인트으로의 통신 또는 통신 경로를 의미한다. 하향링크에서 송신기는 다중 송수신 포인트의 일부분일 수 있고, 수신기는 단말의 일부분일 수 있다. 상향링크에서 송신기는 단말의 일부분일 수 있고, 수신기는 다중 송수신 포인트의 일부분일 수 있다. Hereinafter, downlink refers to a communication or communication path from a multiple transmission / reception point to a terminal, and uplink means a communication or communication path from a terminal to multiple transmission / reception points. In downlink, a transmitter may be part of multiple transmission / reception points, and a receiver may be part of a terminal. In uplink, a transmitter may be part of a terminal, and a receiver may be part of multiple transmission / reception points.

이하에서는 PUCCH, PUSCH, PDCCH, EPDCCH 및 PDSCH 등과 같은 채널을 통해 신호가 송수신되는 상황을 'PUCCH, PUSCH, PDCCH, EPDCCH 및 PDSCH를 전송, 수신한다'는 형태로 표기하기도 한다.Hereinafter, a situation in which a signal is transmitted and received through a channel such as a PUCCH, a PUSCH, a PDCCH, an EPDCCH, and a PDSCH may be expressed in the form of 'sending and receiving a PUCCH, a PUSCH, a PDCCH, an EPDCCH, and a PDSCH.'

또한 이하에서는 PDCCH를 전송 또는 수신하거나 PDCCH를 통해서 신호를 전송 또는 수신한다는 기재는 EPDCCH를 전송 또는 수신하거나 EPDCCH를 통해서 신호를 전송 또는 수신하는 것을 포함하는 의미로 사용될 수 있다.In addition, hereinafter, a description of transmitting or receiving a PDCCH or transmitting or receiving a signal through the PDCCH may be used as a meaning including transmitting or receiving an EPDCCH or transmitting or receiving a signal through the EPDCCH.

즉, 이하에서 기재하는 물리 하향링크 제어채널은 PDCCH를 의미하거나, EPDCCH를 의미할 수 있으며, PDCCH 및 EPDCCH 모두를 포함하는 의미로도 사용된다.That is, the physical downlink control channel described below may mean PDCCH or EPDCCH, and may also be used to include both PDCCH and EPDCCH.

또한, 설명의 편의를 위하여 PDCCH로 설명한 부분에도 본 발명의 일 실시예인 EPDCCH를 적용할 수 있으며, EPDCCH로 설명한 부분에도 본 발명의 일 실시예로 EPDCCH를 적용할 수 있다.In addition, for convenience of description, the EPDCCH, which is an embodiment of the present invention, may be applied to the portion described as the PDCCH, and the EPDCCH may be applied to the portion described as the EPDCCH as an embodiment of the present invention.

한편, 이하에서 기재하는 상위계층 시그널링(High Layer Signaling)은 RRC 파라미터를 포함하는 RRC 정보를 전송하는 RRC시그널링을 포함한다.Meanwhile, high layer signaling described below includes RRC signaling for transmitting RRC information including an RRC parameter.

eNB은 단말들로 하향링크 전송을 수행한다. eNB은 유니캐스트 전송(unicast transmission)을 위한 주 물리 채널인 물리 하향링크 공유채널(Physical Downlink Shared Channel, PDSCH), 그리고 PDSCH의 수신에 필요한 스케줄링 등의 하향링크 제어 정보 및 상향링크 데이터 채널(예를 들면 물리 상향링크 공유채널(Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH))에서의 전송을 위한 스케줄링 승인 정보를 전송하기 위한 물리 하향링크 제어채널(Physical Downlink Control Channel, PDCCH)을 전송할 수 있다. 이하에서는, 각 채널을 통해 신호가 송수신 되는 것을 해당 채널이 송수신되는 형태로 기재하기로 한다.The eNB performs downlink transmission to the terminals. The eNB includes downlink control information and an uplink data channel (eg, a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), which is a primary physical channel for unicast transmission, and scheduling required to receive the PDSCH. For example, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) for transmitting scheduling grant information for transmission on a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) may be transmitted. Hereinafter, the transmission and reception of signals through each channel will be described in the form of transmission and reception of the corresponding channel.

모바일 트래픽 폭증에 대처하기 위한 수단으로 저전력 노드를 사용하는 스몰셀이 고려되고 있다. 저전력 노드는 일반적인 매크로 노드에 비해 낮은 송신(Tx) 전력을 사용하는 노드를 나타낸다. Small cells using low power nodes are being considered as a means to cope with the explosion of mobile traffic. Low power nodes represent nodes that use lower transmit (Tx) power than typical macro nodes.

3GPP Release 11 이전의 캐리어 병합(Carrier Aggregation, 이하 CA라 함) 기술에서는 매크로 셀 커버리지 내에서 지리적으로 분산된 안테나인 저전력 RRH(Remote Radio Head)를 사용하여 스몰셀을 구축할 수 있었다.In carrier aggregation (CA) technology before 3GPP Release 11, a small cell can be constructed using a low power remote radio head (RRH), which is a geographically dispersed antenna within macro cell coverage.

하지만 전술한 CA 기술 적용을 위해 매크로 셀과 RRH 셀은 하나의 기지국의 제어 하에 스케줄링 되도록 구축되며, 이를 위해 매크로 셀 노드와 RRH 간에는 이상적인 백홀(ideal backhaul) 구축이 요구되었다. However, in order to apply the above-described CA technology, the macro cell and the RRH cell are constructed to be scheduled under the control of one base station. For this purpose, an ideal backhaul is required between the macro cell node and the RRH.

이상적인 백홀이란, 광선로(optical fiber), LOS 마이크로웨이브(Line Of Sight microwave)를 사용하는 전용 점대점 연결과 같이 매우 높은 쓰루풋(throughput)과 매우 적은 지연을 나타내는 백홀을 의미한다.An ideal backhaul means a backhaul that exhibits very high throughput and very low latency, such as optical fiber, dedicated point-to-point connections using LOS microwaves (Line Of Sight microwave).

이와 달리, xDSL(Digital Subscriber Line), Non LOS 마이크로웨이브(microwave)와 같이 상대적으로 낮은 쓰루풋(throughput)과 큰 지연을 나타내는 백홀을 비이상적 백홀(non-ideal backhaul)이라 한다.In contrast, backhaul that exhibits relatively low throughput and large delay, such as digital subscriber line (xDSL) and Non LOS microwaves, is called non-ideal backhaul.

복수의 서빙 셀들은 위에서 설명한 단일 기지국기반의 CA(Carrier Aggregation) 기술을 통해서 병합되어 단말에 서비스를 제공할 수 있다. 즉, 무선 자원 제어(Radio Resource Control, 이하 'RRC'라고 함) 연결(CONNECTED) 상태의 단말에 대해 복수의 서빙 셀들이 구성될 수 있으며, 매크로 셀 노드와 RRH 간에 이상적인 백홀이 구축되는 경우 매크로 셀과 RRH셀이 함께 서빙 셀들로 구성되어 단말에 서비스를 제공할 수 있다.The plurality of serving cells may be merged through a single base station-based carrier aggregation (CA) technology described above to provide a service to a terminal. That is, a plurality of serving cells may be configured for a UE in a radio resource control (hereinafter referred to as 'RRC') CONNECTED state, and when an ideal backhaul is established between the macro cell node and the RRH, the macro cell And the RRH cell may be configured with serving cells to provide a service to the terminal.

단일 기지국 기반의 CA 기술이 구성될 때, 단말은 네트워크와 하나의 RRC 연결(connection)만을 가질 수 있다.When a single base station-based CA technology is configured, the terminal may have only one RRC connection with the network.

RRC 연결(connection) 설정(establishment)/재설정(re-establishment)/핸드오버에서 하나의 서빙 셀이 Non-Access Stratum(이하, 'NAS'라고 함) 이동성(mobility) 정보(예를 들어, TAI: Tracking Area Identity)를 제공하며, RRC connection 재설정/핸드오버에서 하나의 서빙셀이 시큐리티 입력(security input)을 제공한다. 이러한 셀을 PCell(Primary Cell)이라 한다. PCell은 단지 핸드오버 프로시져와 함께 변경될 수 있다. 단말 능력들(capabilities)에 따라 SCells(Secondary Cells)이 PCell과 함께 서빙 셀로 구성될 수 있다.In an RRC connection establishment / reestablishment / handover, one serving cell is a Non-Access Stratum (hereinafter referred to as 'NAS') mobility information (e.g. TAI: Tracking Area Identity) and one serving cell provides security input in RRC connection reset / handover. Such a cell is called a primary cell (PCell). The PCell can only be changed with the handover procedure. According to terminal capabilities, SCells (Secondary Cells) may be configured as a serving cell together with a PCell.

전술한 SCell의 구성은 트래픽 양에 따라 달라질 수 있어서, SCell은 다운링크 CC(Component Carrier) 만으로도 구성될 수 있다. 각각의 SCell에 대해 업링크 자원의 사용은 다운링크 자원에 추가해서 구성 가능하다. 즉, SCell은 업링크 자원만을 사용하도록 구성될 수 없다. 반면 PCell은 항상 다운링크 CC와 업링크 CC가 함께 구성되어야 한다.The configuration of the above-described SCell may vary depending on the traffic amount, so that the SCell may be configured only with a downlink component carrier (CC). The use of uplink resources for each SCell can be configured in addition to the downlink resources. That is, the SCell may not be configured to use only uplink resources. On the other hand, the PCell must always be configured with a downlink CC and an uplink CC.

또한, PCell과 SCells을 처리하는 하나의 기지국은 물리계층에서 서로 다른 캐리어(DL/UL PCC: Downlink/Uplink Primary Component Carrier, DL/UL SCC: Downlink/Uplink Secondary Component Carrier)를 가지지만 MAC(Medium Access Control) 계층에만 영향을 줄 수 있다. 그 이상의 계층(RLC/PDCP)에 대해서는 캐리어 병합기술이 도입되기 이전의 RLC/PDCP 계층에 영향을 주지 않는다. 즉, RLC/PDCP 계층에서는 CA 동작을 구분할 수 없다.In addition, one base station that processes PCell and SCells has different carriers (DL / UL PCC: Downlink / Uplink Primary Component Carrier, DL / UL SCC: Downlink / Uplink Secondary Component Carrier) in the physical layer, but MAC (Medium Access) Only control layer can be affected. Further layers (RLC / PDCP) do not affect the RLC / PDCP layer before carrier aggregation is introduced. That is, the CA operation cannot be distinguished in the RLC / PDCP layer.

도 1은 캐리어 병합 구성 시 업링크 계층 2 구조를 도시한 도면이다.1 illustrates an uplink layer 2 structure in a carrier aggregation configuration.

도 2는 캐리어 병합 구성 시 다운링크 계층 2 구조를 도시한 도면이다.2 illustrates a downlink layer 2 structure in a carrier aggregation configuration.

도 1 및 도 2를 참조하면 전술한 단일 eNB기반의 CA에 따른 물리계층의 복수 캐리어 속성은 MAC 계층(Medium Access Control)에만 영향을 준다. MAC 계층은 업링크와 다운링크에서 서빙셀 마다 하나의 독립적인 HARQ(Hybrid Automatic Retransmit reQuest) 개체를 가진다. 각각의 HARQ 개체는 컴포넌트 캐리어(Component Carrier, CC)의 데이터 스트림을 처리한다.1 and 2, the multi-carrier attributes of the physical layer according to the CA based on the single eNB affect only the MAC layer (Medium Access Control). The MAC layer has one independent Hybrid Automatic Retransmit reQuest (HARQ) entity per serving cell in the uplink and downlink. Each HARQ entity processes a data stream of a component carrier (CC).

즉, 도 1 및 도 2에서 도시된 바와 같이 단일 기지국 기반의 CA에서 SCell 추가 및 제거에 따른 MAC 계층은 업링크와 다운링크에서 서빙셀 각각에 있어 독립적인 HARQ 개체를 구성하여 CC의 데이터 스트림을 처리하였다.That is, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the MAC layer according to the SCell addition and removal in a single base station-based CA forms an independent HARQ entity in each of the serving cells in the uplink and the downlink to form a data stream of the CC. Treated.

상술한 바와 같이 종래 이동통신망에서는 캐리어 병합 기술을 사용하여 스몰셀을 이용하기 위해서는 매크로셀과 스몰셀이 하나의 eNB 제어 하에서 스케줄링 되어야 했다. 이를 위해 매크로 셀 노드와 스몰셀 노드 간에 이상적인 백홀(ideal backhaul) 구축을 필요로 하는 문제가 있었다. 따라서 매크로셀과 스몰셀이 비이상적인 백홀을 통한 개별적인 eNB를 통해 구축된 경우에는 캐리어 병합 기술을 이용할 수 없는 문제가 있었다. 또한 높은 전력(high output power)을 가진 매크로 셀과 저전력(low output power) 스몰셀의 전력 불균형(power imbalance) 문제로 인해 다운링크와 업링크에서 최적의 성능을 제공할 수 있는 업링크/다운링크 셀 경계(cell borders)가 달라 업링크/다운링크 셀 경계의 성능이 저하될 수 있는 문제가 있었다. 또한 PCell은 항상 업링크와 다운링크 트래픽을 처리하도록 구성되며, 업링크 트래픽만을 위한 SCell을 구성할 수 없었다. 즉, 캐리어 병합 기술을 사용하는 경우 단말과 경로손실이 적은 스몰셀이 SCell로 구성되더라도, 업링크 트래픽이 PCell로 구성된 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있었다. 이와 같은 문제점으로 인해서 단말이 업링크 트래픽 전송을 위해 경로손실이 큰 매크로셀을 이용함으로써 더 많은 전력을 소모해야 하는 문제가 있었다.As described above, in the conventional mobile communication network, the macro cell and the small cell had to be scheduled under one eNB control in order to use the small cell using a carrier aggregation technology. To this end, there is a problem that requires an ideal backhaul construction between the macro cell node and the small cell node. Therefore, when a macro cell and a small cell are constructed through separate eNBs through non-ideal backhaul, there is a problem in that carrier aggregation technology cannot be used. In addition, due to power imbalance of macro cells with high output power and low output power small cells, uplink / downlink can provide optimal performance in the downlink and uplink. Due to the different cell borders, the performance of uplink / downlink cell borders may be degraded. In addition, the PCell is always configured to handle uplink and downlink traffic, and could not configure a SCell for uplink traffic only. That is, in case of using carrier aggregation technology, even if a small cell having a small path loss with a terminal is configured as an SCell, uplink traffic could be delivered through a macro cell configured as a PCell. Due to such a problem, there is a problem that the terminal consumes more power by using a macrocell with a large path loss for transmitting uplink traffic.

이와 같은 문제점을 해결하기 위해 안출된 본 발명은 이동통신망에서 매크로셀과 스몰셀이 비이상적인 백홀을 통한 개별적인 eNB를 통해 구축된 환경에서 매크로 셀의 제어 하에서 스몰셀을 통해 또는 매크로 셀과 스몰셀 간의 협력을 통해 사용자 플래인 데이터 트래픽을 전송하는데 있어서, 업링크 트래픽 경로와 다운링크 트래픽 경로를 분리하여 전달하는 방법을 제공하는 것을 목적으로 한다. 즉, 특정 데이터 무선 베어러의 업링크 트래픽 경로와 다운링크 트래픽 경로를 다르게 하여 제공하는 방법을 제공한다.The present invention devised to solve such a problem is that between the macro cell and the small cell or under the control of the macro cell in an environment in which the macro cell and the small cell are established through separate eNBs through a non-ideal backhaul in a mobile communication network. It is an object of the present invention to provide a method of separating and transmitting an uplink traffic path and a downlink traffic path in transmitting user plane data traffic through cooperation. That is, the present invention provides a method of providing different uplink traffic paths and downlink traffic paths of a specific data radio bearer.

도 3은 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 네트워크 구성 시나리오의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.

도 3을 참조하면, 매크로 셀(302)과 스몰 셀들(301)은 동일한 캐리어 주파수(carrier frequency) F1을 가질 수 있다. 매크로 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국(310)과 각각의 스몰 셀을 제공하는 제 2 기지국(332, 334, 336)은 비이상적인 백홀(non-ideal backhaul)을 통해 연결된다. 스몰 셀들은 중첩된(overlaid) 매크로 셀(302) 네트워크 내에 구축된다. 실외(outdoor) 스몰셀 환경과 스몰셀 클러스터(301)가 고려될 수 있다. 단말은 스몰셀 클러스터(301) 내에서 매크로 셀 및 스몰 셀과 이중 연결을 통하여 복수의 서빙셀을 제공받을 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 3, the macro cell 302 and the small cells 301 may have the same carrier frequency F1. The first base station 310 providing the macro cell and the second base station 332, 334, 336 providing each small cell are connected through a non-ideal backhaul. Small cells are built in an overlapped macro cell 302 network. An outdoor small cell environment and a small cell cluster 301 may be considered. The UE may be provided with a plurality of serving cells through a dual connection with the macro cell and the small cell in the small cell cluster 301.

도 4는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 네트워크 구성 시나리오의 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.4 is a diagram illustrating another example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.

도 4를 참조하면, 매크로 셀(402)과 스몰 셀들(401)은 서로 다른(different) 캐리어 주파수(carrier frequency) F1 및 F2를 가질 수 있다. 매크로 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국(410)과 각각의 스몰 셀을 제공하는 제 2 기지국(432, 434, 436)은 비이상적인 백홀(non-ideal backhaul)을 통해 연결된다. 스몰 셀들은 중첩된(overlaid) 매크로 셀(402) 네트워크 내에 구축된다. 실외(outdoor) 스몰 셀 환경과 스몰 셀 클러스터(401)가 고려될 수 있다. 단말은 스몰 셀 클러스터(401) 내에서 매크로 셀 및 스몰 셀과 이중 연결을 통하여 복수의 서빙 셀을 제공받을 수 있다. 이 경우 각 서빙 셀의 주파수는 도 4에 도시된 바와 같이 F1 및 F2로 서로 다를 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 4, the macro cell 402 and the small cells 401 may have different carrier frequencies F1 and F2. The first base station 410 providing the macro cell and the second base station 432, 434, 436 providing each small cell are connected via non-ideal backhaul. Small cells are built in an overlapped macro cell 402 network. An outdoor small cell environment and a small cell cluster 401 may be considered. The UE may be provided with a plurality of serving cells through a dual connection with the macro cell and the small cell in the small cell cluster 401. In this case, the frequency of each serving cell may be different from F1 and F2 as shown in FIG. 4.

도 5는 본 발명이 적용될 수 있는 네트워크 구성 시나리오의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.5 is a diagram illustrating another example of a network configuration scenario to which the present invention can be applied.

도 5를 참조하면, 복수의 스몰 셀들이 스몰 셀 클러스터(501)를 형성하는 경우를 생각할 수 있다. 이 경우, 스몰 셀을 제공하는 스몰 셀 기지국(510, 512, 514) 간에는 비이상적인 백홀(non-ideal backhaul)을 통해 연결된다. 실내(Indoor) 스몰 셀 환경과 스몰 셀 클러스터(501)가 고려된다. 또한, 스몰 셀 간에는 동일한 캐리어 주파수를 사용할 수도 있고, 서로 다른 캐리어 주파수를 사용할수도 있다. 스몰 셀 간에는 커버리지가 중복될 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 5, a case in which a plurality of small cells forms a small cell cluster 501 may be considered. In this case, the small cell base stations 510, 512, and 514 providing the small cells are connected through non-ideal backhaul. Indoor small cell environment and small cell cluster 501 are considered. In addition, the same carrier frequency may be used between the small cells, or different carrier frequencies may be used. Coverage may overlap between small cells.

도 3 및 도 4의 시나리오에서 스몰셀 eNB 또는 도 5의 시나리오에서 특정 스몰셀 eNB는 독립된(stand-alone) eNB로 동작할 수 있다. 즉 제어 플레인(control plane) 데이터 전송을 위해 UE는 스몰 셀 eNB와 하나의 RRC connection을 설정할 수 있으며, 하나 또는 그 이상의 SRBs(Signaling Radio Bearers)를 설정할 수 있다. 사용자 플레인 데이터 전송을 위해 UE는 스몰 셀 eNB와 하나 또는 그 이상의 DRBs(Data Radio Bearers)를 가질 수 있다.In the scenarios of FIGS. 3 and 4, the small cell eNB or the specific small cell eNB in the scenario of FIG. 5 may operate as a stand-alone eNB. That is, the UE may establish one RRC connection with the small cell eNB and control one or more Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) for control plane data transmission. For user plane data transmission, the UE may have a small cell eNB and one or more Data Radio Bearers (DRBs).

도 3 및 도 4의 시나리오에서 단말은 매크로 셀 eNB의 제어 하에서 하나 또는 그 이상의 스몰 셀 eNB를 통해, 또는 매크로셀 eNB와 하나 또는 그 이상의 스몰셀 eNB 간 협력을 통해, 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송하도록 할 수 있다. 즉, 제어 플레인(control plane) 데이터 전송을 위해 UE는 매크로 셀 eNB와 하나의 RRC connection을 설정하며, 하나 또는 그 이상의 SRBs(Signaling Radio Bearers)를 설정한다. 사용자 플레인 데이터 전송을 위해 UE는 매크로셀 eNB 및/또는 스몰 셀 eNB와 하나 또는 그 이상의 DRBs(Data Radio Bearers)를 설정할 수 있다. 유사하게 도 5의 시나리오에서 단말은 어느 하나의 스몰 셀 eNB의 제어 하에서 하나 또는 그 이상의 다른 스몰 셀 eNB를 통해, 또는 어느 하나의 스몰 셀 eNB와 하나 또는 그 이상의 다른 스몰셀 eNB 간 협력을 통해, 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송하도록 할 수 있다. 즉, 제어 플레인(control plane) 데이터 전송을 위해 UE는 어느 하나의 스몰 셀 eNB와 하나의 RRC connection을 설정하며, 하나 또는 그 이상의 SRBs(Signaling Radio Bearers)를 설정한다. 사용자 플레인 데이터 전송을 위해 UE는 어느 하나의 스몰 셀 eNB 및/또는 다른 스몰 셀 eNB와 하나 또는 그 이상의 DRBs(Data Radio Bearers)를 설정할 수 있다. In the scenarios of FIGS. 3 and 4, the UE may transmit user plane data through one or more small cell eNBs or through cooperation between the macro cell eNB and one or more small cell eNBs under the control of the macro cell eNB. Can be. That is, the UE establishes one RRC connection with the macro cell eNB and sets one or more Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) for control plane data transmission. For user plane data transmission, the UE may establish one or more Data Radio Bearers (DRBs) with the macrocell eNB and / or the small cell eNB. Similarly, in the scenario of FIG. 5, the UE may be controlled through one or more other small cell eNBs under the control of one small cell eNB, or through cooperation between one small cell eNB and one or more other small cell eNBs. User plane data can be sent. That is, the UE establishes one RRC connection with one small cell eNB and sets one or more Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) for control plane data transmission. The UE may establish one or more Data Radio Bearers (DRBs) with one small cell eNB and / or another small cell eNB for user plane data transmission.

본 발명은 전술한 도 3 내지 도 5의 시나리오에서 모두 수행될 수 있다. 다만, 이하에서는 설명 및 이해의 편의를 위해서 도 3 및 도 4의 경우를 예를 들어 설명할 뿐 도 5의 경우에도 적용될 수 있다.The invention can be performed in all of the scenarios of FIGS. 3-5 described above. However, hereinafter, only the case of FIGS. 3 and 4 will be described as an example for convenience of explanation and understanding, and may be applied to the case of FIG. 5.

한편, 본 명세서에서는 단말이 이중 연결을 구성함에 있어서, 단말과 RRC 연결을 형성하고, 핸드오버의 기준이 되는 PCell을 제공하는 기지국 또는 S1-MME를 종단하고, 코어 네트워크에 대해서 모빌리티 앵커(mobility anchor)역할을 하는 기지국을 마스터 기지국 또는 제 1 기지국으로 기재한다. 마스터 기지국 또는 제 1 기지국은 전술한 매크로 셀을 제공하는 기지국일 수 있고, 스몰 셀 간의 이중 연결 상황에서는 어느 하나의 스몰 셀을 제공하는 기지국일 수 있다. 또한, 이중 연결 환경에서 마스터 기지국과 구별되어 단말에 추가적인 무선 자원을 제공하는 기지국을 세컨더리 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국으로 기재한다. 제 1 기지국(마스터 기지국) 및 제 2 기지국(세컨더리 기지국)은 각각 단말에 적어도 하나 이상의 셀을 제공할 수 있고, 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간의 인터페이스를 통해서 연결될 수 있다. 이해를 돕기 위하여 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀을 매크로 셀이라고 기재할 수 있고, 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 스몰 셀이라 기재할 수 있다. 다만, 스몰 셀 클러스터 시나리오에서는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀도 스몰 셀로 기재될 수 있다.On the other hand, in the present specification, when the terminal configures dual connectivity, forms an RRC connection with the terminal, terminates the base station or S1-MME providing a PCell as a reference for handover, and mobility anchor (mobility anchor) to the core network The base station which acts as a master base station or a 1st base station is described. The master base station or the first base station may be a base station providing the above-described macro cell, and may be a base station providing any one small cell in a dual connectivity situation between the small cells. In addition, a base station that is distinguished from a master base station in a dual connectivity environment and provides additional radio resources to a terminal is described as a secondary base station or a second base station. The first base station (master base station) and the second base station (secondary base station) may provide at least one cell to the terminal, respectively, and the first base station and the second base station may be connected through an interface between the first base station and the second base station. have. For better understanding, a cell associated with a first base station may be referred to as a macro cell, and a cell associated with a second base station may be referred to as a small cell. However, in the small cell cluster scenario, a cell associated with the first base station may also be described as a small cell.

본 발명에서의 매크로 셀은 적어도 하나 이상의 셀 각각을 의미할 수 있고, 제 1 기지국에 연관된 전체 셀을 통칭하는 의미로 기재될 수도 있다. 또한, 스몰 셀도 적어도 하나 이상의 셀 각각을 의미할 수 있고, 제 2 기지국에 연관된 전체 셀을 통칭하는 의미로 기재될 수도 있다. 다만, 전술한 바와 같이 스몰 셀 클러스터와 같이 특정 시나리오에서는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀일 수 있으며, 이 경우 제 2 기지국의 셀은 다른 스몰 셀 또는 또 다른 스몰 셀로 기재될 수 있다. 또한, 단말은 전술한 제 1 기지국에 연관된 복수의 셀 및 제 2 기지국에 연관된 복수의 셀을 통해서 통신을 수행할 수 있으며, 이 경우에 제 1 기지국에 연관된 복수의 셀 중 전술한 PCell 기능을 하는 특정 셀을 제 1 기지국 PCell로 기재할 수 있다. 또한, 제 2 기지국에 연관된 복수의 셀 중 특정 셀을 제 2 기지국 PCell로 기재할 수 있다. 제 2 기지국 PCell은 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 중 전술한 PCell의 기능 중 전부 또는 일부를 수행하는 셀을 의미한다. 예를 들어, 제 2 기지국 PCell은 PUCCH 송수신 기능을 수행할 수 있다. 단말에 이중 연결이 구성될 때 전술한 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 서빙셀을 마스터 셀그룹으로, 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 서빙셀을 세컨더리 셀그룹으로 지칭할 수 있다. 셀그룹은 단말 관점에서 기지국을 구별하기 위한 개념으로 사용된다.The macro cell in the present invention may mean each of at least one or more cells, and may be described as a generic term for all cells associated with the first base station. In addition, the small cell may also mean each of at least one or more cells, and may also be described as a generic term for all cells associated with the second base station. However, as described above, in a specific scenario such as a small cell cluster, the cell may be a cell associated with the first base station. In this case, the cell of the second base station may be described as another small cell or another small cell. In addition, the terminal may perform communication through the plurality of cells associated with the first base station and the plurality of cells associated with the second base station, and in this case, the PCell function of the plurality of cells associated with the first base station is performed. The specific cell may be described as the first base station PCell. In addition, a specific cell among a plurality of cells associated with the second base station may be described as the second base station PCell. The second base station PCell refers to a cell that performs all or part of the functions of the aforementioned PCell among the cells associated with the second base station. For example, the second base station PCell may perform a PUCCH transmission / reception function. When the dual connectivity is configured in the terminal, the cell associated with the first base station or the serving cell associated with the first base station is referred to as a master cell group, and the cell associated with the second base station or the serving cell associated with the second base station is referred to as a secondary cell group. can do. The cell group is used as a concept for distinguishing a base station from the terminal point of view.

도 6은 사용자 플레인 데이터 전송을 위한 계층 2 프로토콜 구조의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a layer 2 protocol structure for user plane data transmission.

도 6을 참조하면, 도 6과 같은 프로토콜 구조를 이용하여 각 데이터 무선 베어러에 대해 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해 제공되는 무선자원을 이용하여 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제 1 기지국의 PDCP 개체는 제 1 기지국 RLC 개체 및 제 2 기지국 RLC 개체로 PDCP PDU를 제출(submit)할 수 있다. 즉, 특정 무선베어러는 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국에 스플릿(split)되어 구성될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 6, user plane data may be transmitted using radio resources provided through a first base station and a second base station for each data radio bearer using the protocol structure as shown in FIG. 6. For example, the PDCP entity of the first base station may submit a PDCP PDU to the first base station RLC entity and the second base station RLC entity. That is, the specific radio bearer may be configured by splitting the first base station and the second base station.

도 7은 사용자 플레인 데이터 전송을 위한 계층 2 프로토콜 구조의 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.7 illustrates another example of a layer 2 protocol structure for user plane data transmission.

이에 대한 또 다른 예로 도 7과 같은 프로토콜 구조를 이용하여 각 데이터 무선 베어러에 대해 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송하거나, 또는 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송할 수 있다. As another example of this, the user plane data may be transmitted only through the first base station or the user plane data only through the second base station for each data radio bearer using the protocol structure as shown in FIG. 7.

도 3 내지 도 7의 시나리오 또는 프로토콜 구조에서 본 발명의 UE는 마스터 기지국의 제어 하에서 하나 또는 그 이상의 세컨더리 기지국을 통해, 또는 마스터 기지국과 하나 또는 그 이상의 세컨더리 기지국 간 협력을 통해, 사용자 플레인 데이터를 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 전송하도록 할 수 있다. 즉, 주어진 업링크, 다운링크 데이터 트래픽에 대해 부하, 경로 손실(path loss), 커버리지 등을 고려하여 최적화된 전송율을 제공할 수 있는 eNB를 선택하도록 할 수 있다. 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 전달하는 일 예로 모든 DRBs에 대한 업링크 트래픽을 단말과 경로손실이 적은 세컨더리 기지국을 통해 전달하고, 모든 DRBs(또는 RBs)에 대한 다운링크 트래픽을 마스터 기지국을 통해 전달할 수 있다.In the scenario or protocol structure of FIGS. 3 to 7, the UE of the present invention uploads user plane data through one or more secondary base stations under the control of the master base station, or through cooperation between the master base station and one or more secondary base stations. It is possible to separate link traffic and downlink traffic. That is, an eNB that can provide an optimized transmission rate may be selected in consideration of load, path loss, and coverage for a given uplink and downlink data traffic. For example, the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic are separated and delivered. The uplink traffic for all DRBs is transmitted through the terminal and the secondary base station with low path loss, and the downlink traffic for all DRBs (or RBs) is transferred to the master base station. Can pass through.

다른 예로, 특정 DRB(s)에 대한 업링크 트래픽을 세컨더리 기지국을 통해 전달하고, 또 다른 특정 DRB(s)에 대한 다운링크 트래픽을 마스터 기지국을 통해 전달하며, 또 다른 특정 DRB(s)에 대한 트래픽에 대해서는 업링크 다운링크 모두 마스터 기지국 및 세컨더리 기지국을 통해 전달할 수 있다. 즉, 도 6과 같이 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해 제공되는 무선자원을 이용하여 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송하는 특정 데이터 무선 베어러에 대해, 업링크 트래픽은 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 전달하고 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통해 전달할 수 있다. 또는 도 6과 같이 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해 제공되는 무선자원을 이용하여 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송하는 또 다른 특정 데이터 무선 베어러에 대해, 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통해 전달하고 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 전달할 수도 있다. 또는 도 6과 같이 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통해 제공되는 무선자원을 이용하여 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송하는 또 다른 특정 데이터 무선 베어러에 대해, 업링크 트래픽 및 다운링크 트래픽 모두 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통해 전달할 수도 있다. As another example, uplink traffic for a particular DRB (s) is passed through the secondary base station, downlink traffic for another particular DRB (s) is passed through the master base station, and another specific DRB (s) For traffic, both uplink downlinks can pass through the master base station and the secondary base station. That is, for a specific data radio bearer transmitting user plane data using radio resources provided through the first base station and the second base station as shown in FIG. 6, uplink traffic is transmitted only through the second base station, and downlink traffic is transmitted. It can be delivered through the first base station and the second base station. Alternatively, for another specific data radio bearer transmitting user plane data using radio resources provided through the first base station and the second base station as shown in FIG. 6, uplink traffic is transmitted through the first base station and the second base station. Downlink traffic may be forwarded only through the first base station. Alternatively, for another specific data radio bearer transmitting user plane data by using radio resources provided through the first base station and the second base station as shown in FIG. 6, both the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic may be the first base station and the second base station. It may be delivered through a base station.

또 다른 예로, 도 7과 같이 특정한 데이터 무선 베어러에 대해 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 업링크/다운링크 사용자 플레인 데이터 트래픽을 전송할 수 있다. 또는 다른 특정한 데이터 무선 베어러에 대해 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 업링크/다운링크 사용자 플레인 데이터 트래픽을 전송할 수 있다. 단말이 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽의 전송 경로를 분리하여 송수신하는 방법은 위에서 설명한 예시뿐만 아니라 다양한 구현방식에 의해서 경로가 구분되어 송수신될 수 있다.As another example, uplink / downlink user plane data traffic may be transmitted only through a first base station for a specific data radio bearer as shown in FIG. 7. Alternatively, uplink / downlink user plane data traffic may be transmitted only through the second base station for another specific data radio bearer. The method for the UE to separately transmit and receive transmission paths of the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic may be transmitted and received by dividing the paths by various implementation methods as well as the above-described examples.

이하에서는 본 발명의 각 실시예에 따라 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 송수신하는 방법에 대해 예를 들어 설명한다.Hereinafter, a method of separately transmitting and receiving uplink traffic and downlink traffic according to each embodiment of the present invention will be described.

제 1 실시예: 무선베어러(Radio Bearer, RB) 단위로 상하향 트래픽 전송경로를 분리하는 방법.First embodiment: Method for separating up and down traffic transmission path in units of a radio bearer (RB).

UE가 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국과 RRC Connection을 설정하여 RRC Connected 상태에 있을 때, UE는 비이상적인 백홀을 통해 연결된 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 제 2 기지국 SCell(또는 서빙셀)로 추가할 수 있다.When the UE establishes an RRC connection with a first base station providing a cell that operates as a PCell and is in an RRC Connected state, the UE sets a cell associated with a second base station connected through a non-ideal backhaul to a second base station SCell (or serving cell). Can be added as

PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국이 새로운 제 2 기지국 SCell 후보를 검출한 후 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀들을 제 2 기지국 SCell로 추가하기 위해 또는 구성된 제 2 기지국 SCell을 수정하기 위해서 제 2 기지국 SCell 추가/수정을 결정하면, PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 프로시져를 통해 제 2 기지국 SCell을 추가/수정한다.The second base station to add cells associated with the second base station to the second base station SCell after the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell detects a new second base station SCell candidate or to modify the configured second base station SCell Upon determining the SCell addition / modification, the first base station providing the cell operating as the PCell adds / modifies the second base station SCell through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure.

만약 UE가 수신한 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 메시지에 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell리스트(SeNBSCellToAddModList)가 포함되면, UE는 제 2 기지국 SCell 추가 또는 수정을 수행한다. 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell 리스트의 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell정보(SeNBSCellToAddMod)는 다음과 같은 정보를 포함할 수 있다.If the second base station SCell list (SeNBSCellToAddModList) to be added / modified is included in the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message received by the UE, the UE performs addition or modification of the second base station SCell. The second base station SCell information (SeNBSCellToAddMod) to be added / modified of the second base station SCell list to be added / modified may include the following information.

■ (제 2 기지국) SCell인덱스((SeNB)SCellIndex): UE에 대해 구성된 제 2 기지국 SCells 내에서 하나의 제 2 기지국 SCell을 식별하기 위해 사용되는 인덱스 정보를 포함한다.■ (Second Base Station) SCell Index ((SeNB) SCellIndex): Contains index information used to identify one second base station SCell within second base station SCells configured for the UE.

■ 셀식별자(CellIdentification): 제 2 기지국 SCell의 PCI(Physical Cell Id)와 ARFCN(Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number) 정보를 포함한다.■ Cell Identification (CellIdentification): Includes Physical Cell ID (PCI) and Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) information of the second base station SCell.

■ 무선자원구성공통SCell정보(radioResourceConfigCommonScell): UE가 SCell에서 동작하기 위해 필수적인(essential)정보로 시스템 정보(System information) 내에 공통 무선자원구성정보를 포함한다. 공통 무선자원구성정보의 일 예로, 물리계층 파라미터, 랜덤액세스 파라미터 등이 포함될 수 있다.■ Radio Resource Configuration Common SCell Information (radioResourceConfigCommonScell): Essential information for UE to operate in SCell, which includes common radio resource configuration information in system information. As an example of the common radio resource configuration information, physical layer parameters, random access parameters, and the like may be included.

■ 무선자원구성전용SCell정보(radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell): SCell에 대해 적용가능한 UE-specific 구성정보(e.g. physicalConfigDedicatedSCell, mac-MainConfigSCell)를 포함한다.■ RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell: Contains UE-specific configuration information (e.g. physicalConfigDedicatedSCell, mac-MainConfigSCell) applicable to the SCell.

단말이 제 2 기지국 SCell을 기존 PCell에 연계된 기지국의 SCell과 구분할 수 있도록 추가할 셀정보(셀추가수정정보)는 제 2 기지국 구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는, 제 2 기지국 SCell 인덱스 값을 기존 PCell에 연계된 기지국의 SCell인덱스 값과 다르게 설정하여 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀임을 구분하도록 할 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 기존 PCell에 연계된 기지국의 SCell인덱스로 사용하는 값이 아닌 다른 값을 사용하도록 하기 위해 현재 1에서 7까지의 정수 값을 가질 수 있는 SCell 인덱스를 1~14까지의 정수 값을 가질 수 있도록 할 수 있다. 즉, 1에서 7까지의 정수값은 PCell에 연계된 기지국의 SCell들을 위한 인덱스로 사용하고, 8~14까지의 정수값은 제 2 기지국을 위한 인덱스로 사용할 수 있다. 다른 예로, PCell에 연계된 기지국의 SCell인덱스와 제 2 기지국의 SCell인덱스를 구분할 수 있도록 SCell인덱스 및 제 2 기지국을 통한 SCell임을 나타내는 표시정보 필드를 함께 구성하여 전송하도록 할 수 있다.The cell information (cell addition modification information) to be added so that the terminal can distinguish the second base station SCell from the base station SCell linked to the existing PCell may include the second base station identification information. Alternatively, the second base station SCell index value may be set differently from the SCell index value of the base station linked to the existing PCell to distinguish the cell associated with the second base station. For example, in order to use a value other than the value used as the SCell index of the base station linked to the existing PCell, the SCell index, which can have an integer value from 1 to 7, currently has an integer value from 1 to 14 You can do that. That is, an integer value of 1 to 7 may be used as an index for SCells of a base station linked to a PCell, and an integer value of 8 to 14 may be used as an index for a second base station. As another example, in order to distinguish the SCell index of the base station linked to the PCell and the SCell index of the second base station, the SCell index and the indication information field indicating that the SCell through the second base station may be configured and transmitted together.

UE는 전술한 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell 정보에 포함된 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스가 현재 UE 구성(current UE configuration) 파트가 아닌 경우, 수신된 무선자원구성공통SCell정보와 무선자원구성전용SCell정보에 따라 셀식별자에 상응하는 제 2 기지국 SCell을 추가한다. 즉, UE에게 구성된 제 2 기지국 SCell이 아닌 경우, 수신된 무선자원구성공통SCell정보와 무선자원구성전용SCell정보에 따라 셀식별자에 상응하는 제 2 기지국 SCell을 추가한다.If the second base station SCell index included in the above-described second base station SCell information to be added / modified is not a current UE configuration part, the UE is included in the received radio resource configuration common SCell information and the radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information. Accordingly, the second base station SCell corresponding to the cell identifier is added. That is, when the second base station SCell is not configured for the UE, the second base station SCell corresponding to the cell identifier is added according to the received radio resource configuration common SCell information and the radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information.

만약, UE는 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell 정보에 포함된 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스가 현재 UE 구성(current UE configuration) 파트인 경우, 수신된 무선자원구성전용SCell정보에 따라 제 2 기지국 SCell을 수정한다. 즉, UE에게 구성된 제 2 기지국 SCell인 경우, 수신된 무선자원구성전용SCell정보에 따라 제 2 기지국 SCell을 수정한다If the second base station SCell index included in the second base station SCell information to be added / modified is a current UE configuration part, the UE modifies the second base station SCell according to the received radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information. . That is, in the case of the second base station SCell configured for the UE, the second base station SCell is modified according to the received radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information.

전술한 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell 정보에 포함되는 정보들은 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국이 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 프로시져를 통해 제 2 기지국 SCell을 추가/수정하기 전에 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간 X2 인터페이스를 통해 조회(interrogation)해 올 수 있다. 다른 예로, 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell 정보에 포함되는 정보들은 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국에 사전 구성되거나, 사전에 OAM(Operations, Administration and Maintenance)을 통해 저장되거나 또는 이전의 제 2 기지국 SCell 추가/수정 절차에서 저장되어 이용될 수 있다.The information included in the above-described second base station SCell information to be added / modified is the first base station and the second base station before the first base station providing the cell operating as the PCell adds / modifies the second base station SCell through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Interrogation can be made through the X2 interface. As another example, the information included in the second base station SCell information to be added / modified may be preconfigured in the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell, stored in advance through operations, administration and maintenance (OAM), or previously generated. 2 may be stored and used in a base station SCell addition / modification procedure.

이상에서 설명한 바와 같이 UE는 제 2 기지국을 추가/수정함에 있어서, 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 CC를 구분할 수 있다. 이를 통해서 본 발명의 UE는 다운링크 데이터(트래픽) 및 업링크 데이터(트래픽)의 송수신 경로를 구분할 수 있다. 구체적으로, PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 프로시져를 통해 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국 및/또는 SCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 2 기지국에 대해 다음과 같은 방법을 이용하여 무선자원을 구성할 수 있다. 이하에서는 도면을 참조하여 무선자원을 구성하는 구체적인 실시예를 설명한다.As described above, the UE may distinguish the CC associated with the second base station or the second base station in adding / modifying the second base station. Through this, the UE of the present invention can distinguish a transmission / reception path of downlink data (traffic) and uplink data (traffic). Specifically, a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may be configured as follows for a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell and / or a second base station providing a cell operating as an SCell through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. The same method can be used to configure radio resources. Hereinafter, a specific embodiment of configuring a radio resource will be described with reference to the drawings.

- 무선자원구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicated)에데이터 전송 경로 설정을 위한 셀/기지국 인덱스/구분정보를 포함하는 방법. A method of including cell / base station index / division information for data transmission path establishment in RadioResourceConfigDedicated.

PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 무선자원구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicated)의 무선베어러추가수정리스트(DRB-ToAddModList) 또는 무선베어러해제리스트(DRB-ToReleaseList) 정보를 이용하여 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국 및/또는 제 2 기지국 SCell(또는 서빙셀)로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 2 기지국에 대해 무선자원을 구성할 수 있다. 예를 들어, PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국의 특정 무선베어러를 제 1 기지국 및/또는 제 2 기지국 SCell(또는 서빙셀)로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 2 기지국에 추가/수정하여 구성할 수 있다. A first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell uses a radio bearer addition modification list (DRB-ToAddModList) or radio bearer release list (DRB-ToReleaseList) information of radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicated). Radio resources may be configured for a second base station providing a cell operating as a serving first base station and / or a second base station SCell (or serving cell). For example, by adding / modifying a specific radio bearer of a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell to a second base station providing a cell operating as a first base station and / or a second base station SCell (or serving cell). Can be configured.

일 예로, 전술한 도 6과 같은 연결구조에서 무선베어러추가수정리스트(drb-ToAddModList)의 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)는 eps-BearerIdentity(EPS베어러식별자), drb-Identity, PDCP 구성정보(pdcp-Config), 제 1 기지국 RLC 개체에 피어링된 RLC 개체와 제 2 기지국 RLC 개체에 피어링된 RLC 개체를 위한 RLC 구성정보(rlc-Config), logicalChannelIdentity, logicalChannelConfig 중 하나 이상의 정보를 포함할 수 있다. For example, in the connection structure as shown in FIG. 6, the wireless bearer additional modification information DRB-ToAddMod of the wireless bearer addition modification list drb-ToAddModList is eps-BearerIdentity (EPS bearer identifier), drb-Identity, and PDCP configuration information. (pdcp-Config), one or more of RLC configuration information (rlc-Config), logicalChannelIdentity, and logicalChannelConfig for the RLC entity peered to the first base station RLC entity and the RLC entity peered to the second base station RLC entity. .

다른 예로, 전술한 도 7과 같은 연결구조에서 무선베어러추가수정리스트(drb-ToAddModList)의 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)는 eps-BearerIdentity(EPS베어러식별자), drb-Identity, 제 2 기지국 PDCP 개체에 피어링된 PDCP 개체 구성정보(pdcp-Config), 제 2 기지국 RLC 개체에 피어링된 RLC 개체 구성정보(rlc-Config), logicalChannelIdentity, logicalChannelConfig 중 하나 이상의 정보를 포함할 수 있다. As another example, in the connection structure as shown in FIG. 7, the radio bearer modification information DRB-ToAddMod of the radio bearer addition modification list drb-ToAddModList may be eps-BearerIdentity (EPS bearer identifier), drb-Identity, second base station. One or more of PDCP entity configuration information (pdcp-Config) peered to the PDCP entity, RLC entity configuration information (rlc-Config) peered to the second base station RLC entity, logicalChannelIdentity, logicalChannelConfig.

PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 전달하기 위해, 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI)/ 다운링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스/다운링크SCell(또는 PCell)인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자/다운링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크/다운링크 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보가 포함되도록 할 수 있다. 또는 PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 특정 셀 또는 특정 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 특정 CC 또는 특정 eNB를 통해 전달하기 위해, 전술한 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI)/ 다운링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스/다운링크SCell(또는 PCell)인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자/다운링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크/다운링크 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함될 수 있도록할 수 있다. A first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may separate uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and transmit the uplink cell identifier (eg, uplink cell identifier) to the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). , PCI) / downlink cell identifier (e.g. PCI) or uplink SCell index / downlink SCell (or PCell) index or uplink eNB identifier / downlink eNB identifier or UE to uplink / downlink cell / base station The index / division information for distinguishing may be included. Alternatively, the first base station operating as a PCell may separate the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and deliver the same through the specific cell or the specific second base station SCell or the specific CC or the specific eNB. Uplink Cell Identifier (eg PCI) / Downlink Cell Identifier (eg PCI) or Uplink SCell Index / Downlink SCell (or PCell) Index or Uplink eNB / The downlink eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information for distinguishing uplink / downlink cell / base station.

UE는 전술한 무선베어러를 추가수정하는데 있어 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI)/다운링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스/다운링크SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자/다운링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크/다운링크 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 수신하면, 무선베어러의 업링크/다운링크 트래픽을 각각 업링크셀/다운링크셀 또는 업링크SCell/다운링크SCell 또는 업링크CC/다운링크CC 또는 업링크eNB/다운링크eNB 또는 업링크eNB에 연관된 셀 그룹/다운링크eNB에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 구분하여 전달할 수 있다.The UE may use the uplink cell identifier (eg PCI) / downlink cell identifier (eg PCI) or uplink SCell index / downlink SCell index or uplink eNB identifier / When the downlink eNB identifier or the UE receives the index / division information for distinguishing the uplink / downlink cell / base station, the uplink / downlink traffic of the radio bearer is respectively transmitted to the uplink cell / downlink cell or uplink SCell / A cell group associated with a downlink SCell or an uplink CC / downlink CC or an uplink eNB / downlink eNB or an uplink eNB may be classified and transmitted through a cell group associated with the downlink eNB.

만약, UE가 무선베어러를 추가수정하는데 있어 전술한 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI)/다운링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스/다운링크SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자/다운링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크/다운링크 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함하지 않은 무선자원구성정보를 수신하면, 전술한 무선베어러는 업링크와 다운링크를 구분하지 않고 전달될 수 있다. 즉, 무선베어러는 매크로셀 또는 PCC(Primary Component Carrier) 또는 제 1 기지국을 통해 전달 될 수 있다. 다른 예로, 무선베어러는 서빙셀 또는 서빙셀 eNB를 통해 전달될 수도 있다. 예를 들어 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다. If the UE further modifies the radio bearer, the aforementioned uplink cell identifier (eg PCI) / downlink cell identifier (eg PCI) or uplink SCell index / downlink SCell index or uplink eNB When the identifier / downlink eNB identifier or the UE receives radio resource configuration information that does not include index / division information for distinguishing the uplink / downlink cell / base station, the above-described radio bearer does not distinguish between the uplink and the downlink. It can be delivered without. That is, the radio bearer may be delivered through a macro cell, a primary component carrier (PCC), or a first base station. As another example, the radio bearer may be delivered through the serving cell or the serving cell eNB. For example, it may be delivered through a cell group associated with the first base station and the second base station or the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

만약, UE가 무선베어러를 추가수정하는데 있어 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자만을 포함하는 무선자원구성정보를 수신하면, 단말은 해당 무선베어러에 대해 업링크 트래픽을 해당 셀 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달할 수 있다. 그리고 단말은 해당 무선베어러에 대해 다운링크 트래픽을 매크로셀 또는 제 1 기지국 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 전달할 수 있다. 다른 예로, 단말은 해당 무선베어러에 대해 업링크 트래픽을 해당 셀 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달할 수도 있다. 그리고 단말은 해당 무선베어러에 대해 다운링크 트래픽을 서빙셀 또는 서빙셀eNB를 통해 전달할 수 있다. 즉, 단말은 해당 무선베어러에 대해 다운링크 트래픽을 매크로셀과 스몰셀, 또는 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달할 수 있다.If the UE receives radio resource configuration information including only an uplink cell identifier (for example, PCI) or an uplink SCell index or an uplink eNB identifier in further modifying the radio bearer, the UE receives information on the corresponding radio bearer. Uplink traffic may be delivered through the cell or the base station or a cell group associated with the base station. The terminal may transmit downlink traffic for the corresponding radio bearer through a macro cell or a cell associated with the first base station or the first base station. As another example, the terminal may deliver uplink traffic for the radio bearer through the cell, the base station, or a cell group associated with the base station. The terminal may transmit downlink traffic through the serving cell or the serving cell eNB for the corresponding radio bearer. That is, the terminal may transmit downlink traffic for the corresponding radio bearer through the macro cell and the small cell, the first base station and the second base station, or the cell group associated with the first base station and the cell group associated with the second base station.

이상에서 예를 들어 설명한 무선베어러추가수정리스트(drb-ToAddModList)에 포함되는 정보들은 PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국이 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 프로시져를 통해 무선베어러를 추가/수정 및/또는 해제하기 전에 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국간 X2 인터페이스를 통한 프로시져를 통해 생성될 수 있다. The information included in the radio bearer addition modification list (drb-ToAddModList) described above as an example is described before the first base station operating as a PCell adds / modifies and / or releases the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. It may be generated through a procedure through the X2 interface between the second base station.

도 8은 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.8 is a diagram illustrating an example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 8을 참조하면, 전술한 무선자원구성정보는 무선베어러추가수정정보에 전술한 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI)/다운링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스/다운링크SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자/다운링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크/다운링크 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 즉, 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI)/다운링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스/다운링크SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자/다운링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국 및/또는 다운링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함하는 무선자원구성정보는 일 예로, 도 8과 같이 구성될 수 있다. 구체적으로 예를 들면, ENBIndex는 업링크 트래픽을 전송할 특정 기지국 인덱스 값으로 1~5 사이의 정수 값을 가지도록 구성될 수 있다. 다른 예로 ENBIndex는 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성되면 True, 그렇지 않으면(예를 들어, 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성되면) False 값을 가지도록 구성될 수도 있다. 또 다른 예로, ENBIndex는 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값, 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값, 제 1기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해서 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값을 구분할 수 있도록 구성될 수도 있다. 또 다른 예로 ENBIndex는 SCellIndex/ENBIndex는 인덱스들의 리스트를 값으로 가질 수도 있다. 즉, ENBIndex는 두 개의 기지국을 통해 다운링크 트래픽을 처리하는 경우, 두 개의 인덱스 값을 가질 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 8, the above-described radio resource configuration information may include uplink cell identifiers (eg, PCI) / downlink cell identifiers (eg, PCI) or uplink SCell index / The downlink SCell index or uplink eNB identifier / downlink eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information for distinguishing the uplink / downlink cell / base station. That is, the uplink cell identifier (eg PCI) / downlink cell identifier (eg PCI) or uplink SCell index / downlink SCell index or uplink eNB in the radio bearer add modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). Radio resource configuration information including an identifier / downlink eNB identifier or index / division information for identifying a cell / base station to which the UE will transmit uplink traffic and / or a cell / base station to transmit downlink traffic is an example. It can be configured together. Specifically, for example, the ENBIndex may be configured to have an integer value between 1 and 5 as a specific base station index value for transmitting uplink traffic. As another example, the ENBIndex may be configured to have a value of True if configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the second base station, or False otherwise (eg, configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the first base station). As another example, the ENBIndex is a value for distinguishing the configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through the second base station, a value for distinguishing the configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through the first base station, the first base station and the second. It may be configured to be able to distinguish a value for distinguishing what is configured to transmit uplink traffic through the base station. As another example, ENBIndex may have SCellIndex / ENBIndex as a value list. That is, ENBIndex may have two index values when downlink traffic is processed through two base stations.

또 다른 예로, PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 전달하기 위해, 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크 제 2기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는, 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽을 제 2 기지국 SCell로 구성된 스몰셀로 전달하기 위해 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크 제 2기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는, 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽을 특정 셀 또는 특정 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 특정 CC 또는 특정 eNB를 통해 전달하기 위해 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크 제 2기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. As another example, a first base station operating as a PCell may use an uplink cell identifier (eg, an uplink cell identifier (DRB-ToAddMod)) in order to separate and transmit uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer. , PCI) or uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or index / division information for identifying the cell / base station to which the UE will carry uplink traffic. Alternatively, the first base station may transmit uplink traffic for a specific radio bearer to the small cell configured with the second base station SCell in the uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) in the radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) or The uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information for identifying the cell / base station to which the uplink traffic will be delivered. Alternatively, the first base station may transmit the uplink traffic for a specific radio bearer to the radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) to deliver uplink traffic through a specific cell or a specific second base station SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB. For example, PCI) or an uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or an index / division information for identifying a cell / base station to which the UE will carry uplink traffic.

UE가 전술한 무선베어러를 추가수정하는데 있어 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 수신하면, 해당 무선베어러의 업링크 트래픽을 무선베어러추가수정정보에 기초하여 해당 셀 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 SCC(Secondary Component Carrier) 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달할 수 있다. 그리고 해당 무선베어러의 다운링크 트래픽을 매크로셀 또는 PCC 또는 제 1 기지국을 통해 구분하여 전달할 수 있다. 또는, 해당 무선베어러의 다운링크 트래픽을 서빙셀 또는 서빙셀 eNB를 통해 구분하여 전달할 수도 있다. 예를 들어 해당 무선베어러의 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.In the UE further modifying the aforementioned radio bearer, an uplink cell identifier (for example, PCI) or an uplink second base station SCell index or an uplink eNB identifier or a cell / base station to which the UE will transmit uplink traffic. Upon receiving the index / division information, the uplink traffic of the radio bearer is transmitted through the cell or the second base station SCell or the secondary component carrier (SCC) or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station based on the radio bearer modification information. I can deliver it. The downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted through a macro cell, a PCC, or a first base station. Alternatively, downlink traffic of the corresponding radio bearer may be transmitted through a serving cell or a serving cell eNB. For example, the downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted through a cell group associated with the first base station and the second base station or the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

만약, UE가 해당 무선베어러를 추가수정하는데 있어 전술한 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함하지 않은 무선자원구성정보를 수신하면, 해당 무선베어러는 업링크와 다운링크를 구분하지 않고 전달될 수 있다. 즉, 해당 무선베어러는 매크로셀 또는 PCC(Primary Component Carrier) 또는 제 1 기지국을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 해당 무선베어러는 서빙셀 또는 서빙셀 eNB를 통해 전달될 수도 있다. 예를 들어 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the UE further modifies the radio bearer, the aforementioned uplink cell identifier (for example, PCI) or uplink SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or cell / base station for the UE to transmit uplink traffic is used. When receiving radio resource configuration information that does not include index / division information, the radio bearer may be transmitted without distinguishing the uplink and the downlink. That is, the radio bearer may be delivered through a macro cell, a primary component carrier (PCC), or a first base station. Alternatively, the radio bearer may be delivered through a serving cell or a serving cell eNB. For example, it may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

전술한 무선베어러추가수정리스트(drb-ToAddModList)에 포함되는 정보들은 PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국이 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 프로시져를 통해 무선베어러를 추가/수정 및/또는 해제하기 전에 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간 X2 인터페이스를 통한 프로시져를 통해 생성될 수 있다. The information included in the above-described radio bearer addition modification list (drb-ToAddModList) may be applied to the first base station and the second base station before the first base station operating as the PCell adds / modifies and / or releases the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Can be created through a procedure via an inter X2 interface.

도 9는 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.9 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 9를 참조하면, 전술한 무선자원구성정보에 포함되는 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)는 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 일 예로, ENBIndex는 업링크 트래픽을 전송할 특정 기지국 인덱스 값으로 1~5 사이의 정수 값을 가지도록 구성될 수 있다. 다른 예로 ENBIndex는 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성되면 True, 그렇지 않으면(예를 들어 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성되면) False값을 가지도록 구성될 수도 있다. 또 다른 예로, ENBIndex는 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값, 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값, 제 1기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해서 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값을 구분할 수 있도록 구성될 수도 있다. 또 다른 예로, ENBIndex는 인덱스들의 리스트를 값으로 가질 수 있다. 예를 들어 ENBIndex는 두 개의 기지국을 통해 다운링크 트래픽을 처리하는 경우, 두 개의 인덱스 값을 포함할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 9, the radio bearer add modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) included in the above-described radio resource configuration information may be an uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) or an uplink SCell index or an uplink eNB identifier or UE. It may include index / division information for identifying a cell / base station to carry uplink traffic. For example, the ENBIndex may be configured to have an integer value between 1 and 5 as a specific base station index value for transmitting uplink traffic. As another example, the ENBIndex may be configured to have a value of True if configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the second base station, and False otherwise (eg, configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the first base station). As another example, the ENBIndex is a value for distinguishing the configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through the second base station, a value for distinguishing the configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through the first base station, the first base station and the second. It may be configured to be able to distinguish a value for distinguishing what is configured to transmit uplink traffic through the base station. As another example, ENBIndex may have a list of indices as a value. For example, ENBIndex may include two index values when processing downlink traffic through two base stations.

- 무선자원구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicated)에 업링크/다운링크 구분정보 포함하는 방법. How to include uplink / downlink classification information in RadioResourceConfigDedicated.

PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국은 무선자원구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicated)의 무선베어러추가수정리스트(DRB-ToAddModList) 또는 무선베어러해제리스트(DRB-ToReleaseList)를 이용하여 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국 및/또는 제 2 기지국 SCell(또는 서빙셀)로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 2 기지국에 대해 무선자원을 구성할 수 있다. 예를 들어, PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국의 특정 무선베어러를 제 1 기지국 및/또는 제 2 기지국 SCell(또는 서빙셀)로 동작하는 제 2 기지국에 추가/수정하여 구성할 수 있다.A first base station operating as a PCell is a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell by using a radio bearer modification list (DRB-ToAddModList) or a radio bearer release list (DRB-ToReleaseList) of radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicated). And / or configure a radio resource for a second base station providing a cell that operates as a second base station SCell (or serving cell). For example, a specific radio bearer of a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may be added / modified to a second base station operating as a first base station and / or a second base station SCell (or serving cell). .

일 예로, 전술한 도 6과 같은 연결구조에서 무선베어러추가수정리스트(drb-ToAddModList)의 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)는 eps-BearerIdentity(EPS베어러식별자), drb-Identity, PDCP 구성정보(pdcp-Config), 제 1 기지국 RLC 개체에 피어링된 RLC 개체와 제 2 기지국 RLC 개체에 피어링된 RLC 개체를 위한 RLC 구성정보(rlc-Config), logicalChannelIdentity, logicalChannelConfig 중 하나 이상의 정보를 포함할 수 있다. For example, in the connection structure as shown in FIG. 6, the wireless bearer additional modification information DRB-ToAddMod of the wireless bearer addition modification list drb-ToAddModList is eps-BearerIdentity (EPS bearer identifier), drb-Identity, and PDCP configuration information. (pdcp-Config), one or more of RLC configuration information (rlc-Config), logicalChannelIdentity, and logicalChannelConfig for the RLC entity peered to the first base station RLC entity and the RLC entity peered to the second base station RLC entity. .

다른 예로, 전술한 도 7과 같은 연결구조에서 무선베어러추가수정리스트(drb-ToAddModList)의 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)는 eps-BearerIdentity(EPS베어러식별자), drb-Identity, 제 2 기지국 PDCP 개체에 피어링된 PDCP 개체 구성정보(pdcp-Config), 제 2 기지국 RLC 개체에 피어링된 RLC 개체 구성정보(rlc-Config), logicalChannelIdentity, logicalChannelConfig 중 하나 이상의 정보를 포함할 수 있다. As another example, in the connection structure as shown in FIG. 7, the radio bearer modification information DRB-ToAddMod of the radio bearer addition modification list drb-ToAddModList may be eps-BearerIdentity (EPS bearer identifier), drb-Identity, second base station. One or more of PDCP entity configuration information (pdcp-Config) peered to the PDCP entity, RLC entity configuration information (rlc-Config) peered to the second base station RLC entity, logicalChannelIdentity, logicalChannelConfig.

PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 전달하기 위해, 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 eNB식별자 또는 UE가 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 특정 셀 또는 특정 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 특정 CC 또는 특정 eNB를 통해 전달하기 위해, 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 eNB식별자 또는 UE가 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수도 있다. 또한, 무선베어러추가수정정보는 업링크/다운링크 구분정보(예를 들어, UpDownIndicator)를 더 포함할 수도 있다. The first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell is a cell identifier (eg, PCI) in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) to separate and transmit uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer. Alternatively, the second base station SCell index or eNB identifier or UE may include index / division information for identifying a cell / base station. Alternatively, the first base station separates uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and delivers it through a specific cell or a specific second base station SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB, so as to add radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). The cell identifier (eg, PCI) or the second base station SCell index or the eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information for identifying the cell / base station. In addition, the radio bearer additional modification information may further include uplink / downlink discrimination information (eg, UpDownIndicator).

UE는 전술한 무선베어러를 추가수정하는데 있어 업링크/다운링크 구분정보에 따라 해당 무선베어러의 업링크(또는 다운링크) 트래픽을 특정 셀 또는 특정 SCell 또는 특정 CC 또는 특정 eNB를 통해 전달할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 다운링크 값으로 세팅된 경우, 해당 무선베어러의 다운링크 트래픽은 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 포함된 셀/기지국을 통해서만 전송되도록 할 수 있다. 다른 예로, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 양방향 값으로 세팅된 경우, 무선베어러의 업링크, 다운링크 트래픽은 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 포함된 셀/기지국을 통해서만 전송되도록 할 수도 있다.In further modifying the above-described radio bearer, the UE may transmit uplink (or downlink) traffic of the radio bearer through a specific cell or a specific SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB according to uplink / downlink classification information. For example, if the uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to a downlink value, the downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted only through the cell / base station included in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). have. As another example, when the uplink / downlink classification information is set to a bidirectional value, the uplink and downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted only through the cell / base station included in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). have.

무선베어러추가수정리스트(drb-ToAddModList)에 포함되는 정보들은 PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국이 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 프로시져를 통해 무선베어러를 추가/수정 및/또는 해제하기 전에 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간 X2 인터페이스를 통한 프로시져를 통해 생성될 수 있다.The information included in the drb-ToAddModList includes X2 between the first base station and the second base station before the first base station operating as a PCell adds / modifies and / or releases the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Can be created through a procedure through an interface.

도 10은 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.10 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 10을 참조하면, 무선자원구성정보는 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 eNB식별자 또는 UE가 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보와 업링크/다운링크 구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 10, radio resource configuration information may be defined in a cell identifier (for example, PCI) or a second base station SCell index or an eNB identifier or a UE in a radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). Index / division information and uplink / downlink division information may be included.

일 예로, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보(예를 들어, UpDownIndicator)는 0~3의 정수값을 통해 업링크, 다운링크, 및/또는 양방향(업링크/다운링크)가 구분될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 만약 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 업링크 값으로 세팅된 경우, 해당 무선 베어러의 업링크 트래픽은 해당 셀 또는 해당 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해서만 전송되도록 할 수 있다. 이 경우 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는 이 경우 다운링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전달 될 수 있다. 즉, 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다.For example, uplink / downlink discrimination information (eg, UpDownIndicator) may be divided into uplink, downlink, and / or bidirectional (uplink / downlink) through an integer value of 0 to 3. For example, if the uplink / downlink discrimination is set to an uplink value, uplink traffic of the radio bearer is transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. You can do that. In this case, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station or a macrocell. Or in this case, the downlink traffic may be delivered through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell associated with the first base station and a cell associated with the second base station.

만약, 전술한 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 다운링크 값으로 세팅된 경우, 해당 무선 베어러의 다운링크 트래픽은 해당 셀 또는 해당 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해서만 전송하도록 할 수 있다. 이 경우 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 업링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 즉, 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. If the above-mentioned uplink / downlink classification information is set to a downlink value, the downlink traffic of the radio bearer is transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. can do. In this case, uplink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or the macrocell. Or, in this case, uplink traffic may be delivered through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell associated with the first base station and a cell associated with the second base station.

만약, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 양방향 값으로 세팅된 경우, 해당 무선 베어러의 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 해당 셀 또는 해당 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해서만 전송하도록 할 수 있다.If the uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to a bidirectional value, the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic of the radio bearer are transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. You can do that.

다른 예로, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보(예를 들어, UpDownIndicator)는 0~1의 정수값 또는 True/False 값을 통해 업링크, 다운링크를 구분하여 트래픽을 전달할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 만약 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 0 또는 True로 세팅되면, 업링크 트래픽을 해당 셀 또는 해당 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해서만 전달되도록 할 수 있다. 이 경우, 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 다운링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전송될 수도 있다. 즉, 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.As another example, uplink / downlink discrimination information (eg, UpDownIndicator) may deliver traffic by classifying uplink and downlink through an integer value of 0 to 1 or a true / false value. For example, if the uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to 0 or True, uplink traffic may be delivered only through the cell or the corresponding second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the corresponding base station or the corresponding base station. In this case, the downlink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell. Or, in this case, the downlink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

만약, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 1 또는 False로 세팅되면, 다운링크 트래픽을 해당 셀 또는 해당 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해서만 전달되도록 할 수 있다. 이 경우, 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 업링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전달될 수도 있다. 즉, 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the uplink / downlink classification information is set to 1 or False, the downlink traffic may be transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. In this case, uplink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell. Or, in this case, uplink traffic may be delivered through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

- SeNB/SCell 무선자원구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB/RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell)에 업링크 셀인덱스, 다운링크 셀인덱스 포함하는 방법. A method of including uplink cell index and downlink cell index in the SeNB / SCell radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell).

PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 제 1 기지국 무선자원구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicated)의 무선베어러추가수정리스트(DRB -ToAddModList) 또는 무선베어러해제리스트(DRB -ToReleaseList)를 이용하여 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국에 대해 무선자원을 구성할 수 있다. 그리고 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 제 2 기지국 무선자원 구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB/ RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell)에 무선베어러추가수정리스트(DRB -ToAddModList)를 추가하거나 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell을 통해 무선베어러를 전달함을 표시하기위한 정보를 추가하여 제 2 기지국 SCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 2 기지국에 대해 무선자원을 구성할 수 있다. A first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell operates as a PCell by using a radio bearer addition modification list (DRB -ToAddModList) or a radio bearer release list (DRB -ToReleaseList) of the first base station Radio Resource Configuration Information (RadioResourceConfigDedicated). Radio resources may be configured for a first base station providing a cell. The first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell adds a radio bearer additional modified list (DRB -ToAddModList) to a second base station radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell) or delivers a radio bearer through a second base station SCell. Radio resource may be configured for a second base station providing a cell that operates as a second base station SCell by adding information for indicating the information.

예를 들어, PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국의 특정 무선베어러를 제 1 기지국 및/또는 제 2 기지국 SCell(또는 서빙셀)로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 2 기지국에 추가하여 구성할 수 있다. For example, a specific radio bearer of a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may be configured in addition to a second base station providing a cell operating as a first base station and / or a second base station SCell (or serving cell). Can be.

이를 위한 일 예로 제 2 기지국 무선자원구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB/RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell)에 무선베어러추가수정리스트(DRB -ToAddModList)를 추가하여 제 1 기지국 및/또는 제 2 기지국에 대해 무선자원을 구성할 수 있다. 무선베어러추가수정리스트(DRB-ToAddModList)는 전술한 바와 동일하게 구성될 수 있다.For example, radio resources may be configured for the first base station and / or the second base station by adding a radio bearer additional modified list (DRB-ToAddModList) to the second base station radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell). The radio bearer addition modification list DRB-ToAddModList may be configured in the same manner as described above.

PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 전달하기 위해, 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI)/다운링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스/다운링크SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자/다운링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크/다운링크 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는, 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 특정 셀 또는 특정 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 특정 CC 또는 특정 eNB를 통해 전달하기 위해 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI)/다운링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스/다운링크SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자/다운링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크/다운링크 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수도 있다. A first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may separate uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and transmit the uplink cell identifier (eg, uplink cell identifier) to the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). , PCI) / downlink cell identifier (e.g. PCI) or uplink SCell index / downlink SCell index or uplink eNB identifier / downlink eNB identifier or for the UE to distinguish the uplink / downlink cell / base station. It may include index / division information. Alternatively, the first base station separates the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and delivers the radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) for delivery through a specific cell or a specific second base station SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB. Uplink cell identifier (eg PCI) / downlink cell identifier (eg PCI) or uplink SCell index / downlink SCell index or uplink eNB identifier / downlink eNB identifier or UE uplink / It may also include index / division information for identifying the downlink cell / base station.

UE가 전술한 무선베어러를 추가수정하는데 있어 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI)/다운링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스/다운링크SCell(또는 PCell)인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자/다운링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크/다운링크 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 수신하면, 해당 무선베어러의 업링크/다운링크 트래픽을 각각 해당 업링크셀/다운링크셀 또는 업링크 SCell/다운링크 SCell 또는 업링크 CC/다운링크 CC 또는 업링크 eNB/다운링크 eNB를 통해 구분하여 전달할 수 있다. Uplink cell identifier (eg PCI) / downlink cell identifier (eg PCI) or uplink SCell index / downlink SCell (or PCell) index or uplink by the UE in further modification of the radio bearer described above. When the link eNB identifier / downlink eNB identifier or the UE receives the index / division information for distinguishing the uplink / downlink cell / base station, the uplink / downlink traffic of the corresponding radio bearer is respectively applied to the corresponding uplink cell / downlink. Cell or uplink SCell / downlink SCell or uplink CC / downlink CC or uplink eNB / downlink eNB can be delivered separately.

만약, UE가 해당 무선베어러를 추가수정하는데 있어 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI)/다운링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스/다운링크SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자/다운링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크/다운링크 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함하지 않은 무선자원구성정보를 수신하면, 해당 무선베어러는 업링크와 다운링크를 구분하지 않고 전달될 수 있다. 즉, 해당 무선베어러는 매크로셀 또는 PCC(Primary Component Carrier) 또는 제 1 기지국을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 해당 무선베어러는 서빙셀 또는 서빙셀 eNB를 통해 전달될 수도 있다. 예를 들어 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the UE further modifies the radio bearer, an uplink cell identifier (eg PCI) / downlink cell identifier (eg PCI) or an uplink SCell index / downlink SCell index or uplink eNB identifier When the downlink eNB identifier or the UE receives radio resource configuration information that does not include an index / division information for distinguishing an uplink / downlink cell / base station, the corresponding radio bearer forwards without distinguishing the uplink and the downlink. Can be. That is, the radio bearer may be delivered through a macro cell, a primary component carrier (PCC), or a first base station. Alternatively, the radio bearer may be delivered through a serving cell or a serving cell eNB. For example, it may be delivered through a cell group associated with the first base station and the second base station or the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

전술한 무선베어러추가수정리스트(drb-ToAddModList)에 포함되는 정보들은 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국이 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 프로시져를 통해 무선베어러를 추가/수정 및/또는 해제하기 전에 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간 X2 인터페이스를 통한 프로시져를 통해 생성될 수 있다. The information included in the above-described radio bearer addition modification list (drb-ToAddModList) may be used before the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell before adding / modifying and / or releasing the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. It may be generated through a procedure through the X2 interface between the second base station.

도 11은 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.11 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 11을 참조하면, 전술한 무선자원구성정보는 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 eNB식별자 또는 UE가 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 11, the above-described radio resource configuration information may be defined in a cell identifier (eg, PCI) or a second base station SCell index or an eNB identifier or a UE in a radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). It may include an index / classification information for.

예를 들어, ENBIndex는 업링크 트래픽을 전송할 특정 기지국 인덱스 값으로 1~5 사이의 정수 값을 가지도록 구성될 수 있다. 다른 예로 ENBIndex는 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성되면 True, 그렇지 않으면(예를 들어 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성되면) False값을 가지도록 구성될 수도 있다. 또 다른 예로 ENBIndex는 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값, 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값, 제 1기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해서 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값을 구분할 수 있도록 구성될 수도 있다.For example, the ENBIndex may be configured to have an integer value between 1 and 5 as a specific base station index value to transmit uplink traffic. As another example, the ENBIndex may be configured to have a value of True if configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the second base station, and False otherwise (eg, configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the first base station). As another example, ENBIndex is a value for distinguishing configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through a second base station, a value for distinguishing configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through a first base station, a first base station and a second base station. It may be configured to identify a value for distinguishing the configuration to transmit the uplink traffic through.

다른 방법으로 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 전달하기 위해, 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽을 분리하여 제 2 기지국 SCell로 구성된 스몰셀로 전달하기 위해, 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는, 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽을 분리하여 특정 셀 또는 특정 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 특정 CC 또는 특정 eNB를 통해 전달하기 위해, 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크셀식별자(e.g. PCI) 또는 업링크 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. Alternatively, the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may separate the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and transmit the uplink cell identifier (DRB-ToAddMod) to the uplink cell identifier (DRB-ToAddMod). For example, PCI) or uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or the UE may include the index / classification information for identifying the cell / base station to carry the uplink traffic. Alternatively, the first base station separates uplink traffic for a specific radio bearer and delivers the uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) to the radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) to deliver the small cell configured with the second base station SCell. Or uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or index / division information for identifying the cell / base station to which the UE will carry uplink traffic. Alternatively, the first base station separates uplink traffic for a specific radio bearer and delivers the uplink to the radio bearer additional modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) for delivery through a specific cell or a specific second base station SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB. The cell identifier (eg PCI) or the uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information for identifying the cell / base station to which the uplink traffic will be delivered.

만약, UE가 무선베어러를 추가수정하는데 있어서 전술한 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 수신하면, 해당 무선베어러의 업링크 트래픽을 전술한 셀 또는 제 2 기지국SCell 또는 SCC 또는 eNB를 통해 구분하여 전달할 수 있다. 그리고 해당 무선베어러의 다운링크 트래픽을 매크로셀 또는 PCC 또는 제 1 기지국을 통해 구분하여 전달할 수도 있다. 또는, 해당 무선베어러의 다운링크 트래픽을 서빙셀 또는 서빙셀 eNB를 통해 구분하여 전달할 수도 있다. 예를 들어 해당 무선베어러의 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the UE further modifies the radio bearer, the aforementioned uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) or uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or cell / base station to which the UE will carry uplink traffic is identified. When receiving the index / division information, the uplink traffic of the corresponding radio bearer may be transmitted through the aforementioned cell or the second base station SCell or SCC or eNB. In addition, downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted through a macro cell, a PCC, or a first base station. Alternatively, downlink traffic of the corresponding radio bearer may be transmitted through a serving cell or a serving cell eNB. For example, the downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted through a cell group associated with the first base station and the second base station or the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

만약, UE가 무선베어러를 추가수정하는데 있어 업링크셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 업링크SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함하지 않은 무선자원구성정보를 수신하면, 해당 무선베어러는 업링크와 다운링크를 구분하지 않고 전달될 수 있다. 즉, 해당 무선베어러는 매크로셀 또는 PCC(Primary Component Carrier) 또는 제 1 기지국을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는 해당 무선베어러는 서빙셀 또는 서빙셀 eNB를 통해 전달될 수도 있다. 예를 들어 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the UE further modifies the radio bearer, an uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) or an uplink SCell index or an uplink eNB identifier or an index / division for identifying a cell / base station to which the UE will carry uplink traffic. When receiving radio resource configuration information that does not include the information, the radio bearer may be transmitted without distinguishing the uplink and the downlink. That is, the radio bearer may be delivered through a macro cell, a primary component carrier (PCC), or a first base station. Alternatively, the radio bearer may be delivered through a serving cell or a serving cell eNB. For example, it may be delivered through a cell group associated with the first base station and the second base station or the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

무선베어러추가수정리스트(drb-ToAddModList)에 포함되는 정보들은 PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국이 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 프로시져를 통해 무선베어러를 추가/수정 그리고/또는 해제하기 전에 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국간 X2 인터페이스를 통한 프로시져를 통해 생성될 수 있다. The information included in the drb-ToAddModList includes X2 between the first base station and the second base station before the first base station operating as a PCell adds / modifies and / or releases the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Can be created through a procedure through an interface.

도 12는 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.12 is a diagram showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 12를 참조하면, 전술한 제 2 기지국 무선자원구성정보는 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 eNB식별자 또는 UE가 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, ENBIndex는 업링크 트래픽을 전송할 특정 기지국 인덱스 값으로 1~5 사이의 정수 값을 가지도록 구성될 수 있다. 다른 예로 ENBIndex는 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성되면 True, 그렇지 않으면(예를 들어 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성되면) False값을 가지도록 구성될 수도 있다. 또 다른 예로 ENBIndex는 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값, 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값, 제 1기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해서 업링크 트래픽을 전송하도록 구성하는 것을 구별하기 위한 값을 구분할 수 있도록 구성될 수도 있다.Referring to FIG. 12, the above-described second base station radio resource configuration information may be included in a cell identifier (for example, PCI) or a second base station SCell index or eNB identifier or a UE in a radio bearer addition modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). It may include index / division information for identifying the base station. For example, the ENBIndex may be configured to have an integer value between 1 and 5 as a specific base station index value to transmit uplink traffic. As another example, the ENBIndex may be configured to have a value of True if configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the second base station, and False otherwise (eg, configured to transmit uplink traffic only through the first base station). As another example, ENBIndex is a value for distinguishing configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through a second base station, a value for distinguishing configuration of transmitting uplink traffic only through a first base station, a first base station and a second base station. It may be configured to identify a value for distinguishing the configuration to transmit the uplink traffic through.

- SeNB/SCell 무선자원구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB/RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell)에 업링크/다운링크 구분정보를 포함하는 방법. A method of including uplink / downlink discrimination information in SeNB / SCell radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell).

PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 제 1 기지국 무선자원구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicated)의 무선베어러추가수정리스트(DRB -ToAddModList) 또는 무선베어러해제리스트(DRB -ToReleaseList)를 이용하여 PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국에 대해 무선자원을 구성할 수 있다. 그리고 PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국은 제 2 기지국 무선자원구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB/RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell)에 무선베어러추가수정리스트(DRB -ToAddModList)를 추가하거나 제 2 기지국 SCell을 통해 무선베어러를 전달함을 표시하기위한 정보를 추가하여 SCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 2 기지국에 대해 무선자원을 구성할 수 있다.A first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell operates as a PCell by using a radio bearer addition modification list (DRB -ToAddModList) or a radio bearer release list (DRB -ToReleaseList) of the first base station Radio Resource Configuration Information (RadioResourceConfigDedicated). Radio resources can be configured for the first base station. The first base station operating as a PCell adds a radio bearer modified list (DRB-ToAddModList) to the second base station radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell) or indicates that a radio bearer is delivered through a second base station SCell. By adding information, a radio resource may be configured for a second base station providing a cell that operates as an SCell.

예를 들어, PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국의 특정 무선베어러를 제 1 기지국 및/또는 제 2 기지국 SCell(또는 서빙셀)로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 2 기지국에 추가하여 구성할 수 있다. For example, a specific radio bearer of a first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell may be configured in addition to a second base station providing a cell operating as a first base station and / or a second base station SCell (or serving cell). Can be.

이에 대한 일 예로 제 2 기지국무선자원구성정보(RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB/RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell)에 무선베어러추가수정리스트(DRB-ToAddModList)를 추가하여 제 1 기지국 및/또는 제 2 기지국에 대해 무선자원을 구성할 수 있다. 무선베어러추가수정리스트(DRB-ToAddModList)는 전술한 방법에서와 동일하게 구성될 수 있다. As an example, radio resources may be configured for the first base station and / or the second base station by adding a radio bearer additional modified list (DRB-ToAddModList) to the second base station radio resource configuration information (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell). The radio bearer addition modification list DRB-ToAddModList may be configured in the same manner as in the above-described method.

PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 전달하기 위해, 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 eNB식별자 또는 UE가 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 특정 셀 또는 특정 SCell 또는 특정 CC 또는 특정 eNB를 통해 전달하기 위해, 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 eNB식별자 또는 UE가 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 무선베어러추가수정정보는 업링크/다운링크 구분정보(예를 들어, UpDownIndicator)를 더 포함할 수도 있다. The first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell is a cell identifier (eg, PCI) in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) to separate and transmit uplink traffic and downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer. Alternatively, the second base station SCell index or eNB identifier or UE may include index / division information for identifying a cell / base station. Alternatively, the first base station separates the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic for a specific radio bearer and delivers the same through a specific cell or a specific SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB, and the cell identifier in the DRB-ToAddMod. (Eg, PCI) or a second base station SCell index or eNB identifier or UE may include index / division information for distinguishing a cell / base station. In addition, the radio bearer additional modification information may further include uplink / downlink discrimination information (eg, UpDownIndicator).

다른 예로, 무선베어러추가수정정보는 제 2 기지국 무선자원구성전용(RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB/RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell) 정보에 포함되는 경우에만 셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 eNB식별자 또는 UE가 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보를 포함할 수도 있다. As another example, the radio bearer modification information may be included in a cell identifier (e.g., PCI) or a second base station SCell index or eNB identifier or a UE only when it is included in the information of the radio resource configuration dedicated (RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSeNB / RadioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell). It may also include index / division information for identifying the base station.

UE는 전술한 무선베어러를 추가수정하는데 있어 업링크/다운링크 구분정보에 따라 해당 무선베어러의 업링크(또는 다운링크) 트래픽을 특정 셀 또는 특정 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 특정 CC 또는 특정 eNB 또는 특정 eNB에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달할 수 있다. In further modifying the above-described radio bearer, the UE transmits uplink (or downlink) traffic of the radio bearer according to uplink / downlink discrimination information to a specific cell or a specific second base station SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB or a specific eNB. Can be delivered through a group of cells associated with.

예를 들어, 만약 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 업링크 값으로 세팅된 경우, 해당 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽은 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 포함된 셀/기지국을 통해서만 전달될 수 있다. 이 경우 해당 무선 베어러에 대한 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 해당 무선베어러에 대한 다운링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전송될 수 있다. 즉, 해당 무선베어러에 대한 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.For example, if the uplink / downlink segmentation information is set to an uplink value, the uplink traffic for that radio bearer will be delivered only through the cell / base station included in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). Can be. In this case, downlink traffic for the radio bearer may be delivered through the first base station or the macrocell. Or, in this case, the downlink traffic for the radio bearer may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic for the radio bearer may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

만약, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 다운링크 값으로 세팅된 경우, 해당 무선 베어러에 대한 다운링크 트래픽은 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 포함된 셀/기지국을 통해서만 전송될 수 있다. 이 경우 해당 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 해당 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전송하도록 할 수 있다. 즉, 해당 무선 베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the uplink / downlink classification information is set to a downlink value, the downlink traffic for the radio bearer may be transmitted only through the cell / base station included in the radio bearer modification information DRB-ToAddMod. In this case, the uplink traffic for the radio bearer may be delivered through the first base station or the macro cell. Or, in this case, the uplink traffic for the radio bearer may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic for the radio bearer may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

만약, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 양방향 값으로 세팅된 경우, 해당 무선 베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽은 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 포함된 셀/기지국을 통해서만 전달 될 수 있다.If the uplink / downlink classification information is set to a bidirectional value, the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic for the corresponding radio bearer will be transmitted only through the cell / base station included in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). Can be.

무선베어러추가수정리스트(drb-ToAddModList)에 포함되는 정보들은 PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국이 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 프로시져를 통해 무선베어러를 추가/수정 및/또는 해제하기 전에 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간 X2 인터페이스를 통한 프로시져를 통해 생성될 수 있다. The information included in the drb-ToAddModList includes X2 between the first base station and the second base station before the first base station operating as a PCell adds / modifies and / or releases the radio bearer through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Can be created through a procedure through an interface.

도 13은 본 발명에 따른 무선자원구성정보의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.13 is a view showing another example of radio resource configuration information according to the present invention.

도 13을 참조하면, 제 2 기지국 무선자원구성정보는 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 셀식별자(예를 들어, PCI) 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 eNB식별자 또는 UE가 셀/기지국을 구별하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보와 업링크/다운링크 구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 13, the second base station radio resource configuration information may be included in a cell identifier (for example, PCI) or a second base station SCell index or an eNB identifier or a UE in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). It may include index / division information and uplink / downlink discrimination information for discriminating.

일 예를 들어, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보(예를 들어, UpDownIndicator)는 0~3의 정수값을 통해 업링크, 다운링크, 및/또는 양방향(업링크/다운링크)를 구분할 수 있다. For example, uplink / downlink discrimination information (eg, UpDownIndicator) may distinguish uplink, downlink, and / or bidirectional (uplink / downlink) through an integer value of 0-3.

만약, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 업링크 값으로 세팅된 경우, 해당 무선 베어러의 업링크 트래픽은 해당 셀 또는 해당 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해서만 전송될 수 있다. 이 경우, 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 다운링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전송될 수도 있다. 즉, 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the uplink / downlink classification information is set to an uplink value, the uplink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell associated with the base station or the base station. In this case, the downlink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell. Or, in this case, the downlink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

만약, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 다운링크 값으로 세팅된 경우, 해당 무선 베어러의 다운링크 트래픽은 해당 셀 또는 해당 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해서만 전송될 수 있다. 이 경우 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 업링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전송될 수도 있다. 즉, 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the uplink / downlink classification information is set to a downlink value, downlink traffic of the radio bearer may be transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. . In this case, uplink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or the macrocell. Or, in this case, uplink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

만약, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 양방향 값으로 세팅된 경우, 해당 무선 베어러의 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽은 해당 셀 또는 해당 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해서만 전송될 수 있다. If the uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to a bidirectional value, the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic of the radio bearer are transmitted only through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. Can be.

다른 예를 들어, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보(e.g. UpDownIndicator)는 0~1의 정수값 또는 True/False 값을 통해 업링크, 다운링크를 구분하여 트래픽을 전달할 수 있다. For another example, the uplink / downlink discrimination information (e.g. UpDownIndicator) may deliver traffic by classifying uplink and downlink through an integer value of 0 to 1 or true / false value.

만약, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 0 또는 True로 세팅되면, 업링크 트래픽을 해당 셀 또는 해당 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달되도록 할 수 있다. 이 경우, 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 다운링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 즉, 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to 0 or True, uplink traffic may be delivered through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. In this case, the downlink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell. Or, in this case, the downlink traffic may be delivered through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

만약, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 1 또는 False로 세팅되면, 다운링크 트래픽을 해당 셀 또는 해당 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 해당 기지국 또는 해당 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달되도록 할 수 있다. 이 경우 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 업링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 즉, 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the uplink / downlink classification information is set to 1 or False, the downlink traffic may be transmitted through the cell or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the base station or the base station. In this case, uplink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or the macrocell. Or, in this case, uplink traffic may be delivered through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

제 2 실시예: 셀 또는 CC 또는 eNB 단위로 상하향 트래픽 전송경로를 분리하는 방법.Second embodiment: A method of separating uplink traffic transmission path by cell, CC, or eNB.

- 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell정보(SeNBSCellToAddMod)에 SCell업링크/다운링크 구분정보를 포함하는 방법. A method for including SCell uplink / downlink classification information in the second base station SCell information (SeNBSCellToAddMod) to be added / modified.

UE가 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국과 RRC Connection을 설정하여 RRC Connected 상태에 있을 때, UE는 비이상적인 백홀을 통해 연결된 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 제 2 기지국 SCell(또는 서빙셀)로 추가할 수 있다.When the UE establishes an RRC connection with a first base station providing a cell that operates as a PCell and is in an RRC Connected state, the UE sets a cell associated with a second base station connected through a non-ideal backhaul to a second base station SCell (or serving cell). Can be added as

PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국이 새로운 제 2 기지국 SCell 후보를 검출한 후 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀들을 제 2 기지국 SCell로 추가하기 위해, 또는 구성된 제 2 기지국 SCell을 수정하기 위해 제 2 기지국 SCell 추가/수정을 결정하면, PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국은 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 프로시져를 통해 제 2 기지국 SCell을 추가/수정한다.After the first base station providing a cell acting as a PCell detects a new second base station SCell candidate, to add cells associated with the second base station to the second base station SCell, or to modify the configured second base station SCell; Upon determining the base station SCell addition / modification, the first base station operating as the PCell adds / modifies the second base station SCell through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure.

만약 UE가 수신한 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 메시지에 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell리스트(SeNBSCellToAddModList)를 포함하면, UE는 제 2 기지국 SCell 추가 또는 수정을 수행한다.If the UE includes a second base station SCell list (SeNBSCellToAddModList) to be added / modified to the received RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, the UE performs addition or modification of the second base station SCell.

PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국은 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 전달하기 위해, 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell 리스트의 추가/수정할 SCell정보(SeNBSCellToAddMod)에 아래과 같은 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는 PCell로 동작하는 제 1 기지국은 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 특정 셀 또는 특정 SCell 또는 특정 CC 또는 특정 eNB를 통해 전달하기 위해, 전술한 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell 리스트의 추가/수정할 SCell정보(SeNBSCellToAddMod)에 아래과 같은 정보를 포함할 수 있다.The first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell includes the following information in the SCell information (SeNBSCellToAddMod) to be added / modified in the second base station SCell list to be added / modified in order to separate and transmit uplink traffic and downlink traffic. Can be. Alternatively, the first base station operating as a PCell may add / modify the above-described second base station SCell list to be added / modified to separate the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic and deliver them through a specific cell or a specific SCell or a specific CC or a specific eNB. SCell information (SeNBSCellToAddMod) may include the following information.

■ 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스(SeNBSCellIndex): UE에 대해 구성된 제 2 기지국 SCells 내에서 하나의 제 2 기지국 SCell을 식별하기 위해 사용되는 인덱스 정보를 포함한다.Second Base Station SCell Index (SeNBSCellIndex): Contains index information used to identify one second base station SCell within second base station SCells configured for the UE.

■ 셀식별자(CellIdentification): 제 2 기지국 SCell의 PCI(Physical Cell Id)와 ARFCN(Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number) 정보를 포함한다.■ Cell Identification (CellIdentification): Includes Physical Cell ID (PCI) and Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) information of the second base station SCell.

■ 무선자원구성공통SCell정보(radioResourceConfigCommonScell): UE가 SCell에서 동작하기 위해 필수적인(essential)정보로 시스템 정보(System information) 내에 공통 무선자원구성정보(예를 들어, 물리계층 파라미터, 랜덤액세스 파라미터)를 포함한다.■ Radio Resource Configuration Common SCell Information (radioResourceConfigCommonScell): The essential information for the UE to operate in the SCell is the common radio resource configuration information (eg, physical layer parameters, random access parameters) in the system information (System information). Include.

■ 무선자원구성전용SCell정보(radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell): SCell에 대해 적용가능한 UE-specific 구성정보(예를 들어, physicalConfigDedicatedSCell, mac-MainConfigSCell)를 포함한다.Radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information (radioResourceConfigDedicatedSCell): Contains UE-specific configuration information applicable to the SCell (for example, physicalConfigDedicatedSCell, mac-MainConfigSCell).

■ 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell의 업링크/다운링크 구분정보(예를 들어, UpDownIndicatorSeNB, UpDownIndicatorSCell): 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell을 통해 전달할 트래픽의 방향(업링크/다운링크)에 대한 구분정보를 포함한다. ■ Uplink / downlink distinguishing information (eg, UpDownIndicatorSeNB, UpDownIndicatorSCell) of the second base station or the second base station SCell: for the direction (uplink / downlink) of traffic to be transmitted through the second base station or the second base station SCell. Contains identifying information.

단말이 제 2 기지국 SCell을 기존 PCell에 연계된 기지국의 SCell과 구분할 수 있도록 추가할 셀정보(셀추가수정정보)는 제 2 기지국 구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell 인덱스 값을 기존 PCell에 연계된 기지국의 SCell인덱스 값과 다르게 설정하여 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀임을 구분하도록 할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 기존 PCell에 연계된 기지국의 SCell인덱스로 사용하는 값이 아닌 다른 값을 사용하도록 하기 위해 현재 1에서 7까지의 정수 값을 가질 수 있는 SCell 인덱스를 1~14까지의 정수 값을 가질 수 있도록 할 수 있다. 1에서7까지의 정수값은 PCell에 연계된 기지국의 SCell들을 위한 인덱스로, 8~14는 제 2 기지국을 위한 인덱스로 사용할 수 있다. 또는, PCell에 연계된 기지국의 SCell인덱스와 제 2 기지국의 SCell인덱스를 구분할 수 있도록 SCell인덱스 및 제 2 기지국을 통한 SCell임을 나타내는 표시정보 필드를 함께 전송하도록 할 수 있다.The cell information (cell addition modification information) to be added so that the terminal can distinguish the second base station SCell from the base station SCell linked to the existing PCell may include the second base station identification information. Alternatively, the second base station SCell index value may be set differently from the SCell index value of the base station linked to the existing PCell to distinguish the cell associated with the second base station. For example, in order to use a value other than the value used as the SCell index of the base station linked to the existing PCell, the SCell index, which can have an integer value from 1 to 7, currently has an integer value from 1 to 14 You can do that. An integer value of 1 to 7 may be used as an index for SCells of a base station linked to a PCell, and 8 to 14 may be used as an index for a second base station. Alternatively, in order to distinguish between the SCell index of the base station linked to the PCell and the SCell index of the second base station, the SCell index and the indication information field indicating that the SCell through the second base station may be transmitted together.

UE는 전술한 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell 정보에 포함된 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스가 현재 UE 구성(current UE configuration) 파트가 아닌 경우, 수신된 무선자원구성공통SCell정보와 무선자원구성전용SCell정보에 따라 셀식별자에 상응하는 제 2 기지국 SCell을 추가한다. 즉, 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스가 UE에게 구성된 제 2 기지국 SCell이 아닌 경우, 수신된 무선자원구성공통SCell정보와 무선자원구성전용SCell정보에 따라 셀 식별자에 상응하는 제 2 기지국 SCell을 추가한다.If the second base station SCell index included in the above-described second base station SCell information to be added / modified is not a current UE configuration part, the UE is included in the received radio resource configuration common SCell information and the radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information. Accordingly, the second base station SCell corresponding to the cell identifier is added. That is, when the second base station SCell index is not the second base station SCell configured for the UE, the second base station SCell corresponding to the cell identifier is added according to the received radio resource configuration common SCell information and radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information.

UE는 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell 정보에 포함된 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스가 현재 UE구성(current UE configuration) 파트인 경우 수신된 무선자원구성전용SCell정보에 따라 제 2 기지국 SCell을 수정한다. 즉, 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스가 UE에게 구성된 제 2 기지국 SCell인 경우, 수신된 무선자원구성전용SCell정보에 따라 제 2 기지국 SCell을 수정한다The UE modifies the second base station SCell according to the received radio resource configuration-specific SCell information when the second base station SCell index included in the second base station SCell information to be added / modified is a current UE configuration part. That is, when the second base station SCell index is the second base station SCell configured for the UE, the second base station SCell is modified according to the received radio resource configuration dedicated SCell information.

전술한 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell 정보에 포함되는 정보들은 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국이 RRC Connection Reconfiguration 프로시져를 통해 제 2 기지국 SCell을 추가/수정하기 전에 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간 X2 인터페이스를 통해 조회(interrogation)해 올 수 있다. 또는 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell 정보에 포함되는 정보들은 PCell로 동작하는 셀을 제공하는 제 1 기지국에 사전 구성되거나, 사전에 OAM(Operations, Administration and Maintenance)을 통해 저장되거나 또는 이전의 제 2 기지국 SCell 추가/수정 절차에서 저장되어 이용될 수도 있다.The information included in the above-described second base station SCell information to be added / modified is the first base station and the second base station before the first base station providing the cell operating as the PCell adds / modifies the second base station SCell through the RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. Interrogation can be made through the X2 interface. Alternatively, the information included in the second base station SCell information to be added / modified is pre-configured in the first base station providing a cell operating as a PCell, stored in advance through operations, administration and maintenance (OAM), or a previous second base station. It may be stored and used in the SCell add / modify procedure.

이상에서 설명한 제 2 기지국 SCell 정보는 도 14와 같이 구성될 수 있다.The second base station SCell information described above may be configured as shown in FIG. 14.

도 14는 본 발명에 따른 SeNBSCellToAddMod의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.14 is a diagram illustrating an example of SeNBSCellToAddMod according to the present invention.

도 14를 참조하면, 전술한 추가/수정할 제 2 기지국 SCell정보(SeNBSCellToAddMod)는 SCell 업링크/다운링크 구분정보를 포함하여 구성될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 14, the above-described second base station SCell information (SeNBSCellToAddMod) to be added / modified may be configured to include SCell uplink / downlink classification information.

일 예를 들어, 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell의 업링크/다운링크 구분정보(예를 들어, UpDownIndicatorSeNB 또는 UpDownIndicatorSCell)는 0~3의 정수값을 통해 업링크, 다운링크, 그리고/또는 양방향(업링크/다운링크)을 구분할 수 있다. For example, uplink / downlink discrimination information (eg, UpDownIndicatorSeNB or UpDownIndicatorSCell) of the second base station or the second base station SCell may be uplink, downlink, and / or bidirectional (through an integer value of 0 to 3). Uplink / downlink).

만약, 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell의 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 업링크 값으로 세팅된 경우, 모든 사용자 플레인 데이터의 업링크 트래픽은 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해서만 전송될 수 있다. 이 경우 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 다운링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전송될 수 있다. 즉, 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the uplink / downlink discrimination information of the second base station or the second base station SCell is set to an uplink value, the uplink traffic of all user plane data is associated with the second base station or the second base station SCell or the second base station. It can only be transmitted through cell groups. In this case, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station or a macrocell. Or, in this case, the downlink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell associated with the first base station and a cell associated with the second base station.

만약, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 다운링크 값으로 세팅된 경우, 모든 사용자 플레인 데이터의 다운링크 트래픽은 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해서만 전송될 수 있다. 이 경우, 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 업링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전송될 수도 있다. 즉, 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to a downlink value, downlink traffic of all user plane data may be transmitted only through the second base station or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the second base station. In this case, uplink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell. Or, in this case, uplink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

만약, 업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 양방향 값으로 세팅된 경우, 모든 사용자 플레인 데이터의 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해서만 전송되도록 할 수 있다. If the uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to a bidirectional value, the uplink traffic and the downlink traffic of all user plane data may be transmitted only through the second base station or the second base station SCell or the cell group associated with the second base station. can do.

다른 예를 들면, 전술한 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell업링크/다운링크 구분정보(예를 들어, UpDownIndicatorSeNB 또는 UpDownIndicatorSCell)는 0~1의 정수값 또는 True/False 값을 통해 업링크, 다운링크를 구분하여 트래픽이 전달되도록 할 수 있다. For another example, the above-described second base station or second base station SCell uplink / downlink discrimination information (eg, UpDownIndicatorSeNB or UpDownIndicatorSCell) may be uplink or downlink through an integer value of 0 to 1 or a True / False value. To separate traffic.

만약, 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 0 또는 True로 세팅되면, 업링크 트래픽을 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달되도록 할 수 있다. 이 경우, 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 다운링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전송될 수 있다. 즉, 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the second base station or the second base station SCell uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to 0 or True, uplink traffic may be delivered through the cell group associated with the second base station or the second base station SCell or the second base station. Can be. In this case, the downlink traffic may be delivered through the first base station or macrocell. Or, in this case, the downlink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, downlink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

만약, 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell업링크/다운링크 구분정보가 1 또는 False로 세팅되면, 다운링크 트래픽을 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국 SCell 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달되도록 할 수 있다. 이 경우 업링크 트래픽은 매크로셀 기지국 또는 매크로셀을 통해 전달될 수 있다. 또는, 이 경우 업링크 트래픽은 서빙셀 기지국 또는 서빙셀을 통해 전송될 수 있다. 즉, 업링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국, 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹과 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 전달될 수 있다.If the second base station or second base station SCell uplink / downlink discrimination information is set to 1 or False, downlink traffic may be delivered through a cell group associated with the second base station or the second base station SCell or the second base station. Can be. In this case, uplink traffic may be delivered through a macrocell base station or a macrocell. Or, in this case, uplink traffic may be transmitted through the serving cell base station or the serving cell. That is, uplink traffic may be delivered through a first base station and a second base station, or through a cell group associated with the first base station and a cell group associated with the second base station.

이상에서는 본 발명의 각 실시예에 따른 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽의 송수신 경로를 분리하여 전달하기 위한 무선자원구성정보 및 제 2 기지국 SCell 추가/수정 절차에 대해서 설명하였다.In the above, radio resource configuration information and a second base station SCell addition / modification procedure for separating and transmitting uplink and downlink traffic transmission / reception paths according to embodiments of the present invention have been described.

이하에서는, 본 발명의 사용자 플래인 데이터 트래픽을 전송하는데 있어서 업링크 트래픽 경로와 다운링크 트래픽 경로를 분리하여 전달하기 위한 네트워크 구조, RRC Reconfiguration 메시지를 통한 RLC 구성 정보 설정, 및 논리채널 우선순위 프로시져에 대한 각 실시예를 도면을 참조하여 설명한다.Hereinafter, a network structure for separating and forwarding an uplink traffic path and a downlink traffic path in transmitting user plane data traffic of the present invention, setting RLC configuration information through an RRC reconfiguration message, and a logical channel priority procedure Each embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings.

도 15는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 마스터 기지국과 세컨더리 기지국의 계층 2 구조를 도시한 도면이다15 is a diagram illustrating a layer 2 structure of a master base station and a secondary base station according to an embodiment of the present invention;

도 15는 업링크 트래픽 경로와 다운링크 트래픽 경로를 분리하여 전달하기 위한 제 1 기지국(매크로셀 eNB)과 제 2 기지국(스몰셀 eNB)의 Layer2 프로토콜 구조를 예시한 것이다. FIG. 15 illustrates a Layer2 protocol structure of a first base station (macrocell eNB) and a second base station (small cell eNB) for separately transmitting an uplink traffic path and a downlink traffic path.

도 15를 참조하면, 하나의 데이터무선베어러(DRB)에 대해 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국을 통해 전달되고, 업링크 데이터 트래픽은 제 2 기지국을 통해 전달된다. 복수의 DRB를 처리할 때도 도 15의 구성과 유사하게 적용될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 15, downlink traffic is transmitted through a first base station and uplink data traffic is transmitted through a second base station for one data radio bearer (DRB). When processing a plurality of DRBs can be applied similarly to the configuration of FIG.

구체적으로 살펴보면, 제 1 기지국은 PDCP 계층에서 하나의 DRB에 대해 하나의 PDCP 개체를 생성한다. 세그멘테이션과 ARQ(Automatic Repeat reQeuest) 등을 수행하는 RLC(Radio Link Control) 계층에서 하나의 DRB에 대해 다운링크 트래픽을 처리하기 위한 RLC 개체와 업링크 트래픽을 처리하기 위한 RLC 개체가 분리될 수 있다. 즉, AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위해, 제 1 기지국은 다운링크 데이터에 대한 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위한 개체(또는 제 1 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체)를 가질 수 있다. 제 2 기지국은 업링크 데이터에 대한 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위한 개체(또는 제 2 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체)를 가질 수 있다. Specifically, the first base station generates one PDCP entity for one DRB in the PDCP layer. An RLC entity for processing downlink traffic and one RLC entity for processing uplink traffic may be separated from a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer that performs segmentation and ARQ (Automatic Repeat ReQeuest). That is, for the Acknowledgment Mode (AM) RLC processing, the first base station may have an entity (or an entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station) for the Acknowledgment Mode (AM) RLC processing for the downlink data. The second base station may have an entity (or entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station) for AM (Acknowledged Mode) RLC processing on the uplink data.

전술한 다운링크 데이터에 대한 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위한 개체(또는 제 1 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체)와 업링크 데이터에 대한 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위한 개체(또는 제 2 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체)는 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간의 백홀을 통해 ARQ(Automatic Repeat reQeuest) 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 다운링크 트래픽에 대한 DL AM RLC 개체(또는 제 1 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체)는 UL AM RLC 개체(또는 제 2 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체)를 통해 수신한 피드백(일 예로, RLC status report)을 기반으로 재전송을 수행할 수 있다. 즉, AM RLC 개체는 RLC PDUs의 positive 및/또는 negative acknowledgements를 제공하기 위해 그 피어(peer) AM RLC 개체로 상태리포트를 보낼 수 있다. 다시 말해서, UE의 다운링크 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위한 개체(또는 제 1 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체에 피어링된 단말내 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체)는 제 1 기지국을 통해 수신된 다운링크 RLC PDUs의 positive 및/또는 negative acknowledgements를 제 2 기지국을 통해서 전송한다. 도 15에 도시된 바와 같이 UE의 다운링크 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위한 개체 는 제 2 기지국을 통해 제 1 기지국 내의 다운링크 트래픽에 대한 DL AM RLC 개체(또는 제 1 기지국 내의 AM RLC 개체)로 상태 리포트를 보낼 수 있다.Entity (or entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station) and the entity for AM (Acknowledged Mode) RLC processing for uplink data described above The entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station may perform an Automatic Repeat ReQeuest (ARQ) operation through a backhaul between the first base station and the second base station. For example, a DL AM RLC entity (or entity for AM RLC processing in a first base station) for downlink traffic may be received via a UL AM RLC entity (or entity for AM RLC processing in a second base station). Retransmission may be performed based on the feedback (eg, RLC status report). That is, the AM RLC entity may send a status report to its peer AM RLC entity to provide positive and / or negative acknowledgments of the RLC PDUs. In other words, an entity for downlink Acknowledgment Mode (AM) RLC processing of the UE (or an entity for in-terminal AM RLC processing peered to an entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station) is received through the first base station. Transmit positive and / or negative acknowledgments of downlink RLC PDUs through the second base station. As shown in FIG. 15, the entity for downlink Acknowledgment Mode (AM) RLC processing of the UE is a DL AM RLC entity (or an AM RLC entity in the first base station) for downlink traffic in the first base station through the second base station. You can send a status report to.

제 1 기지국은 다운링크 트래픽과 관련 제어정보(일 예로, L1 제어정보)를 전달하기 위해 하나 이상의 HARQ(Hybrid automatic repeat request) 개체를 가질 수 있다. 제 2 기지국은 업링크 트래픽과 관련 제어정보(일 예로, L1 제어정보)을 전달하기 위해 하나 이상의 HARQ(Hybrid automatic repeat request) 개체를 가질 수 있다.The first base station may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to deliver downlink traffic and related control information (eg, L1 control information). The second base station may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to deliver uplink traffic and related control information (eg, L1 control information).

도 16은 본 발명의 다른 실시예에 따른 마스터 기지국과 세컨더리 기지국의 계층 2 구조를 도시한 도면이다.16 is a diagram illustrating a layer 2 structure of a master base station and a secondary base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 16은 본 발명에 따른 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 전달하기 위한 제 1 기지국(매크로셀 eNB)과 제 2 기지국(스몰셀 eNB)의 Layer 2 프로토콜 구조의 다른 예를 나타낸다. 16 shows another example of a Layer 2 protocol structure of a first base station (macrocell eNB) and a second base station (small cell eNB) for separately transmitting uplink traffic and downlink traffic according to the present invention.

도 16을 참조하면, 하나의 데이터무선베어러(DRB)에 대한 다운링크 트래픽은 제 1 기지국(매크로셀 eNB) 및 제 2 기지국(스몰셀 eNB)을 통해 전달되고 업링크 데이터 트래픽은 제 2 기지국을 통해 전달된다. 복수의 DRB를 처리할 때도 도 16의 구성이 유사하게 적용될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 16, downlink traffic for one data radio bearer (DRB) is delivered through a first base station (macrocell eNB) and a second base station (small cell eNB), and uplink data traffic is transmitted to the second base station. Is passed through. 16 may be similarly applied to processing a plurality of DRBs.

구체적으로 설명하면, 제 1 기지국은 PDCP 계층에서 하나의 DRB에 대해 하나의 PDCP 개체를 생성한다. 세그멘테이션과 ARQ(Automatic Repeat reQeuest) 등을 수행하는 RLC(Radio Link Control) 계층에서 하나의 DRB에 대해 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위해, 제 1 기지국은 다운링크 트래픽에 대한 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위한 개체(또는 제 1 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체)를 가질 수 있다. 제 2 기지국은 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽에 대한 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위한 개체(또는 제 2 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체)를 가질 수 있다. Specifically, the first base station generates one PDCP entity for one DRB in the PDCP layer. In order to process an acknowledgment mode (AM) RLC for one DRB in a radio link control (RLC) layer that performs segmentation and automatic repeat reQeuest (ARQ), the first base station performs an acknowledgment mode (AM) RLC for downlink traffic. It may have an entity for processing (or an entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station). The second base station may have an entity (or entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station) for AM (Acknowledged Mode) RLC processing for uplink traffic and downlink traffic.

제 1 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체 와 제 2 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체는 각각 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀, 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 ARQ(Automatic Repeat reQeuest) 동작(operation)을 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들어 제 1 기지국에 구성된 제 1 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체는 매크로셀 또는 제 1 기지국 또는 PCC 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 다운링크 사용자 플레인 데이터 트래픽에 대한 RLC PDU를 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 제 1 기지국에 구성된 제 1 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체는 매크로셀 또는 제 1 기지국 또는 PCC 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 수신되는 다운링크 트래픽에 대한 RLC receiver의 피드백(일 예로, RLC status report)을 기반으로 재전송을 수행할 수 있다. 제 2 기지국에 구성된 제 2 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체는 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 SCC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 업링크, 다운링크 사용자 플레인 데이터 트래픽에 대한 RLC PDU를 송수신한다. 또한, 제 2 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체는 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 SCC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 수신되는 업링크 트래픽에 대한 RLC receiver의 피드백(일 예로, RLC status report)을 UE로 송신 할 수 있다. 또한, 제 2 기지국내의 AM RLC 처리를 위한 개체는 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 SCC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 송신되는 다운링크 트래픽에 대한 RLC receiver의 피드백(일 예로, RLC status report)을 통해 RLC 재전송을 수행할 수 있다.The entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station and the entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station are each operated by Automatic Repeat ReQeuest (ARQ) through a cell associated with the first base station and a cell associated with the second base station. Can be performed. For example, an entity for AM RLC processing in a first base station configured in a first base station sends an RLC PDU for downlink user plane data traffic through a macrocell or a group of cells associated with the first base station or PCC or the first base station. Can be. In addition, the entity for AM RLC processing in the first base station configured in the first base station is the feedback of the RLC receiver for downlink traffic received through the macrocell or the first base station or a cell group associated with the PCC or the first base station (one For example, retransmission may be performed based on an RLC status report. The entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station configured in the second base station transmits and receives RLC PDUs for uplink and downlink user plane data traffic through the small cell or the cell associated with the second base station or the SCC or the second base station. . In addition, the entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station is the feedback of the RLC receiver for uplink traffic received through the small cell or the second base station or the cell associated with the SCC or the second base station (eg, RLC status report) Can be sent to the UE. In addition, the entity for AM RLC processing in the second base station is the feedback of the RLC receiver for downlink traffic transmitted through the small cell or the second base station or the cell associated with the SCC or the second base station (eg, RLC status report) Through RLC retransmission can be performed.

제 1 기지국은 다운링크 트래픽과 관련 피드백(및/또는 제어정보) 등을 전달하기 위해 하나 이상의 HARQ(Hybrid automatic repeat request) 개체를 가질 수 있다. 제 2 기지국은 업링크, 다운링크 트래픽과 관련 피드백(및/또는 제어정보)을 전달하기 위해 하나 이상의 HARQ(Hybrid automatic repeat request) 개체를 가질 수 있다.The first base station may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to deliver downlink traffic and related feedback (and / or control information). The second base station may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to convey uplink and downlink traffic and associated feedback (and / or control information).

도 17은 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말의 계층 2 구조를 도시한 도면이다. 17 is a diagram illustrating a layer 2 structure of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 17을 참조하면, 단말은 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽을 분리하여 전달하기 위한 Layer2 프로토콜 구조를 가질 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 17, the terminal may have a Layer2 protocol structure for separately transmitting uplink traffic and downlink traffic.

구체적으로 설명하면, 하나의 데이터무선베어러(DRB)에 대해 PDCP 계층에서 하나의 PDCP 개체를 생성한다. 단말은 하나의 데이터무선베어러(DRB)에 대해 RLC(Radio Link Control) 계층에서 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위해, 매크로셀 또는 제 1 기지국(매크로셀 eNB) 또는 PCC 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 다운링크 트래픽의 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위한 개체(MeNB AM RLC 개체에 피어링되는 개체)와 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국(스몰셀 eNB) 또는 SCC를 통해 업링크, 다운링크 트래픽의 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위한 개체(SeNB AM RLC 개체에 피어링되는 개체)를 가질 수 있다.Specifically, one PDCP entity is created in the PDCP layer for one data radio bearer (DRB). The terminal is a cell associated with a macrocell or a first base station (macrocell eNB) or a PCC or a first base station for processing an acknowledgment mode (AM) RLC in a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer for one data radio bearer (DRB). Group for uplink and downlink traffic through the small cell or second base station (small cell eNB) or SCC and the entity for the Acknowledgment Mode (AM) RLC processing of downlink traffic through the group (the entity peered to the MeNB AM RLC entity). It may have an entity for an AM (Acknowledged Mode) RLC processing (an entity peered to a SeNB AM RLC entity).

매크로셀 또는 제 1 기지국 또는 PCC 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 다운링크 트래픽을 처리하기 위한 AM RLC 개체은 매크로셀 또는 제 1 기지국 또는 PCC 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 다운링크 RLC PDU를 수신하고, 매크로셀 또는 제 1 기지국 또는 PCC 또는 제 1 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통한 다운링크 트래픽에 대한 RLC receiver의 피드백(일 예로, RLC status report)을 제 1 기지국으로 전송할 수 있다. 제 1 기지국은 다운링크 트래픽에 대한 RLC receiver의 피드백을 기반으로 RLC 재전송을 수행할 수 있다. AM RLC entity for processing downlink traffic through a macrocell or a cell associated with a first base station or PCC or a first base station receives a downlink RLC PDU through a macrocell or cell associated with a first base station or PCC or a first base station In addition, a feedback (eg, an RLC status report) of an RLC receiver for downlink traffic through a macro cell or a cell group associated with the first base station or the PCC or the first base station may be transmitted to the first base station. The first base station may perform RLC retransmission based on the feedback of the RLC receiver for downlink traffic.

스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 SCC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 업링크, 다운링크 트래픽을 처리하기 위한 AM RLC 개체는 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 SCC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해 업링크, 다운링크 RLC PDU를 송수신할 수 있다. 단말은 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 SCC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 송신되는 업링크 사용자 플레인 데이터 트래픽에 대한 RLC receiver의 피드백(일 예로, RLC status report)을 기반으로 RLC 재전송을 수행할 수 있다.The AM RLC entity for processing uplink, downlink traffic through a small cell or a cell associated with a second base station or an SCC or a second base station is uplinked through a cell associated with the small cell or the second base station or an SCC or a second base station. The UE may transmit and receive downlink RLC PDUs. The UE may perform RLC retransmission based on feedback of an RLC receiver (eg, an RLC status report) to uplink user plane data traffic transmitted through a small cell or a second base station or a cell group associated with an SCC or a second base station. Can be.

UE의 MAC 계층에서는 제 2 기지국 SCell로 구성된 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀의 CC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 논리 채널들(logical channels)을 제 2 기지국 SCell로 구성된 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀의 CC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통한 트랜스포트 채널(일 예로, Uplink Shared Channel, UL-SCH)로 매핑할 수 있다. UE는 다운링크 트래픽과 관련 피드백(및/또는 제어정보) 등을 전달하기 위해 하나 이상의 HARQ(Hybrid automatic repeat request) 개체를 가질 수 있다. UE는 업링크 트래픽과 관련 피드백(및/또는 제어정보)을 전달하기 위해 하나 이상의 HARQ(Hybrid automatic repeat request) 개체를 가질 수 있다.In the MAC layer of the UE, logical channels for carrying uplink traffic through a small cell configured with a second base station SCell or a cell group associated with a second base station or a CC or a second base station of the small cell are transferred to the second base station SCell. It may be mapped to a transport channel (eg, an uplink shared channel, UL-SCH) through a configured small cell or a second base station or a cell group associated with a CC or a second base station of the small cell. The UE may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to convey downlink traffic and related feedback (and / or control information). The UE may have one or more Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) entities to convey uplink traffic and related feedback (and / or control information).

상기한 도 16, 도 17에서, 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송하는 것에 대해 설명하였지만, 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 업링크 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송하는 것도 본 발명의 범주에서 동일하게 적용될 수 있다. In FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the uplink user plane data is transmitted only through the second base station. However, the transmission of uplink user plane data only through the first base station may be equally applied in the scope of the present invention. have.

이상에서 설명한 바와 같이 단말은 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 피어링되는 RLC 개체를 각각 구성할 수 있다. 또한, 단말은 제 1 기지국의 RLC 개체에 피어링되어 구성되는 RLC 개체를 통해서 다운링크 트래픽을 수신할 수 있고, 제 2 기지국의 RLC 개체에 피어링되어 구성되는 RLC 개체를 통해서 업링크 트래픽을 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 다른 예로 단말은 제 1 기지국의 RLC 개체에 피어링되어 구성되는 RLC 개체 및 제 2 기지국의 RLC 개체에 피어링되어 구성되는 RLC 개체를 통해서 다운링크 트래픽을 수신할 수 있다. 다만, 업링크 트래픽은 제 2 기지국의 RLC 개체에 피어링되어 구성되는 RLC개체를 통해서만 처리할 수 있다.As described above, the UE may configure an RLC entity peered with the first base station and the second base station, respectively. In addition, the UE may receive downlink traffic through the RLC entity peered to the RLC entity of the first base station and transmit uplink traffic through the RLC entity peered to the RLC entity of the second base station. . In another example, the UE may receive downlink traffic through an RLC entity peered to the RLC entity of the first base station and an RLC entity peered to the RLC entity of the second base station. However, the uplink traffic can be processed only through the RLC entity configured to be peered to the RLC entity of the second base station.

앞서 설명한 바와 같이 하나의 데이터무선베어러(DRB)에 대해 RLC(Radio Link Control) 계층에서 AM(Acknowledged Mode) RLC 처리를 위해, 제 1 기지국을 통해 다운링크 트래픽을 처리하기 위한 RLC 개체와 제 2 기지국을 통해 업링크 트래픽(또는 업링크 트래픽과 다운링크 트래픽)을 처리하기 위한 RLC 개체가 분리될 때, 본 발명의 제 1 기지국은 RRC Reconfiguration 메시지의 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 이를 구분하기 위한 정보(일 예로, 피드백 AM-RLC정보 또는 업링크다운링크 구분 표시정보 또는 업링크 셀/기지국 인덱스/구분정보)를 포함할 수 있다.As described above, an RLC entity and a second base station for processing downlink traffic through a first base station for an acknowledgment mode (AM) RLC processing in a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer for one data radio bearer (DRB) When the RLC entity for processing uplink traffic (or uplink traffic and downlink traffic) is separated through the first base station, the first base station of the present invention divides it into radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) of the RRC reconfiguration message. Information (for example, feedback AM-RLC information or uplink downlink division indication information or uplink cell / base station index / division information) may be included.

이하에서는, 상위계층 시그널링(일 예로, RRC Reconfiguration) 메시지의 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 이를 구분하기 위한 정보가 포함되는 경우의 각 실시예를 도면을 참조하여 설명한다.Hereinafter, each embodiment of the case in which the information for distinguishing this from the radio bearer addition modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) of the higher layer signaling (eg, RRC reconfiguration) message will be described with reference to the drawings.

도 18은 본 발명에 따른 AM RLC에 대한 RLC-Config의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.18 illustrates an example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.

도 18을 참조하면, RRC Reconfiguration 메시지는 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 포함되는 AM RLC에 대한 RLC-Config 정보에 전술한 구분정보를 포함할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 18, the RRC reconfiguration message may include the above-described classification information in the RLC-Config information for the AM RLC included in the radio bearer addition modification information (DRB-ToAddMod).

예를 들어, 전술한 ul-AM-RLC-SeNB는 제 2 기지국을 통해 업링크 트래픽을 처리하는 RLC 개체를 위한 구성정보를 포함할 수 있다. dl-AM-RLC-SeNB는 제 2 기지국을 통해 다운링크 트래픽을 처리하는 RLC 개체를 위한 구성정보를 포함할 수 있다.For example, the aforementioned ul-AM-RLC-SeNB may include configuration information for an RLC entity that processes uplink traffic through a second base station. The dl-AM-RLC-SeNB may include configuration information for an RLC entity that processes downlink traffic through the second base station.

ul-AM-RLC-MeNB-Feedback은 제 1 기지국을 통해 RLC feedback을 업링크로 송신하기 위한 RLC 개체를 위한 구성정보를 포함할 수 있다. dl-AM-RLC-MeNB는 제 1 기지국을 통해 다운링크 트래픽을 처리하는 RLC 개체를 위한 구성정보를 포함할 수 있다.The ul-AM-RLC-MeNB-Feedback may include configuration information for an RLC entity for transmitting RLC feedback on the uplink through a first base station. The dl-AM-RLC-MeNB may include configuration information for an RLC entity that processes downlink traffic through the first base station.

도 19는 본 발명에 따른 AM RLC에 대한 RLC-Config의 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.19 shows another example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.

도 19를 참조하면, RRC Reconfiguration 메시지는 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 AM RLC에 대한 RLC-Config 정보를 포함할 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 19, the RRC reconfiguration message may include RLC-Config information for AM RLC in radio bearer addition modification information (DRB-ToAddMod).

예를 들어, 전술한 up-down-split-indicator 정보는 각각 업링크 다운링크 분리를 나타내는 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 즉, 기존 RLC 개체에 각 기지국에 구성되는 RLC 개체에 피어링되어 RLC 데이터 또는 피드백 정보를 처리하기 위해 필요한 RLC 개체가 추가로 구성되어야 함을 나타낸다. For example, the above-described up-down-split-indicator information may include information indicating uplink downlink separation, respectively. That is, it indicates that an RLC entity necessary for processing an RLC data or feedback information, which is peered to an RLC entity configured in each base station to an existing RLC entity, must be additionally configured.

도 20은 본 발명에 따른 AM RLC에 대한 RLC-Config의 또 다른 예를 도시한 도면이다.20 shows another example of RLC-Config for AM RLC according to the present invention.

도 20을 참조하면, RRC Reconfiguration 메시지는 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 업링크 데이터를 전송할 셀/기지국을 구성하기 위해 업링크 셀식별자(일 예로, PCI) 또는 업링크 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 셀/기지국을 구분하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보 또는 업링크/다운링크 구분정보 등을 포함할 수 있다. 전술한 구분정보 등이 포함되는 경우 AM RLC에 대한 RLC-Config 정보는 3GPP Rel-11 이전의 정보를 이용하여 단말이 이에 따른 RLC 개체를 추가로 구성하도록 할 수 있다. 예를 들어 동일한 DRB-ID를 가지는 무선베어러에 대해 제 1 기지국 무선자원 구성정보(또는 이에 포함되는 무선베어러 정보)에 제 1 기지국 RLC-Config와 함께 제 2 기지국 무선자원 구성정보(또는 이에 포함되는 무선 베어러 정보)에 제 2 기지국 RLC-Config를 포함할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 20, an RRC reconfiguration message indicates an uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) or an uplink second base station SCell for configuring a cell / base station to transmit uplink data to radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod). The index or uplink eNB identifier or the UE may include index / division information or uplink / downlink discrimination information for identifying an uplink cell / base station. When the above-described classification information is included, the RLC-Config information for the AM RLC may allow the UE to additionally configure an RLC entity according to the information before 3GPP Rel-11. For example, for a radio bearer having the same DRB-ID, the first base station radio resource configuration information (or radio bearer information included therein) is included in the first base station radio resource configuration information (or included therein) together with the first base station RLC-Config. Radio bearer information) may include a second base station RLC-Config.

다른 예로, RRC Reconfiguration 메시지의 무선베어러추가수정정보(DRB-ToAddMod)에 위에서 설명한 업링크 셀식별자(일 예로, PCI) 또는 업링크 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 셀/기지국을 구분하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보 또는 업링크/다운링크 구분정보 등이 포함되는 경우, 해당 무선베어러에 대한 PDCP 개체는 업링크 셀식별자(일 예로, PCI) 또는 업링크 제 2 기지국 SCell인덱스 또는 업링크eNB식별자 또는 UE가 업링크 셀/기지국을 구분하기 위한 인덱스/구분정보 또는 업링크/다운링크 구분정보를 통해 설정된 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국) 또는 해당 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)에 연관된 셀에 구성된 AM RLC 개체에 피어링된 단말 내 AM RLC 개체로 PDCP PDU를 전달하도록 할 수 있다. 이를 통해 단말은 해당 무선베어러에 대한 업링크 트래픽을 제 2 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀을 통해서만 전달하도록 할 수 있다.In another example, the uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) or uplink second base station SCell index or uplink eNB identifier or UE described in the radio bearer modification information (DRB-ToAddMod) of the RRC reconfiguration message may be assigned to an uplink cell / When the index / division information or uplink / downlink identification information for identifying a base station is included, the PDCP entity for the radio bearer may be an uplink cell identifier (eg, PCI) or an uplink second base station SCell index or A base station (e.g., a second base station) or a corresponding base station (e.g., a second base station) configured by an uplink eNB identifier or a UE through an index / division information or uplink / downlink identification for identifying an uplink cell / base station The PDCP PDU can be delivered to the AM RLC entity in the UE peered to the AM RLC entity configured in the cell associated with the C-P. In this manner, the terminal may transmit the uplink traffic for the corresponding radio bearer only through the second base station or a cell associated with the second base station.

다시 말해서, 단말의 PDCP 개체는 전술한 인덱스, 식별자 및 구분정보 중 하나 이상의 정보를 이용하여 업링크 데이터 전송을 위한 PDCP PDU를 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국의 RLC 개체에 피어링된 단말 내 AM RLC 개체로만 제출(submit)할 수 있다.In other words, the PDCP entity of the terminal is an AM RLC entity in the terminal peered to the RLC entity of the first base station or the second base station for uplink data transmission using one or more of the above-described index, identifier, and identification information. You can submit only.

즉, 단말의 PDCP 개체는 PDU를 제 1 기지국의 RLC 개체에 피어링된 단말 내 AM RLC 개체로 제출하거나, 또는 제 2 기지국의 RLC 개체에 피어링된 단말 내 AM RLC 개체로 제출할 수 있다. That is, the PDCP entity of the terminal may submit the PDU as an AM RLC entity in the terminal peered to the RLC entity of the first base station or as an AM RLC entity in the terminal peered to the RLC entity of the second base station.

이하 본 명세서에서는 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국을 특정 기지국으로 설명한다.Hereinafter, the first base station or the second base station will be described as a specific base station.

논리채널우선순위(LCP: Logical Channel Prioritization) 프로시져는 MAC PDU에 포함되어야 할 각각의 논리채널과 MAC control element 유형으로부터 데이터 량을 결정하여 MAC PDU를 구성(construction)할 때 사용하는 것이다.The Logical Channel Prioritization (LCP) procedure is used to construct a MAC PDU by determining the amount of data from each logical channel and MAC control element type to be included in the MAC PDU.

전술한 바와 같이 UE의 MAC 계층에서는 제 2 기지국 SCell로 구성된 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀의 CC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 업링크 트래픽을 전달할 논리 채널들(logical channels)을 제 2 기지국 SCell로 구성된 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀의 CC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통한 트랜스포트 채널(Uplink Shared Channel, UL-SCH)로 매핑할 수 있다. As described above, in the MAC layer of the UE, logical channels for transmitting uplink traffic are transmitted through a small cell configured with a second base station SCell or a cell group associated with a second base station or a CC of a small cell or a second base station. It may be mapped to a transport channel (Uplink Shared Channel, UL-SCH) through a small cell configured with a 2 base station SCell or a cell group associated with a CC or a second base station of a second base station or a small cell.

UE는 제 2 기지국 SCell로 구성된 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀 CC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹별로 논리채널우선순위(Logical Channel Prioritization) 프로시져를 수행할 수 있다.The UE may perform a logical channel prioritization procedure for each cell group associated with the small cell configured with the second base station SCell or the second base station or the small cell CC or the second base station.

일 예로, 본 발명의 UE는 SCell로 구성된 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀 CC별 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀그룹별로 아래과 같은 단계로 SCell로 구성된 특정 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀 CC에 속한 논리 채널들에 자원을 할당할 수 있다.For example, the UE of the present invention may be applied to a specific small cell or a second base station or a small cell CC configured as an SCell in the following steps for each small cell or second base station or small cell CC configured as an SCell or for each cell group associated with the second base station. Resources may be allocated to logical channels to which they belong.

단계 1) UE는 SCell로 구성된 특정 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀 CC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀그룹에 속한 Bj>0 인 모든 논리 채널들에 decreasing priority order로 자원을 할당한다.Step 1) The UE allocates resources in decreasing priority order to all logical channels of Bj> 0 belonging to a specific small cell or a second base station configured as an SCell or a cell group associated with the small cell CC or the second base station.

단계 2) UE는 1 단계의 논리채널에 서비스되는 MAC SDUs의 total 크기까지 Bj를 감소시킨다.Step 2) The UE reduces Bj to the total size of MAC SDUs serviced in the logical channel of step 1.

단계 3) UE는 임의의 자원이 남아있다면, SCell로 구성된 특정 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀 CC에 속한 모든 논리 채널들은 논리채널에 대한 데이터 또는 업링크 그랜트가 소진될 때까지 strict decreasing priority order로 서비스된다. Step 3) If the UE has any resources remaining, all logical channels belonging to a specific small cell or second base station or small cell CC configured as SCell are strict decreasing priority order until data or uplink grant for the logical channel is exhausted. Serviced.

논리채널우선순위프로시져에 대해 UE는 SCell로 구성된 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀 CC별로 우선순위를 고려할 수 있다.For the logical channel priority procedure, the UE may consider the priority for each small cell or second base station or small cell CC configured with the SCell.

이상에서 설명한 바와 같이 본 발명은 이동통신망에서 매크로셀과 스몰셀이 비이상적인 백홀을 통한 개별적인 eNB를 통해 구축된 환경에서 매크로 셀의 제어 하에서 스몰셀을 통해 또는 매크로 셀과 스몰셀 간의 협력을 통해 단말이 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국에서 제공되는 무선자원을 사용하여 사용자 플래인 데이터를 전달하는 방법을 제공한다. 특히, 본 발명에 따른 UE은 단말과 경로손실이 적은 제 2 기지국 SCell로 구성된 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀 CC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 통해 업링크 데이터 트래픽을 전송할 수 있는 효과가 있다. 이에 따라 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통한 이중연결 구조하에서도 업링크 버퍼 상태 리포팅과 논리채널우선순위(LCP: Logical Channel Prioritization) 프로시져를 제 2 기지국 SCell로 구성된 스몰셀 또는 제 2 기지국 또는 스몰셀 CC 또는 제 2 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹에 대해서만 수행할 수 있는 효과가 있다.As described above, the present invention provides a mobile station through a small cell under the control of the macro cell or through cooperation between the macro cell and the small cell in an environment in which the macro cell and the small cell are established through separate eNBs through a non-ideal backhaul in a mobile communication network. Provided is a method for delivering user plane data using radio resources provided by the first base station and the second base station. In particular, the UE according to the present invention has an effect of transmitting uplink data traffic through a small cell consisting of a terminal and a second base station SCell having a low path loss, or a cell group associated with a second base station or a small cell CC or a second base station. have. Accordingly, the uplink buffer status reporting and Logical Channel Prioritization (LCP) procedure may be performed in a small cell configured with a second base station SCell or a second base station or small cell even under a dual connectivity structure through a first base station and a second base station. There is an effect that can be performed only for the cell group associated with the CC or the second base station.

도 21은 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말 및 기지국의 동작을 도시한 신호도이다.21 is a signal diagram illustrating operations of a terminal and a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

전술한 각 실시예가 모두 수행될 수 있는 단말 및 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국의 동작을 도 21을 참조하여 예를 들어 설명한다.An operation of a terminal, a first base station, and a second base station, in which each of the above-described embodiments can be performed, will be described by way of example with reference to FIG. 21.

단말(2101)은 제 1 기지국(2102)로부터 상위계층 시그널링을 수신할 수 있다(S2110). 예를 들어, 상위계층 시그널링은 RRC Reconfiguration 메시지일 수 있다. 또한, 상위계층 시그널링은 전술한 각 실시예에 따른 업링크 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송할 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국) 또는 특정 기지국에 연관된 셀 또는 특정 기지국에 연관된 셀 그룹을 구분할 수 있는 인덱스/식별자/구분정보 등을 포함할 수 있다.The terminal 2101 may receive higher layer signaling from the first base station 2102 (S2110). For example, higher layer signaling may be an RRC Reconfiguration message. In addition, higher layer signaling is an index / identifier capable of distinguishing a specific base station (eg, a second base station) or a cell associated with a specific base station or a cell group associated with a specific base station to transmit uplink user plane data according to each of the above-described embodiments. / Delimited information, and the like.

단말(2101)은 제 1 기지국(2102) 및 제 2 기지국(2103)과 이중연결을 구성할 수 있다. 예를 들면, 도 6 및 도 7과 같이 제 1 기지국을 통한 무선베어러와 제 2 기지국을 통한 무선베어러를 구성할 수 있다. 또한, 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 모두를 통한 무선베어러를 구성할 수 있다. 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 모두를 통한 무선베어러는 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국에 스플릿(split)되어 도 6과 유사하게 구성될 수 있다. 즉, 하나의 PDCP 개체와 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국 각각의 RLC 개체에 피어링되는 하나 이상의 RLC 개체가 구성될 수 있다. The terminal 2101 may configure dual connectivity with the first base station 2102 and the second base station 2103. For example, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the radio bearer through the first base station and the radio bearer through the second base station may be configured. In addition, it is possible to configure a radio bearer through both the first base station and the second base station. The radio bearer through both the first base station and the second base station may be split to the first base station and the second base station and configured similarly to FIG. 6. That is, one PDCP entity and one or more RLC entities peered to RLC entities of each of the first base station and the second base station may be configured.

이중연결을 구성함에 있어서, 단말(2101)은 각 기지국에 피어링되는 RLC 개체 등을 구성할 수 있다.In configuring dual connectivity, the terminal 2101 may configure an RLC entity peered to each base station.

단말(2101)의 PDCP 개체는 업링크 트래픽에 대한 PDCP PDU를 RLC 개체로 제출함에 있어서, 전술한 상위계층 시그널링에 포함되는 정보를 이용하여 구성할 수 있다. 즉, 전술한 인덱스, 식별자 및 구분정보 중 하나 이상의 정보를 이용하여 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)의 RLC 개체에 피어링된 RLC 개체로 전달할 수 있다(S2130).The PDCP entity of the terminal 2101 may be configured by using the information included in the above-described higher layer signaling in submitting a PDCP PDU for uplink traffic to the RLC entity. That is, it may be transmitted to the RLC entity peered to the RLC entity of the specific base station (for example, the second base station) by using one or more information of the above-described index, identifier, and discrimination information (S2130).

전달된 업링크 데이터는 MAC 계층을 통해서 제 2 기지국(2103)으로 전송된다(S2140).The transmitted uplink data is transmitted to the second base station 2103 through the MAC layer (S2140).

각 단계에서 단말 및 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국은 전술한 각 실시예에 따른 다양한 변형 단계 또는 정보로 구현될 수 있다.In each step, the terminal, the first base station, and the second base station may be implemented with various modified steps or information according to the above-described embodiments.

본 발명의 단말은 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 스플릿 무선베어러(split radio bearer)를 포함한 이중연결을 구성하고, 다운링크 데이터는 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통해서 수신할 수 있다. 단말이 업링크 데이터를 전송함에 있어서, 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)으로만 전송할 수 있다.The terminal of the present invention configures a dual connection including a first base station and a second base station and a split radio bearer, and downlink data can be received through the first base station and the second base station. When the terminal transmits uplink data, the terminal may transmit only to a specific base station (for example, the second base station).

도 22는 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말의 동작을 도시한 흐름도이다.22 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.

본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말이 업링크 데이터를 전송하는 방법에 있어서, 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 수신하는 단계와 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하는 단계 및 PDCP 개체가 하나 이상의 무선 베어러 각각에 대한 PDCP PDU를 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)에 피어링되어 구성된 RLC 개체로 제출하는 단계를 포함할 수 있다.In a method for transmitting uplink data by a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention, receiving a higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with a first base station and a second base station and higher layer signaling Establishing dual connectivity with the first base station and the second base station based on the PDCP entity and peering the PDCP PDUs for each of the one or more radio bearers to a specific base station (e.g., a second base station) based on higher layer signaling And submitting to the configured RLC entity.

도 22를 참조하면, 단말은 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 수신할 수 있다(S2210). 일 예를 들어, 상위계층 시그널링은 업링크 데이터를 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)으로 전송하기 위해 업링크 셀 또는 업링크 기지국을 식별하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 즉, 전술한 각 실시예의 인덱스, 식별자, 구분정보 중 하나 이상의 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 상위계층 시그널링은 무선자원구성정보를 포함할 수 있으며, RRC Reconfiguration 메시지일 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 22, the terminal may receive higher layer signaling including information for configuring dual connectivity with the first base station and the second base station (S2210). For example, higher layer signaling may include an index or identifying information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting uplink data to a specific base station (eg, a second base station). That is, it may include one or more pieces of information of the index, the identifier, the identification information of each of the above-described embodiments. In addition, the higher layer signaling may include radio resource configuration information and may be an RRC reconfiguration message.

단말은 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성할 수 있다(S2220). 예를 들어, 단말은 비이상적인 백홀로 연결된 복수의 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위해서 하나 이상의 RLC 개체를 구성할 수 있으며, 각 기지국과 전용 무선베어러를 구성하고 복수의 기지국과 스플릿 무선 베어러(split radio bearer)를 구성할 수도 있다.The terminal may configure a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station based on higher layer signaling (S2220). For example, the terminal may configure one or more RLC entities to form a dual connection with a plurality of base stations connected by non-ideal backhaul, configure a dedicated radio bearer with each base station, and split radio bearers with a plurality of base stations. bearer) may be configured.

이후, 단말의 PDCP 개체가 하나 이상의 무선 베어러 각각에 대한 PDCP PDU를 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)에 피어링되어 구성된 RLC 개체로 제출하는 단계를 더 포함할 수 있다(S2230). 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 무선 베어러는, 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국에 스플릿(split)되어 구성된 무선 베어러일 수 있다. 즉, 단말의 PDCP 개체는 업링크 사용자 플레인 데이터를 전송함에 있어서, 하나의 PDCP 개체가 PDCP PDU를 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)의 RLC 개체에 피어링되어 구성된 단말 내 RLC 개체로 제출할 수 있다. 이를 통해서 단말은 업링크 데이터를 제 2 기지국으로만 전송할 수 있다.Subsequently, the PDCP entity of the UE may further include submitting PDCP PDUs for each of the one or more radio bearers to an RLC entity peered to a specific base station (eg, a second base station) based on higher layer signaling (see FIG. S2230). For example, the one or more radio bearers may be radio bearers configured to be split into a first base station and a second base station. That is, in transmitting uplink user plane data, the PDCP entity of the terminal may submit a PDCP PDU to the RLC entity in the terminal configured by peering the PDCP PDU to the RLC entity of a specific base station (for example, the second base station). . Through this, the terminal may transmit only uplink data to the second base station.

또한, 단말은 PDCP PDU를 RLC 개체로 제출하는 단계 이후에, 제 2 기지국에 피어링되어 구성된 MAC 개체에서 논리채널 우선순위 프로시져를 수행하는 단계를 더 포함할 수 있다. 논리채널 우선순위 프로시져는, 제 2 기지국을 통해 업링크 데이터를 전달할 논리채널들에 대해 논리채널 우선순위 절차를 수행할 수 있다.In addition, after the UE submits the PDCP PDU to the RLC entity, the UE may further include performing a logical channel priority procedure in the MAC entity peered to the second base station. The logical channel priority procedure may perform a logical channel priority procedure for logical channels to carry uplink data through the second base station.

이 외에도 단말은 전술한 각 실시예의 본 발명을 수행하는 데에 필요한 동작을 수행할 수 있다.In addition, the terminal may perform an operation required to perform the present invention of each embodiment described above.

도 23은 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 기지국의 동작을 도시한 흐름도이다.23 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 제 1 기지국은 단말의 업링크 데이터 전송을 제어하는 방법에 있어서, 단말과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 생성하는 단계와 상위계층 시그널링을 단말로 전송하는 단계 및 단말에 대해 스플릿 무선베어러(split radio bearer)를 구성하는 단계를 포함할 수 있다.In a method for controlling uplink data transmission of a terminal, a first base station according to another embodiment of the present invention may include generating higher layer signaling and higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with the terminal. The method may include transmitting to a terminal and configuring a split radio bearer for the terminal.

도 23을 참조하면, 제 1 기지국은 단말과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 생성할 수 있다(S2310). 예를 들어, 상위계층 시그널링은, 업링크 데이터를 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)으로 전송하기 위해 업링크 셀 또는 업링크 기지국을 식별하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보를 더 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 상위계층 시그널링은 전술한 각 실시예의 인덱스, 식별자, 구분정보 중 하나 이상의 정보를 포함할 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 23, the first base station may generate higher layer signaling including information for configuring dual connectivity with the terminal (S2310). For example, higher layer signaling may further include index or segmentation information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting uplink data to a particular base station (eg, a second base station). In addition, the higher layer signaling may include one or more pieces of information among the index, the identifier, and the distinguishing information of the above-described embodiments.

제 1 기지국은 생성한 상위계층 시그널링을 단말로 전송할 수 있다(S2320). 예를 들어, 상위계층 시그널링은 무선자원구성정보를 포함할 수 있으며, RRC Reconfiguration 메시지로 전송될 수 있다.The first base station may transmit the generated higher layer signaling to the terminal (S2320). For example, higher layer signaling may include radio resource configuration information and may be transmitted in an RRC reconfiguration message.

제 1 기지국은 단말에 제 2 기지국과 함께 이중 연결을 구성할 수 있으며, 스플릿 무선베어러(split radio bearer)를 구성할 수 있다(S2330)). 예를 들어, 제 1 기지국은 단말과 이중 연결을 구성하고, 도 6 및 도 7과 같이 스플릿 무선베어러 및/또는 전용무선베어러를 구성할 수 있다. 단말은 제 1 기지국으로부터 수신한 상위계층 시그널링의 정보에 기초하여 이중 연결을 구성하고, 스플릿 베어러에 대한 업링크 데이터를 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)으로만 전송할 수 있다.The first base station may configure a dual connection with the second base station to the terminal, may configure a split radio bearer (S2330). For example, the first base station may configure a dual connection with the terminal, and may configure a split radio bearer and / or a dedicated radio bearer as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7. The UE configures a dual connection based on the information of the higher layer signaling received from the first base station, and can transmit uplink data for the split bearer only to a specific base station (for example, the second base station).

이 외에도 기지국은 전술한 각 실시예의 본 발명을 수행하는 데에 필요한 동작을 수행할 수 있다.In addition to this, the base station may perform operations required to carry out the present invention of each of the above-described embodiments.

도 24는 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말의 구성을 도시한 도면이다.24 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.

본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말(2400)은 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 수신하는 수신부(2410) 및 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하고, PDCP 개체가 하나 이상의 무선 베어러 각각에 대한 PDCP PDU를 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)에 피어링되어 구성된 RLC 개체로 제출하도록 제어하는 제어부(2420)를 포함할 수 있다.The terminal 2400 according to another embodiment of the present invention may include a receiver 2410 for receiving higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station and based on the higher layer signaling. Form a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station, and the PDCP entity submits the PDCP PDUs for each of the one or more radio bearers to the configured RLC entity peered to a specific base station (e.g., the second base station) based on higher layer signaling. It may include a control unit 2420 to control to.

도 24를 참조하면, 또 다른 실시예에 의한 사용자 단말(2400)은 수신부(2410), 제어부(2420) 및 송신부(2430)를 포함한다.Referring to FIG. 24, a user terminal 2400 according to another embodiment includes a receiver 2410, a controller 2420, and a transmitter 2430.

수신부(2410)는 기지국으로부터 상위계층 시그널링과 하향링크 제어정보 및 데이터, 메시지를 해당 채널을 통해 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상위계층 시그널링은 업링크 데이터를 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)으로 전송하기 위해 업링크 셀 또는 업링크 기지국을 식별하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보를 포함할 수 있다. 즉, 전술한 각 실시예의 인덱스, 식별자, 구분정보 중 하나 이상의 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 상위계층 시그널링은 무선자원구성정보를 포함할 수 있으며, RRC Reconfiguration 메시지일 수 있다. The receiver 2410 may receive higher layer signaling, downlink control information, data, and a message from a base station through a corresponding channel. For example, higher layer signaling may include an index or segment for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting uplink data to a particular base station (eg, a second base station). That is, it may include one or more pieces of information of the index, the identifier, the identification information of each of the above-described embodiments. In addition, the higher layer signaling may include radio resource configuration information and may be an RRC reconfiguration message.

제어부(2420)는 전술한 본 발명의 각 실시예를 수행하기에 필요한 이동통신 망에서 복수의 기지국이 단말에 이중 연결을 구성하는 경우 업링크 트래픽 경로와 다운링크 트래픽 경로를 다르게 하여 전달하는 데에 따른 전반적인 단말의 동작을 제어한다. 또한, 제어부(2420)는 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국에 스플릿되어 구성된 무선 베어러를 구성할 수 있다. 또한, 제어부(2420)는 단말의 PDCP 개체가 하나 이상의 무선 베어러 각각에 대한 PDCP PDU를 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)에 피어링되어 구성된 RLC 개체로 제출하도록 제어할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 무선 베어러는, 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국에 스플릿되어 구성된 무선 베어러일 수 있다. 즉, 제어부(2420)는 하나의 PDCP 개체가 PDCP PDU를 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)의 RLC 개체에 피어링되어 구성된 단말 내 RLC 개체로 제출하도록 제어할 수 있다.The control unit 2420 may be configured to deliver different uplink traffic paths and downlink traffic paths when a plurality of base stations form a dual connection to a terminal in a mobile communication network required to perform the above-described embodiments of the present invention. Control the overall operation of the terminal according. In addition, the controller 2420 may configure a radio bearer configured to be split into the first base station and the second base station. In addition, the controller 2420 may control the PDCP entity of the terminal to submit a PDCP PDU for each of one or more radio bearers to an RLC entity configured to be peered to a specific base station (eg, a second base station) based on higher layer signaling. have. For example, the one or more radio bearers may be radio bearers that are split and configured at the first base station and the second base station. That is, the controller 2420 may control one PDCP entity to submit the PDCP PDU to the RLC entity in the terminal configured to be peered to the RLC entity of a specific base station (for example, the second base station).

또한, 제어부(2420)는 제 2 기지국에 피어링되어 구성된 MAC 개체에서 논리채널 우선순위 프로시져를 수행하도록 제어할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제 2 기지국을 통해 업링크 데이터를 전달할 논리채널들에 대해 논리채널 우선순위 절차를 수행하도록 제어할 수 있다.In addition, the controller 2420 may control to perform a logical channel priority procedure in the MAC entity peered to the second base station. For example, the control may be performed to perform a logical channel priority procedure for logical channels to transmit uplink data through the second base station.

송신부(2430)는 기지국에 상향링크 제어정보 및 데이터, 메시지를 해당 채널을 통해 전송한다. 이 경우, 송신부(2430)는 분리 베어러에 대한 업링크 데이터를 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)으로만 전송할 수 있다. The transmitter 2430 transmits uplink control information, data, and messages to the base station through the corresponding channel. In this case, the transmitter 2430 may transmit uplink data for the split bearer only to a specific base station (for example, the second base station).

도 25는 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 기지국의 구성을 도시한 도면이다.25 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 제 1 기지국(2500)은 단말의 업링크 데이터 전송을 제어함에 있어서, 단말로 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 생성하는 제어부(2510) 및 상위계층 시그널링을 단말로 전송하는 송신부(2520)를 포함하되, 제어부(2510)는 단말에 대해 스플릿 무선베어러를 구성하도록 제어할 수 있다.The first base station 2500 according to another embodiment of the present invention is a control unit 2510 for generating a higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection to the terminal in controlling uplink data transmission of the terminal and Including a transmitter 2520 for transmitting higher layer signaling to the terminal, the controller 2510 may control to configure a split radio bearer for the terminal.

도 25를 참조하면, 또 다른 실시예에 의한 기지국(2500)은 제어부(2510), 송신부(2520) 및 수신부(2530)를 포함한다.Referring to FIG. 25, a base station 2500 according to another embodiment includes a controller 2510, a transmitter 2520, and a receiver 2530.

제어부(2510)는 전술한 본 발명의 각 실시예를 수행하기에 필요한 이동통신 망에서 복수의 기지국이 단말에 이중 연결을 구성하는 경우 업링크 트래픽 경로와 다운링크 트래픽 경로를 다르게 하여 구성하는 데에 따른 전반적인 기지국의 동작을 제어한다.The control unit 2510 is configured to configure the uplink traffic path and the downlink traffic path differently when a plurality of base stations form a dual connection to the terminal in the mobile communication network required to perform the above-described embodiments of the present invention. To control the overall operation of the base station.

또한, 제어부(2510)는 단말과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 생성할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상위계층 시그널링은, 업링크 데이터를 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)으로 전송하기 위해 업링크 셀 또는 업링크 기지국을 식별하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보를 더 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 상위계층 시그널링은 전술한 각 실시예의 인덱스, 식별자, 구분정보 중 하나 이상의 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 제어부(2510)는 제 2 기지국과 단말에 스플릿 무선베어러를 구성할 수 있다. 또는 전용무선베어러와 스플릿 무선베어러를 함께 구성할 수도 있다.In addition, the controller 2510 may generate higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with the terminal. For example, higher layer signaling may further include index or segmentation information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting uplink data to a particular base station (eg, a second base station). In addition, the higher layer signaling may include one or more pieces of information among the index, the identifier, and the distinguishing information of the above-described embodiments. In addition, the controller 2510 may configure a split radio bearer in the second base station and the terminal. Alternatively, a dedicated wireless bearer and a split wireless bearer may be configured together.

송신부(2520)는 생성된 상위계층 시그널링을 단말로 전송한다. 일 예로, 상위계층 시그널링은 무선자원구성정보를 포함할 수 있으며, RRC Reconfiguration 메시지로 전송될 수 있다. 또한, 송신부(2520)는 단말로 다운링크 데이터를 전송할 수 있다.The transmitter 2520 transmits the generated higher layer signaling to the terminal. For example, higher layer signaling may include radio resource configuration information and may be transmitted in an RRC reconfiguration message. In addition, the transmitter 2520 may transmit downlink data to the terminal.

수신부(2530)는 전술한 본 발명을 수행하기에 필요한 신호나 메시지, 데이터를 단말과 수신하는데 사용된다. 다만, 단말의 업링크 데이터는 특정 기지국(예를 들어 제 2 기지국)을 통해 전송되어 제 1 기지국으로 전송될 수 있다. 특정 기지국이 제 1 기지국일 경우, 단말의 업링크 데이터는 제 1 기지국으로만 전송될 수 있다.The receiver 2530 is used to receive a signal, a message, and data necessary for carrying out the above-described present invention with the terminal. However, uplink data of the terminal may be transmitted through a specific base station (for example, the second base station) and transmitted to the first base station. When the specific base station is the first base station, uplink data of the terminal may be transmitted only to the first base station.

전술한 본 발명에 따르면, 단말이 복수의 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성한 환경에서 특정 기지국을 통해서 업링크 데이터 트래픽을 전송할 수 있는 효과가 있다. 예를 들어 단말과 경로 손실이 적은 제 2 기지국을 통해서 업링크 데이터를 전송할 수 있으며 이를 통해서 단말의 전력 소모를 감소시키고 업링크 데이터 전송 속도도 향상시킬 수 있는 효과가 있다. 다른 예를 들어 커버리지가 넓은 제 1 기지국을 통해서 업링크 데이터를 전송할 수 있으며 이를 통해서 이동성 성능을 향상시킬 수 있는 효과가 있다.According to the present invention described above, there is an effect that the terminal can transmit the uplink data traffic through a specific base station in an environment in which a dual connection with a plurality of base stations. For example, uplink data may be transmitted through the terminal and the second base station with little path loss, thereby reducing power consumption and improving uplink data transmission speed of the terminal. In another example, uplink data may be transmitted through a first base station having a wide coverage, thereby improving mobility performance.

또한, 본 발명에 따르면 이중 연결 구조하에서도 업링크 버퍼상태리포트 및 논리채널우선순위 프로시져를 특정 셀 또는 특정 기지국에 대해서만 수행하는 효과도 있다.In addition, according to the present invention, an uplink buffer status report and a logical channel priority procedure may be performed only for a specific cell or a specific base station even under a dual connectivity structure.

업링크 전송을 위한 단말의 버퍼 상태 보고 전송 방법Method of transmitting buffer status report of UE for uplink transmission

이하에서는 단말이 기지국과 통신을 수행함에 있어서, 업링크 전송을 위한 버퍼상태 정보를 전송하는 경우에 대해서 설명한다. 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말은 하나 이상의 기지국과 무선 베어러를 구성하고, 업링크 전송을 하기 위해서 버퍼상태 정보를 전송한다. 또한, 이하에서 설명하는 제 1 실시예 및 제 2 실시예는 본 발명의 업링크 전송을 위한 단말의 버퍼상태보고 전송 방법의 각 실시예를 의미하며, 전술한 업링크 전송을 위한 본 발명의 제 1 실시예 및 제 2 실시예와는 다른 실시예를 의미한다.Hereinafter, a case in which the terminal transmits buffer status information for uplink transmission when communicating with a base station. A terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention configures a radio bearer with one or more base stations, and transmits buffer status information for uplink transmission. In addition, the first embodiment and the second embodiment to be described below mean each embodiment of the method for transmitting the buffer status report of the terminal for the uplink transmission of the present invention, the first embodiment of the present invention for the uplink transmission An embodiment different from the first embodiment and the second embodiment is meant.

도 26은 종래 단말의 MAC 구성도의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a MAC configuration diagram of a conventional terminal.

도 26을 참조하면, MAC 계층은 여러 기능들을 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들어, MAC 계층은 논리채널들(logical channels)과 전송채널들(transport channels) 간의 매핑을 수행할 수 있다. 또한, MAC 계층은 하나 또는 서로 다른 논리채널로부터 물리 계층의 전송 채널들 상에 전달되는 전송블락(TB: Transport Blocks)으로 MAC SDUs(Service Data Units)를 멀티플렉싱(multiplexing)하는 기능을 수행할 수 있다. 또한, MAC 계층은 하나 또는 서로 다른 논리채널로부터 물리 계층 전송 채널들 상에 전달되는 전송블락(TB: Transport Blocks)으로부터 MAC SDUs(Service Data Units)를 디멀티플렉싱(de-multiplexing)하는 기능을 수행하기도 한다. 그 외에도 논리채널 우선순위결정(Logical Channel prioritization) 및 HARQ(Hybrid automatic repeat request)를 통한 오류 정정 등의 기능을 수행할 수도 있다. 또한, MAC 계층은 논리채널들에 대한 데이터 전송 서비스를 제공한다. 각각의 논리채널 유형은 어떤 타입의 정보가 전송되는지에 따라 정의될 수 있다. 하나의 MAC 계층 개체에서 하나의 무선 베어러는 하나의 논리채널에 매핑된다. 이하에서는, 비이상적인 백홀로 연결되는 기지국간의 병합 기술에 대해서 도면을 참조하여 예시적으로 설명한다.Referring to FIG. 26, the MAC layer may perform various functions. For example, the MAC layer may perform mapping between logical channels and transport channels. In addition, the MAC layer may perform a function of multiplexing MAC Service Data Units (SDUs) into transport blocks (TBs) transmitted from one or different logical channels to transport channels of the physical layer. . In addition, the MAC layer may perform a function of de-multiplexing MAC Service Data Units (SDUs) from transport blocks (TBs) transmitted on physical layer transport channels from one or different logical channels. do. In addition, a function such as logical channel prioritization and error correction through a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) may be performed. In addition, the MAC layer provides a data transfer service for logical channels. Each logical channel type may be defined according to what type of information is transmitted. In one MAC layer entity, one radio bearer is mapped to one logical channel. Hereinafter, a merging technique between base stations connected by non-ideal backhaul will be described with reference to the drawings.

도 27 및 도 28은 베어러 분리 사용자 플레인 구조의 각 예를 도시한 도면이다.27 and 28 are diagrams illustrating respective examples of a bearer split user plane structure.

도 27 및 도 28을 참조하면, 기지국들 간에 비이상적인 백홀을 가지는 경우에도 베어러 전송을 위해 복수의 기지국들의 무선 자원을 병합하여 사용할 수 있다. 비이상적인 백홀 환경에서 효율적인 무선 자원 스케줄링을 위해서는 각각의 기지국이 독립적인 스케줄러를 가질 필요가 있다. 일 예를 들어, 하나의 무선 베어러 전송을 위해 제 1 기지국(매크로셀 기지국 또는 마스터 기지국 또는 MeNB)과 제 2 기지국(스몰셀 기지국 또는 세컨더리 기지국 또는 SeNB)을 사용하는 경우, 특정 무선 베어러에 대해 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국 각각에 RLC 개체 및 MAC 개체를 구성할 수 있다.Referring to FIGS. 27 and 28, even when there are non-ideal backhauls between base stations, radio resources of a plurality of base stations may be merged and used for bearer transmission. For efficient radio resource scheduling in a non-ideal backhaul environment, each base station needs to have an independent scheduler. For example, when using a first base station (macrocell base station or master base station or MeNB) and a second base station (small cell base station or secondary base station or SeNB) for one radio bearer transmission, RLC entity and MAC entity may be configured in each of the first base station and the second base station.

일 예로, 도 27를 참조하면, 제 1 기지국은 하나의 무선 베어러가 제 2 기지국으로 분리된 베어러 분리 구조에서 특정 무선 베어러에 대해 하나의 PDCP 개체와 RLC 개체 및 MAC 개체를 가진다. 그리고 해당 무선 베어러에 대해 제 2 기지국은 RLC 개체와 MAC 개체를 가질 수 있다. 이하에서 도 27의 오른쪽 무선 베어러와 같이 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국 각각에 RLC 개체 및 MAC 개체를 통해 제공되는 무선 베어러를 도 6과 같이 분리 베어러(split radio bearer)로 지칭한다.For example, referring to FIG. 27, a first base station has one PDCP entity, an RLC entity, and a MAC entity for a specific radio bearer in a bearer separation structure in which one radio bearer is divided into a second base station. The second base station may have an RLC entity and a MAC entity for the radio bearer. Hereinafter, the radio bearer provided through the RLC entity and the MAC entity to each of the first base station and the second base station as in the right radio bearer of FIG. 27 is referred to as a split radio bearer as shown in FIG. 6.

다른 예로, 도 28을 참조하면, 베어러는 제 1 기지국이 RLC 개체에서 분리될 수도 있다. 이 경우에도 제 1 기지국은 특정 무선 베어러에 대해 하나의 PDCP 개체와 RLC 개체 및 MAC 개체를 가질 수 있다. 그리고 해당 무선 베어러에 대해 제 2 기지국은 베어러 분리되어 구성된 베어러에 있어서, 제 1 기지국과 별개로 하나의 MAC 개체를 가질 수 있다. 또 다른 예로, RLC 개체를 더 가질 수도 있다. As another example, referring to FIG. 28, a bearer may have a first base station separated from an RLC entity. Even in this case, the first base station may have one PDCP entity, RLC entity, and MAC entity for a specific radio bearer. The second base station may have one MAC entity separately from the first base station in the bearer configured by bearer separation for the radio bearer. As another example, it may further have an RLC entity.

버퍼 상태 리포트 프로시져는 단말 업링크(UL) 버퍼들에서 전송을 위한 이용 가능한(available) 데이터양에 관한 정보를 서빙 셀 기지국으로 제공하기 위해 사용되는 프로시져이다. 구체적인 버퍼 상태 리포트 절차는 3GPP TS 36.321 5.4.4절에 기술되어 있다. 버퍼 상태 리포트(Buffer Status Report, BSR)는 다음과 같은 이벤트가 발생하면 트리거되어야 한다.The buffer status report procedure is a procedure used to provide the serving cell base station with information about the amount of available data for transmission in terminal uplink (UL) buffers. The specific buffer status reporting procedure is described in Section 5.4.4 of 3GPP TS 36.321. The Buffer Status Report (BSR) should be triggered when the following events occur.

-RLC(Radio Link Control) 개체 또는 PDCP(Packet Data Convergence Protocol) 개체에서 전송을 위하여 하나의 논리채널그룹(LCG: Logical Channel Group)에 속한 하나의 논리채널에 대해 업링크 데이터가 이용 가능해(available)진다. 그리고 그 데이터가 임의의 논리채널그룹에 속하고 이미 이용 가능한 데이터에 대한 논리채널들의 우선순위보다 더 높은 우선순위를 가진 하나의 논리채널에 속하거나, 또는 하나의 논리채널그룹에 속하는 논리채널들 중의 임의의 것에 대해 아무 데이터도 가용하지 않다. 이러한 경우의 버퍼 상태 리포트를 "Regular BSR"이라고 한다. Uplink data is available for one logical channel belonging to one logical channel group (LCG) for transmission in a Radio Link Control (RLC) entity or a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) entity. Lose. And the data belongs to a logical channel group belonging to any logical channel group and having a higher priority than the priority of the logical channels for the already available data, or among the logical channels belonging to one logical channel group. No data is available for anything. The buffer status report in this case is called "Regular BSR".

- 업링크 자원이 할당되고 패딩비트의 수가 버퍼 상태 리포트 MAC 제어 요소(Control element)에 그 서브헤더를 더한 크기와 같거나 클 때 버퍼 상태 리포트를 "Padding BSR"이라고 한다.A buffer status report is called a "Padding BSR" when an uplink resource is allocated and the number of padding bits is equal to or greater than the size of the buffer status report MAC control element plus its subheader.

- 재전송 버퍼 상태 리포트타이머(retxBSR-Timer)가 만료되고 단말이 논리채널그룹에 속한 논리채널들 중 임의의 것에 대한 전송을 위한 이용 가능한 데이터를 가지는 경우의 버퍼 상태 리포트도 "Regular BSR"이라고 한다.The buffer status report when the retransmission buffer status report timer (retxBSR-Timer) expires and the terminal has available data for transmission to any of the logical channels belonging to the logical channel group is also referred to as "Regular BSR".

- 주기적 버퍼 상태 리포트타이머(periodicBSR-Timer)가 만료되는 경우의 버퍼 상태 리포트를 "Periodic BSR"이라고 한다.-The buffer status report when the periodic buffer status report timer (periodicBSR-Timer) expires is called "Periodic BSR".

하나의 MAC PDU(Protocol Data Unit)는 많아야 하나의 MAC 버퍼 상태 리포트 제어 요소(BSR control element)를 포함할 수 있다. One MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU) may include at most one MAC Buffer Status Report Control Element (BSR control element).

단말은 하나의 TTI(Transmission time interval) 내에 많아야 하나의 Regular/Periodic BSR을 전송해야 한다. 만약 단말이 하나의 TTI 내에 복수의 MAC PDUs를 전송하도록 요청되었다면, UE는 Regular/Periodic BSR을 포함하지 않은 MAC PDUs중의 임의의 것에 padding BSR을 포함할 수 있다.The UE should transmit at most one Regular / Periodic BSR within one Transmission Time Interval (TTI). If the UE is requested to transmit a plurality of MAC PDUs in one TTI, the UE may include a padding BSR to any of the MAC PDUs not including the Regular / Periodic BSR.

하나의 TTI내에 전송되는 모든 BSRs은 항상 이 TTI에 대해 모든 MAC PDUs가 만들어진 후의 버퍼 상태를 나타낸다. 각각의 논리채널그룹은 많아야 TTI당 하나의 버퍼 상태 값을 리포트해야 한다. 그리고 이 값은 이 논리채널 그룹에 대한 버퍼 상태를 리포트하는 모든 버퍼 상태 리포트(BSR)들 내에 보고되어야 한다.All BSRs sent in one TTI always indicate the buffer status after all MAC PDUs have been created for this TTI. Each logical channel group should report at most one buffer status value per TTI. This value must be reported in all buffer status reports (BSRs) that report the buffer status for this logical channel group.

전술한 이용 가능한 데이터양(data available for transmission)에 대해서 좀 더 자세히 설명한다.The above-described data available for transmission will be described in more detail.

MAC계층의 버퍼 상태 리포팅 목적으로 단말은 RLC 계층 내에서 이용 가능한 데이터양으로써 다음을 고려해야 한다.For the purpose of reporting buffer status of the MAC layer, the UE should consider the following as the amount of data available in the RLC layer.

- 아직 RLC 데이터 PDU내에 포함되지 않은 RLC SDUs, 또는 세그멘트를 고려한다.Consider RLC SDUs, or segments, not yet included in the RLC data PDU.

- 재전송을 위해 펜딩된(pending) RLC 데이터 PDUs(RLC AM)를 고려한다.Consider pending RLC data PDUs (RLC AM) for retransmission.

한편, MAC계층의 버퍼 상태 리포팅 목적으로 단말은 PDCP 계층 내에서 이용 가능한 데이터양으로써 PDCP control PDUs와 다음을 고려해야 한다.On the other hand, for the purpose of reporting the buffer status of the MAC layer, the UE should consider PDCP control PDUs and the following as the amount of data available in the PDCP layer.

하위 계층으로 PDU가 제출되지 않은 SDU에 대해서 PDCP에 의해 아직 처리되지 않은 SDU가 있다면 SDU 자체를 고려한다. 또한, 하위 계층으로 PDU가 제출되지 않은 SDU에 대해서 PDCP에 의해 처리된 SDU가 있다면 PDU를 고려한다.If there is an SDU that has not yet been processed by PDCP for an SDU for which a PDU has not been submitted to a lower layer, the SDU itself is considered. Also, if there is an SDU processed by PDCP for an SDU for which a PDU is not submitted to a lower layer, the PDU is considered.

PDCP 상태 리포트에 의해 성공적으로 전달되었음이 표시된 SDUs를 제외하고, 하위계층에 의해 확인 받지 못한 해당 PDUs의 전달을 위한 첫번째 SDU로부터 시작해서 PDCP 재설정이전에 하위 계층으로 PDU가 단지 제출된 해당 PDU에 대한 SDU에 대해 PDCP에 의해 아직 처리되지 않은 SDU가 있다면 SDU 자체를 고려한다. 또한, PDCP에 의해 처리된 SDU가 있다면 PDU를 고려한다.Except for SDUs that indicate successful delivery by the PDCP Status Report, starting with the first SDU for delivery of those PDUs not identified by the lower layer, and for those PDUs that have been submitted to the lower layer only prior to PDCP reset If there is an SDU for the SDU that has not yet been processed by the PDCP, then consider the SDU itself. Also, if there is an SDU processed by PDCP, consider the PDU.

도 27 또는 도 28에 도시된 베어러들 중 오른쪽 베어러(분리 베어러)와 같이 특정 베어러는 하나의 베어러에 대해서 제 1 기지국에서 S1-U 인터페이스를 종단하고 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통해 처리하도록 구성될 수 있다. 또한, 베어러 분리된 베어러는 하나의 베어러 전송을 위해 복수의 기지국에 스케줄러를 가질 수 있다. Among the bearers shown in FIG. 27 or 28, a specific bearer, such as a right bearer (split bearer), terminates the S1-U interface at the first base station for one bearer and uses a bearer split user plane structure. To be processed through the first base station and the second base station. In addition, bearer separated bearers may have schedulers in a plurality of base stations for one bearer transmission.

위에서 설명한 바와 같이 업링크 전송을 위해서 기존 버퍼 상태 리포팅을 통해 제공하는 이용 가능 데이터양은 RLC 계층과 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 합산하여 산출했다. As described above, the amount of available data provided through the existing buffer state reporting for uplink transmission is calculated by summing the amount of available data of the RLC layer and the PDCP layer.

따라서 도 27 또는 도 28에서 베어러 분리된 특정 베어러와 같이 하나의 베어러에 대해 제 1 기지국에서 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통해 처리하도록 구성하는 경우, 단말의 버퍼 상태 리포트 시에 문제가 발생할 수 있다. 예를 들어, PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양은 제 1 기지국을 통한 업링크 버퍼를 산출할 때와 제 2 기지국을 통한 업링크 버퍼를 산출할 때 중복되어 계산될 수 있다. 따라서, 제 1 기지국에서 업링크 스케줄링을 하거나 제 2 기지국에서 업링크 스케줄링을 할 때 단말의 총 업링크 버퍼량에 비해 과도한 스케줄링이 발생할 수 있다. 즉, 하나의 PDCP 개체에 포함된 이용 가능 데이터양에 대한 정보가 복수의 버퍼 상태 리포트에 중첩하여 포함됨으로써, 실제 이용 가능 데이터양에 대한 정보가 기지국으로 정확히 전송되지 못하는 문제점이 발생할 수 있었다.Therefore, when configured to process through the first base station and the second base station by using a user plane structure of the bearer split (bearer split) in the first base station for one bearer, such as a specific bearer separated bearer in Figure 27 or 28 In case of a buffer status report of a terminal, a problem may occur. For example, the amount of available data of the PDCP layer may be calculated in duplicate when calculating the uplink buffer through the first base station and when calculating the uplink buffer through the second base station. Therefore, when performing uplink scheduling at the first base station or uplink scheduling at the second base station, excessive scheduling may occur compared to the total uplink buffer amount of the terminal. That is, since the information on the amount of available data included in one PDCP entity is included in a plurality of buffer status reports, the information on the amount of actual available data may not be correctly transmitted to the base station.

정리하면, 전술한 바와 같이 서로 다른 기지국이 비이상적인 백홀로 연결되더라도 복수의 기지국들을 통해 무선자원을 병합하여 데이터를 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 하나의 베어러 전송을 위해 개별 기지국에 별도의 스케줄러를 필요로 했다. In summary, even if different base stations are connected by non-ideal backhaul as described above, data may be transmitted by merging radio resources through a plurality of base stations. In addition, separate schedulers are required for individual base stations for one bearer transmission.

이때 특정 베어러에 대해 제 1 기지국에서 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통해 처리하도록 구성하는 경우, 단말이 제 1 기지국을 통한 업링크 버퍼를 산출할 때와 제 2 기지국을 통한 업링크 버퍼를 산출할 때 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양이 중복되는 문제가 발생할 수 있다. 따라서, 단말의 총 업링크 버퍼량을 초과하는 스케줄링을 유발함으로써 무선자원의 낭비를 유발할 수 있는 문제가 발생할 수 있다.In this case, when the first base station and the second base station are configured to be processed using a bearer split user plane structure for a specific bearer, the terminal may calculate an uplink buffer through the first base station. When calculating the uplink buffer through the second base station and when the amount of available data of the PDCP layer may overlap. Therefore, a problem may occur that causes waste of radio resources by inducing scheduling that exceeds the total uplink buffer amount of the terminal.

이와 같은 문제점을 해결하기 위해 안출된 본 발명은 베어러 분리된 특정 베어러에 대해 서로 다른 기지국이 별도의 스케줄러를 통해 무선자원을 병합하여 데이터를 전송하도록 구성된 경우에도 정확한 버퍼 상태 리포트가 될 수 있는 방법을 제공한다. 예를 들어, 단말이 해당 무선베어러의 논리채널들에 대한 총 업링크 버퍼량에 해당하는 이용 가능 데이터양을 개별 기지국들로 리포팅할 수 있도록 함으로써 무선자원을 효율적으로 이용할 수 있는 방법을 제공하는 것을 목적으로 한다.The present invention devised to solve such a problem is a method that can be accurate buffer status report even when different base stations are configured to transmit data by merging radio resources through a separate scheduler for a specific bearer separated bearer. to provide. For example, it is possible to provide a method for efficiently using radio resources by allowing a terminal to report the amount of available data corresponding to the total amount of uplink buffers for logical channels of a corresponding radio bearer to individual base stations. The purpose.

도 29은 본 발명을 설명하기 위한 단말 내에서 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널의 이용 가능 데이터양에 대한 예시도이다. FIG. 29 is an exemplary diagram of an available data amount of a logical channel mapped to a split bearer in a terminal for explaining the present invention.

도 29와 같이 단말은 분리 베어러에 대해 마스터 기지국의 RLC 개체에 피어링되는 단말 내 RLC 개체(RLC-M)와 세컨더리 기지국의 RLC 개체에 피어링된 단말 내 RLC 개체(RLC-S)를 가진다. 또한 단말은 마스터 기지국의 MAC 개체에 피어링되는 단말 내 MAC 개체(MAC-M)와 세컨더리 기지국의 MAC 개체에 피어링된 단말 내 MAC 개체(MAC-S)를 가진다.As illustrated in FIG. 29, the terminal has an RLC entity (RLC-M) in the terminal peered to the RLC entity of the master base station for the split bearer and an RLC entity (RLC-S) in the terminal peered to the RLC entity of the secondary base station. The terminal also has an in-terminal MAC entity (MAC-M) peered to the MAC entity of the master base station and the in-terminal MAC entity (MAC-S) peered to the MAC entity of the secondary base station.

도 29를 참조하면, 기존의 이용 가능 데이터양 산출방법을 따르면 단말의 MAC 계층 또는 단말의 MAC 개체 또는 단말의 MAC 개체에 매핑되는 논리채널은 상위계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 합산하여 산출하므로 BSR을 과도하게 요청할 수 있다. 예를 들어서, 단말은 각 기지국으로 버퍼 상태 리포트를 전송할 수 있다. 이 경우, 마스터 기지국의 MAC 개체에 피어링되는 단말 내 MAC 개체(MAC-M : MAC-Master)는 제 1 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에 PDCP 개체의 이용 가능 데이터양 500과 제 1 기지국 RLC 개체에 피어링된 RLC 개체(RLC-M:RLC-Master)의 이용 가능 데이터양 200이 합산된 700의 이용 가능 데이터양 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 같은 방법으로 세컨더리 기지국의 MAC 개체에 피어링되는 단말 내 MAC 개체(MAC-S : MAC-Secondary)는 제 2 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에 PDCP 개체의 이용 가능 데이터양 500과 RLC(RLC-S:RLC-Secondary)계층의 이용 가능 데이터양 100이 합산된 600의 이용 가능 데이터양 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 따라서, 단말의 각 계층에 포함된 총 이용 가능 데이터양인 800(500+200+100)과 비교할 때 500의 이용 가능 데이터양이 과도하게 전송되는 문제점이 있다. Referring to FIG. 29, according to the conventional method of calculating the amount of available data, a logical channel mapped to a MAC layer of a terminal or a MAC entity of a terminal or a MAC entity of a terminal is calculated by summing up the available data amounts of a higher layer, thereby calculating BSR. You can ask too much. For example, the terminal may transmit a buffer status report to each base station. In this case, the MAC entity (MAC-M: MAC-Master) peered to the MAC entity of the master base station is in the buffer status report sent to the first base station to the available data amount 500 of the PDCP entity and the first base station RLC entity The available data amount 200 of the peered RLC entity (RLC-M: RLC-Master) may include 700 available data amount information, which is added up. In the same manner, the MAC entity (MAC-S: MAC-Secondary) peered to the MAC entity of the secondary base station may use the amount of data 500 and RLC (RLC-S :) of the PDCP entity in the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station. The available data amount 100 of the RLC-Secondary layer may include 600 available data amount information, which is added up. Accordingly, there is a problem in that the amount of available data of 500 is excessively transmitted compared to 800 (500 + 200 + 100), which is the total amount of available data included in each layer of the terminal.

이와 같은 문제점을 해결하기 위해서 본 발명은 이하에서 제시되는 각 실시예에 기초한 효율적인 버퍼 상태 리포트 방법을 제공한다. 이하에서는 설명의 편의를 위해서 일 예로 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널에 대해서 주로 설명하며, 논리채널뿐만 아니라 논리채널그룹의 경우에도 동일한 방법이 적용될 수 있다. In order to solve such a problem, the present invention provides an efficient buffer status report method based on the embodiments described below. In the following description, a logical channel mapped to a split bearer is mainly described as an example for convenience of explanation, and the same method may be applied to a logical channel group as well as a logical channel.

또한, PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보는 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 의미한다.In addition, the PDCP buffer status information means the amount of available data of the PDCP layer.

제 1 실시예: 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널의 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보를 버퍼 상태 리포트와는 구분하여 전송하는 방법.First embodiment: A method of transmitting PDCP buffer status information of a logical channel mapped to a split bearer separately from a buffer status report.

도 30은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 MAC PDU(Protocol Data Unit) 구성의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a MAC PDU (Protocol Data Unit) according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 30을 참조하여 설명하면, MAC PDU는 하나의 MAC 헤더, 0 또는 그 이상의 MAC SDUs(Service Data Units), 0 또는 그 이상의 MAC 제어 요소(control elements)를 포함하고, 선택적으로 패딩을 포함하여 구성된다.Referring to FIG. 30, a MAC PDU includes one MAC header, zero or more MAC Service Data Units (SDUs), zero or more MAC control elements, and optionally includes padding. do.

MAC PDU 헤더는 하나 또는 그 이상의 MAC PDU 서브헤더(subheader, 3001)로 구성된다. 각각의 서브헤더(3001)는 하나의 MAC SDU, 하나의 MAC 제어 요소(control element) 또는 패딩에 상응한다(A MAC PDU header consists of one or more MAC PDU subheaders; each subheader corresponds to either a MAC SDU, a MAC control element or padding).The MAC PDU header consists of one or more MAC PDU subheaders 3001. Each subheader 3001 corresponds to one MAC SDU, one MAC control element or padding (A MAC PDU header consists of one or more MAC PDU subheaders; each subheader corresponds to either a MAC SDU, a MAC control element or padding).

MAC 헤더에 포함되는 LCID(Logical Channel ID) 필드는 상응하는 MAC SDU의 논리채널 인스턴스 또는 상응하는 MAC 제어 요소(control element) 또는 패딩의 타입을 식별한다. The Logical Channel ID (LCID) field included in the MAC header identifies the logical channel instance of the corresponding MAC SDU or the type of the corresponding MAC control element or padding.

본 발명의 제 1 실시예에 따른 단말은 버퍼 상태 리포트와는 구분하여 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹에 대한 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보를 기지국으로 전송할 수 있다. A terminal according to the first embodiment of the present invention may transmit PDCP buffer status information for a logical channel or a logical channel group mapped to a split bearer differently from a buffer status report to a base station.

예를 들어, 도 27 또는 도 28에 도시된 특정 베어러와 같이 하나 이상의 베어러가 분리되어 구성된 분리 베어러의 경우, 해당 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널들을 포함하는 논리채널그룹)에 대한 PDCP 버퍼크기 정보를 포함하는 버퍼 상태 정보를 별도로 기지국으로 전송할 수 있다. 일 예로, PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보는 MAC 제어요소(MAC Control element)를 통해 전달될 수 있다. 이를 위해서 별도의 LCID(Logical Channel ID) 값이 정의될 수도 있다. 별도의 LCID 값은 도 31에 예시적으로 도시된 바와 같이 정의될 수 있다.For example, in the case of a split bearer in which one or more bearers are separated, such as a specific bearer illustrated in FIG. 27 or 28, a PDCP for a logical channel (or a logical channel group including logical channels) mapped to the split bearer The buffer status information including the buffer size information may be separately transmitted to the base station. For example, the PDCP buffer status information may be delivered through a MAC control element. For this purpose, a separate Logical Channel ID (LCID) value may be defined. The separate LCID value may be defined as exemplarily shown in FIG. 31.

도 31은 본 발명의 다른 실시예에 따른 UL-SCH를 위한 LCID 값의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.31 is a diagram illustrating an example of an LCID value for UL-SCH according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 31과 같이 단말은 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보를 제 1 기지국 및/또는 제 2 기지국으로 전송할 수 있다. 따라서, PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보가 중복되어 버퍼 상태 리포트에 포함되지 않고 별도로 전송됨으로써 정확한 이용 가능 데이터양에 대한 정보를 전달할 수 있다. As shown in FIG. 31, the terminal may transmit PDCP buffer status information to the first base station and / or the second base station. Accordingly, the PDCP buffer status information is duplicated and transmitted separately without being included in the buffer status report, thereby delivering information on the exact amount of available data.

일 예로, PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보는 MAC 제어 요소에 포함되어 제 1 기지국 및/또는 제 2 기지국으로 전송될 수 있다. 구체적으로, PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보 MAC 제어 요소(MAC control elements)의 포맷은 PDCP Short BSR 포맷, PDCP Truncated BSR, PDCP Long BSR 포맷으로 구분될 수 있다. 즉, PDCP 버퍼 상태 보고는 BSR 포맷을 사용하여 전송될 수 있으며, 특정 인덱스를 사용하여 기존의 BSR과 구분될 수 있다.For example, the PDCP buffer status information may be included in the MAC control element and transmitted to the first base station and / or the second base station. Specifically, the format of the PDCP buffer status information MAC control elements may be classified into a PDCP Short BSR format, a PDCP Truncated BSR, and a PDCP Long BSR format. That is, the PDCP buffer status report can be transmitted using the BSR format, and can be distinguished from the existing BSR using a specific index.

도 32는 각 PDCP BSR MAC control element 포맷의 일 예를 도시한 도면이다.32 is a diagram illustrating an example of each PDCP BSR MAC control element format.

도 32를 참조하면, 단말은 제 1 기지국 및/또는 제 2 기지국으로 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보를 전송할 수 있다. 이 경우 단말은 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보를 BSR 포맷을 사용하여 전송할 수 있다. 기존의 BSR과 구분하기 위해서 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보만을 포함하여 전송되는 BSR은 도 31과 같이 별도의 인덱스로 구분될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 32, the terminal may transmit PDCP buffer status information to the first base station and / or the second base station. In this case, the terminal may transmit the PDCP buffer status information using the BSR format. In order to distinguish it from the existing BSR, a BSR transmitted including only PDCP buffer status information may be divided into separate indexes as shown in FIG. 31.

구체적으로 예를 들어, PDCP Short BSR/PDCP Truncated BSR포맷(3200)은 도 32와 같이 하나의 논리채널그룹ID(Logical channel group ID, LCG ID)필드와 하나의 상응하는 버퍼 사이즈 필드로 구성된다. 논리채널그룹 ID 필드는 버퍼 상태 정보가 리포트 될 논리채널 그룹을 식별하는 필드로 2 비트 길이로 구성될 수 있다.More specifically, for example, the PDCP Short BSR / PDCP Truncated BSR format 3200 includes one Logical Channel Group ID (LCG ID) field and one corresponding buffer size field as shown in FIG. 32. The logical channel group ID field is a field for identifying a logical channel group for which buffer status information is to be reported, and may be configured in 2-bit length.

한편, 도 32 같이 PDCP Long BSR 포맷은 각 LCG ID들 #0 ~ #3에 상응하는 네 개의 버퍼사이즈 필드(3210, 3220, 3230)로 구성될 수 있다. 도 32에서 버퍼사이즈는 6개의 비트로 구성된 것을 예시하였지만, PDCP BSR에 대해서는 기존 BSR과 다른 레벨을 적용하여 6개의 비트보다 적은 값으로 설계될 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 8개의 인덱스를 가질 수 있는 3개 비트 또는 16개의 인덱스를 가질 수 있는 4개 비트, 32개의 인덱스를 가질 수 있는 5개 비트 등으로 설계될 수도 있다. 32, the PDCP Long BSR format may include four buffer size fields 3210, 3220, and 3230 corresponding to LCG IDs # 0 to # 3. Although FIG. 32 illustrates that the buffer size is composed of six bits, the PDCP BSR may be designed with a value smaller than six bits by applying a level different from the existing BSR. For example, it may be designed with three bits that can have eight indices, four bits that can have sixteen indices, five bits that can have thirty-two indexes, and the like.

일 예로, 도 32의 버퍼사이즈 필드는 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통한 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 베어러 분리 논리채널들을 포함하는 논리채널그룹)에 대한 PDCP 계층에서 이용 가능한 데이터의 총 양에 대한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. As an example, the buffer size field of FIG. 32 is the total amount of data available in the PDCP layer for a logical channel (or logical channel group containing bearer split logical channels) mapped to split bearers through a first base station and a second base station. It may include information about.

이 경우, PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보를 수신한 기지국은 각각의 기지국을 통해 처리될 수 있는 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 추정할 수 있다. 이에 대한 일 예로 기지국은 단말 내의 PDCP 계층(또는 개체)에서 제 1 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층(또는 개체)과 제 2 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층(또는 개체)으로의 분배비율을 곱해 각각의 기지국을 통해 처리될 수 있는 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 산출할 수 있다. 즉, PDCP 계층의 총 이용 가능 데이터양을 분배비율에 따라서 분배하여 각 기지국에서 처리되어야 하는 PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보를 확인할 수 있다. 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국 각각은 RLC 계층과 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 합산하여 산출된 기존 버퍼 상태 리포트(short BSR 또는 Truncated BSR 또는 Long BSR)에서 전술한 각 기지국에서 처리되어야 하는 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보의 값을 차감함으로써 각 기지국의 RLC 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 확인할 수 있다. 따라서 각 기지국은 전술한 기지국 별 RLC 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양과 분배비율에 따라서 분배된 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 합산하여 각 기지국을 통해서 업링크 전송될 이용 가능 데이터양을 확인할 수 있다. 각 기지국은 전술한 방법으로 각 기지국을 통해 스케줄링될 실제 업링크 무선자원(업링크 그랜트)을 산출하여 각 기지국을 통해 제공되어야 하는 업링크 무선자원을 할당할 수 있다. In this case, the base station receiving the PDCP buffer status information may estimate the amount of available data of the PDCP layer that can be processed through each base station. As an example, the base station multiplies each base station by multiplying the distribution ratio from the PDCP layer (or entity) in the terminal to the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the first base station and the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the second base station. It is possible to calculate the amount of available data of the PDCP layer that can be processed through. That is, the total available data amount of the PDCP layer can be distributed according to the distribution ratio to check buffer state information of the PDCP layer to be processed at each base station. Each of the first base station and the second base station has a PDCP buffer state to be processed in each base station described above in an existing buffer status report (short BSR or Truncated BSR or Long BSR) calculated by summing the available data amounts of the RLC layer and the PDCP layer. By subtracting the value of the information, the amount of available data of the RLC layer of each base station can be confirmed. Accordingly, each base station can determine the amount of available data to be transmitted uplink through each base station by adding the available data amount of the RLC layer for each base station and the available data amount of the distributed PDCP layer according to the distribution ratio. Each base station may calculate an actual uplink radio resource (uplink grant) to be scheduled through each base station in the above-described manner and allocate uplink radio resources that should be provided through each base station.

전술한 단말 내 PDCP 계층(또는 개체)에서 제 1 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층(또는 개체)과 제 2 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층(또는 개체)으로의 분배비율은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간에 정적으로 사전 설정될 수 있다. 예를 들어 제 1 기지국이 제 2 기지국과의 시그널링을 통해 단말에 분리 베어러를 위한 이중 연결을 구성할 때 설정될 수 있다. 또는, 무선 품질에 따라 동적으로 변경되어 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간의 인터페이스를 통한 시그널링을 통해 주기적으로 또는 특정 이벤트에 따라 교환될 수도 있다. 분배비율을 동적으로 산출하는 경우 이를 산출하는 산출주기, 분배비율을 변경하는 변경주기 및 인터페이스 시그널링을 위한 트리거 조건 중 하나 이상의 정보도 함께 교환될 수 있다. 단말 내 PDCP 계층(또는 개체)에서 제 1 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층(또는 개체)과 제 2 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층(또는 개체)으로의 분배비율이 동적으로 변경되는 경우, 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국은 이 정보를 RRC 시그널링 또는 MAC 시그널링을 통해 단말에 제공할 수 있다.The distribution ratio from the PDCP layer (or entity) in the terminal to the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the first base station and the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the second base station is static between the first base station and the second base station. Can be preset. For example, the first base station may be configured when configuring a dual connection for a split bearer in the terminal through signaling with the second base station. Or, it may be dynamically changed according to radio quality and exchanged periodically or according to a specific event through signaling through an interface between the first base station and the second base station. When the distribution ratio is dynamically calculated, one or more information of a calculation cycle for calculating the distribution ratio, a change cycle for changing the distribution ratio, and a trigger condition for interface signaling may be exchanged together. When the distribution ratio from the PDCP layer (or entity) in the terminal to the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the first base station and the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the second base station is dynamically changed, the first base station or the first 2 The base station may provide this information to the terminal through RRC signaling or MAC signaling.

다른 예로, 도 32의 버퍼사이즈 필드는 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통한 분리 베어러의 논리채널(또는 베어러 분리 논리채널들을 포함하는 논리채널그룹)에 대한 PDCP 계층에서 이용 가능한 데이터의 총 양을 산출하기 위한 비율 정보를 포함할 수 있다.As another example, the buffer size field of FIG. 32 calculates the total amount of data available in the PDCP layer for the logical channel (or logical channel group including bearer split logical channels) of the split bearer over the first base station and the second base station. It may include ratio information for.

이 경우, PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보를 수신한 기지국은 RLC 계층과 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 합산하여 산출된 기존 BSR(short BSR 또는 Truncated BSR 또는 Long BSR)에서 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터의 총 양을 산출하기 위한 비율을 곱하여 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터의 총 양을 산출할 수 있다. 이후, 기지국은 RLC 계층과 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 합산하여 산출된 기존 BSR(short BSR 또는 Truncated BSR 또는 Long BSR)에서 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 차감하여 RLC 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 알 수 있다. 따라서 각 기지국을 통해 처리되어야 하는 RLC 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양과 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 합산함으로써 각 기지국을 통해 스케줄링될 실제 업링크 무선자원(업링크 그랜트)을 산출할 수 있다. 업링크 무선자원을 산출한 각 기지국은 각각의 기지국을 통해 제공되어야 하는 업링크 무선자원을 할당할 수 있다. 전술한 단말 내 PDCP 계층(또는 개체)에서 제 1 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층(또는 개체)과 제 2 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층(또는 개체)으로의 분배비율은 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간에 정적으로 사전 설정될 수 있다. 예를 들어 제 1 기지국이 제 2 기지국과의 시그널링을 통해 단말에 분리 베어러를 위한 이중 연결을 구성할 때 설정될 수 있다. 또는, 무선 품질에 따라 동적으로 변경되어 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국 간의 인터페이스를 통한 시그널링을 통해 주기적으로 또는 특정 이벤트에 따라 교환될 수도 있다. 분배비율을 동적으로 산출하는 경우 이를 산출하는 산출주기, 분배비율을 변경하는 변경주기 및 인터페이스 시그널링을 위한 트리거 조건 중 하나 이상의 정보도 함께 교환될 수 있다. 단말 내 PDCP 계층(또는 개체)에서 제 1 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층(또는 개체)과 제 2 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층(또는 개체)으로의 분배비율이 동적으로 변경되는 경우, 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국은 이 정보를 RRC 시그널링 또는 MAC 시그널링을 통해 단말에 제공할 수 있다. In this case, the base station receiving the PDCP buffer status information determines the total amount of available data of the PDCP layer from the existing BSR (short BSR or Truncated BSR or Long BSR), which is calculated by summing the available data amounts of the RLC layer and the PDCP layer. The total amount of available data of the PDCP layer may be calculated by multiplying the ratio to calculate. Thereafter, the base station subtracts the available data amount of the RCP layer from the existing BSR (short BSR or Truncated BSR or Long BSR) calculated by summing the available data amounts of the RLC layer and the PDCP layer. Able to know. Therefore, by adding the available data amount of the RLC layer and the available data amount of the PDCP layer to be processed through each base station, it is possible to calculate the actual uplink radio resource (uplink grant) to be scheduled through each base station. Each base station that calculates an uplink radio resource may allocate an uplink radio resource to be provided through each base station. The distribution ratio from the PDCP layer (or entity) in the terminal to the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the first base station and the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the second base station is static between the first base station and the second base station. Can be preset. For example, the first base station may be configured when configuring a dual connection for a split bearer in the terminal through signaling with the second base station. Or, it may be dynamically changed according to radio quality and exchanged periodically or according to a specific event through signaling through an interface between the first base station and the second base station. When the distribution ratio is dynamically calculated, one or more information of a calculation cycle for calculating the distribution ratio, a change cycle for changing the distribution ratio, and a trigger condition for interface signaling may be exchanged together. When the distribution ratio from the PDCP layer (or entity) in the terminal to the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the first base station and the RLC layer (or entity) peered to the second base station is dynamically changed, the first base station or the first 2 The base station may provide this information to the terminal through RRC signaling or MAC signaling.

이와 같이 제 1 실시예에서 단말은 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양과 관련한 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보를 기존의 BSR과는 별도로 전송할 수 있다.As described above, in the first embodiment, the UE may transmit PDCP buffer status information related to the amount of available data of the PDCP layer separately from the existing BSR.

제 2 실시예: 단말이 분배비율에 따라 기지국별 이용 가능한 데이터를 산출하여 전송하는 방법.Second embodiment: A method for a terminal to calculate and transmit available data for each base station according to a distribution ratio.

도 27 또는 도 28에 도시된 특정 베어러와 같이 하나 이상의 베어러가 분리 베어러로 구성된 경우, 전술한 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널그룹)에 대한 이용 가능한 데이터양을 기지국 별로 구분해 산출하여 기존 BSR(short BSR 또는 Truncated BSR 또는 Long BSR) MAC CE를 통해 리포팅하도록 할 수 있다. When one or more bearers, such as the specific bearer illustrated in FIG. 27 or 28, are configured as separate bearers, the amount of data available for the logical channel (or logical channel group) mapped to the aforementioned split bearer is calculated by classifying the base stations. Reporting can be made through existing BSR (short BSR or Truncated BSR or Long BSR) MAC CE.

이를 위해 단말은 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해 데이터를 처리하도록 구성된 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널그룹)에 대해서 PDCP 계층 내에서 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출할 때, 기존의 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양과 함께 개별 기지국으로의 분배비율을 고려하여 산출할 수 있다.To this end, the UE uses a bearer split user plane structure in a PDCP layer for a logical channel (or logical channel group) mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station. When calculating the available data amount, the available data amount of the existing PDCP layer can be calculated in consideration of the distribution ratio to individual base stations.

일 예로, 단말은 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해(또는 하나 이상의 기지국을 통해) 데이터를 처리하도록 구성된 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널그룹)에 대해서 각각의 기지국 별로 수신된 해당 TTI에 업링크 그랜트 정보에 비례하여 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보(이용 가능 데이터양)을 산출할 수 있다. 또는, 단말은 이전 또는 최근 TTI 배수 기간 동안의 업링크 그랜트 평균에 기초하여 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보(이용 가능 데이터양)를 산출할 수도 있다. 즉, 기존의 해당 논리채널에 대한 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양에 각각의 기지국 별로 수신된 해당 TTI에 업링크 그랜트(또는 이전(최근) TTI 배수 기간 동안의 업링크 그랜트 평균값) 비율을 곱하여 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보를 산출할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제 1 기지국 업링크 그랜트가 a이고, 제 2 기지국 업링크 그랜트가 b일 경우 업링크 그랜트 비율인 a/(a+b)을 PDCP 계층의 전체 이용 가능 데이터양에 곱하여 제 1 기지국 PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보를 산출할 수 있다. 또는, 전술한 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보를 산출하는 방법에 있어서, 업링크 그랜트를 대신하여 다운링크 할당을 사용하거나 업링크 그랜트와 다운링크 할당을 합산하여 사용할 수 있다. 이를 위해 RRC 메시지 상에 무선자원구성전용 정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 논리채널 구성정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 MAC-MainConfig 구성정보에 각각의 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출하기 위한 TTI 주기정보 및/또는 이를 표시하기 위한 정보를 포함할 수도 있다. 또는, 단말에 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출하기 위한 전술한 정보가 사전 설정될 수도 있다.For example, the terminal may use a bearer split user plane structure to map a logical channel (or logic) to a split bearer configured to process data through the first base station and the second base station (or through one or more base stations). Channel state) can calculate the buffer state information (available data amount) of the PDCP layer for each base station (or for each cell group) in proportion to the uplink grant information received in the corresponding TTI for each base station. Alternatively, the terminal may calculate buffer state information (available data amount) of the PDCP layer for each base station (or for each cell group) based on an uplink grant average during a previous or recent TTI multiple period. That is, each base station is multiplied by the ratio of the available data of the PDCP layer for the corresponding logical channel by the ratio of the uplink grant (or the average of the uplink grants during the previous (most recent) TTI multiple times) to the corresponding TTI received for each base station. Buffer status information of the star (or cell group) PDCP layer may be calculated. For example, when the first base station uplink grant is a and the second base station uplink grant is b, the uplink grant ratio a / (a + b) is multiplied by the total amount of available data in the PDCP layer to give the first base station. Buffer status information of the PDCP layer may be calculated. Alternatively, in the above-described method for calculating buffer status information of each base station (or cell group) PDCP layer, the downlink allocation may be used in place of the uplink grant or the uplink grant and the downlink allocation may be added together. have. To this end, each base station (or cell group) PDCP is included in the RRC message in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may include TTI period information for calculating the available data amount of the layer and / or information for indicating the same. Alternatively, the above-described information for calculating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer in the terminal may be preset.

다른 예로, 단말은 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해(또는 하나 이상의 기지국을 통해) 데이터를 처리하도록 구성된 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널그룹)에 대해서 각 기지국 별로 MAC-MainConfig 정보 요소(information element)에 포함된 periodicBSR-Timer 동안의 업링크 그랜트에 비례하여 PDCP 계층의 각 기지국 별 버퍼 상태 정보(이용 가능 데이터양)을 산출할 수 있다. 또는, 단말은 MAC-MainConfig information element에 포함된 retxBSR-Timer 동안의 업링크 그랜트에 비례하여 PDCP 계층의 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) 버퍼 상태 정보(이용 가능 데이터양)을 산출할 수 있다. 또는, 단말은 RRC 메시지 상에 비율을 산출하기 위해 필요한 새로운 정보(일 예로, 산출주기)를 수신하여 해당 정보에 따라 산출된 업링크 그랜트에 비례하여 PDCP 계층의 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) 버퍼 상태 정보(이용 가능 데이터양)을 산출할 수 있다. 즉, 기존의 해당 논리채널에 대한 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양에 각 기지국별 periodicBSR-Timer 동안 또는 retxBSR-Timer 동안의 업링크 그랜트 비율을 곱하여 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 산출할 수 있다. 구체적으로 산출방법의 예를 들면, 전술한 기간 동안의 제 1 기지국 업링크 그랜트가 a이고 제 2 기지국 업링크 그랜트가 b인 경우에 a/(a+b)의 비율을 PDCP 계층의 전체 이용 가능 데이터양에 곱하여 제 1 기지국의 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 산출할 수 있다. 또는, 위에서 언급한 업링크 그랜트를 대신하여 다운링크 할당을 사용하거나 업링크 그랜트와 다운링크 할당을 합산하여 사용할 수도 있다. 이를 위해 RRC 메시지 상에 무선자원구성전용 정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 논리채널 구성정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 MAC-MainConfig 구성정보에 각각의 기지국 별(셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출하기 위한 주기정보 및/또는 이를 표시하기 위한 정보를 포함할 수도 있다. 또는, 단말에 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출하기 위한 전술한 정보가 사전 설정될 수도 있다.As another example, the terminal may use a bearer split user plane structure to map a logical channel (or logic) to a split bearer configured to process data through the first base station and the second base station (or through one or more base stations). Channel status) can calculate buffer status information (available data amount) for each base station of the PDCP layer in proportion to the uplink grant during periodicBSR-Timer included in the MAC-MainConfig information element for each base station. have. Alternatively, the terminal may calculate buffer state information (available data amount) for each base station (or cell group) of the PDCP layer in proportion to the uplink grant during the retxBSR-Timer included in the MAC-MainConfig information element. Alternatively, the terminal receives new information (eg, a calculation cycle) necessary for calculating a ratio on the RRC message and is proportional to each base station (or cell group) of the PDCP layer in proportion to an uplink grant calculated according to the corresponding information. Buffer status information (available data amount) can be calculated. That is, the available amount of data of the PDCP layer for the corresponding logical channel is multiplied by the uplink grant rate during periodicBSR-Timer or retxBSR-Timer for each base station to enable the use of the PDCP layer for each base station (or cell group). The amount of data can be calculated. Specifically, as an example of the calculation method, when the first base station uplink grant is a and the second base station uplink grant is b for the above-described period, the ratio of a / (a + b) is fully available to the PDCP layer. The amount of available data of the PDCP layer of the first base station may be calculated by multiplying the amount of data. Alternatively, the downlink allocation may be used in place of the above-mentioned uplink grant, or the uplink grant and the downlink allocation may be combined. To this end, each base station (per cell group) PDCP layer is included in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information on the RRC message. May include periodic information for calculating the amount of available data and / or information for indicating the amount of available data. Alternatively, the above-described information for calculating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer in the terminal may be preset.

전술한 각 기지국 별 MAC-MainConfig 정보 요소는 단말에 이중 연결이 구성될 때 각 기지국 또는 각 셀그룹을 위한 MAC 개체에 대한 개별 구성 파라메터를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어 세컨더리 기지국 MAC-MainConfig(MAC-MainConfigSeNB 또는 MAC-MainConfigSCG)은 마스터 기지국 MAC-MainConfig내에 포함되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 타이머들(예를 들어 periodicBSR-Timer 및/또는 retxBSR-Timer)과 독립적인 버퍼 상태 리포트 타이머들을 포함할 수 있다.The above-described MAC-MainConfig information element for each base station may include individual configuration parameters for the MAC entity for each base station or each cell group when dual connectivity is configured for the terminal. For example, the secondary base station MAC-MainConfig (MAC-MainConfigSeNB or MAC-MainConfigSCG) is a buffer state independent of the buffer status report timers (eg periodicBSR-Timer and / or retxBSR-Timer) contained within the master base station MAC-MainConfig. May include report timers.

또 다른 예로, 단말은 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해(또는 하나 이상의 기지국을 통해) 데이터를 처리하도록 구성된 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널그룹)에 대해서 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별)로 기존의 해당 논리채널에 대한 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 균등하게 배분하여 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보(이용 가능 데이터양)를 산출할 수 있다. 이를 위해 RRC 메시지 상에 무선자원구성전용 정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 논리채널 구성정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 MAC-MainConfig 구성정보에 각각의 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출하기 위한 정보 및/또는 이를 표시하기 위한 정보를 포함할 수도 있다. 또는, 단말에 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출하기 위한 전술한 정보가 사전 설정될 수도 있다.As another example, the terminal may be configured to process a logical channel (or mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station (or through one or more base stations) using a bearer split user plane structure. Buffer status information of PDCP layer by each base station (or cell group) by equally allocating available data amount of PDCP layer for existing logical channel for each base station (or cell group) (Amount of available data) can be calculated. To this end, each base station (or cell group) PDCP is included in the RRC message in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may also include information for calculating the amount of available data of the layer and / or information for indicating it. Alternatively, the above-described information for calculating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer in the terminal may be preset.

또 다른 예로, 단말은 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해(또는 하나 이상의 기지국을 통해) 데이터를 처리하도록 구성된 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널그룹)에 대해서 단말과 각각의 기지국 간 무선품질 상태 또는 RRM 측정정보 등을 기반으로 산출한 비율에 기초하여 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보(이용 가능 데이터양)를 산출할 수 있다. 즉, 무선품질 상태 또는 RRM 측정정보에 비례 또는 반비례하여 해당 논리채널에 대한 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 배분하여 각각의 기지국별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 산출할 수 있다. 이를 위해 RRC 메시지 상에 무선자원구성전용 정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 논리채널 구성정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 MAC-MainConfig 구성정보에 각각의 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출하기 위한 정보, 측정주기, 측정이벤트, 이를 표시하기 위한 정보 중 하나 이상의 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는, 단말에 전술한 정보가 사전 설정될 수 있다.As another example, the terminal may be configured to process a logical channel (or mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station (or through one or more base stations) using a bearer split user plane structure. Calculate PDCP buffer status information (available data amount) for each base station (or cell group) based on a ratio calculated based on radio quality status or RRM measurement information between a terminal and each base station for a logical channel group). can do. That is, the amount of available data of each base station (or cell group) PDCP layer can be calculated by allocating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer for the corresponding logical channel in proportion to or inversely proportional to the radio quality state or RRM measurement information. have. To this end, each base station (or cell group) PDCP is included in the RRC message in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may include one or more of information for calculating the amount of available data of the layer, measurement period, measurement event, information for displaying it. Alternatively, the above-described information may be preset in the terminal.

또 다른 예로, 단말은 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해(또는 하나 이상의 기지국을 통해) 데이터를 처리하도록 구성된 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널그룹)에 대해서 단말과 각각의 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양 정보에 기초하여 산출할 수도 있다. 즉, 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국 각각에 피어링된 RLC 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양 정보에 비례 또는 반비례하여 해당 논리채널에 대한 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 배분하여 각 기지국 별 PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보(이용 가능 데이터양)를 산출할 수도 있다. 이를 위해 RRC 메시지 상에 무선자원구성전용 정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 논리채널 구성정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 MAC-MainConfig 구성정보에 각각의 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출하기 위한 정보 및/또는 이를 표시하기 위한 정보를 포함할 수도 있다. 또는, 단말에 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출하기 위한 전술한 정보가 사전 설정될 수도 있다.As another example, the terminal may use a bearer split user plane structure to map a logical channel (or to a split bearer configured to process data through the first base station and the second base station (or through one or more base stations). Logical channel group) may be calculated based on available data amount information of the RLC layer peered to the terminal and each base station. That is, buffer status information of the PDCP layer for each base station is allocated by allocating the available data amount of the PDCP layer for the corresponding logical channel in proportion to or inversely proportional to the available data amount information of the RLC layer peered to each of the first base station and the second base station. (Amount of data available) can also be calculated. To this end, each base station (or cell group) PDCP is included in the RRC message in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may also include information for calculating the amount of available data of the layer and / or information for indicating it. Alternatively, the above-described information for calculating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer in the terminal may be preset.

또 다른 예로, 단말은 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국과 제 2 기지국을 통해(또는 하나 이상의 기지국을 통해) 데이터를 처리하도록 구성된 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널그룹)에 대해서 각각의 기지국 별로(또는 셀그룹별로) 기존의 해당 논리채널에 대한 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 배분하기 위한 비율 정보 또는 배분하기 위한 방법 정보를 수신하여 각 기지국 별 PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보(이용 가능 데이터양)를 산출할 수 있다. 구체적으로 예를 들면, 단말은 전술한 비율 정보 또는 배분 방법 정보 등을 RRC 연결이 설정된 제 1 기지국(마스터 기지국)을 통해 수신할 수 있다. 또는, 단말은 전술한 비율 정보 또는 배분 방법 정보 등을 RRC 연결이 설정된 제 1 기지국(마스터 기지국)에 의해 확인을 받은 제 2 기지국(세컨더리 기지국)을 통해 수신할 수도 있다. 또는 단말은 전술한 비율 정보 또는 배분 방법 정보 등을 제 1 기지국을 통해서 수신하되, 해당 정보는 제 1 기지국을 지원하는 제 2 기지국이 제 1 기지국을 통해서 전송한 것일 수도 있다. 이를 위해 RRC 메시지 상에 무선자원구성전용 정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 논리채널 구성정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 MAC-MainConfig 구성정보에 각각의 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출하기 위한 비율 정보 및/또는 이를 표시하기 위한 정보를 포함할 수도 있다. 또는, 단말에 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능한 데이터양을 산출하기 위한 전술한 정보가 사전 설정될 수도 있다. 또는, 전술한 비율 정보 등은 새로운 MAC 제어요소가 정의되어 수신될 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 새롭게 정의되는 MAC 제어요소는 RRC 연결이 설정된 제 1 기지국을 통해(또는 제 2 기지국의 확인을 받아 제 1 기지국을 통해) 또는 RRC 연결이 설정된 제 1 기지국에 의해 확인을 받은 제 1 기지국을 지원하는 제 2 기지국을 통해 또는 제 1 기지국을 지원하는 제 2 기지국을 통해 단말로 전송될 수도 있다.As another example, the terminal may be configured to process a logical channel (or mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station (or through one or more base stations) using a bearer split user plane structure. PDCP layer for each base station by receiving ratio information for distributing available data amount of PDCP layer or method information for distributing for each base station (or for each cell group) The buffer status information (available data amount) of can be calculated. In more detail, for example, the terminal may receive the aforementioned ratio information or distribution method information through a first base station (master base station) in which an RRC connection is established. Alternatively, the terminal may receive the aforementioned ratio information or distribution method information through a second base station (secondary base station) confirmed by the first base station (master base station) in which the RRC connection is established. Alternatively, the terminal may receive the aforementioned ratio information or distribution method information through the first base station, and the corresponding information may be transmitted by the second base station supporting the first base station through the first base station. To this end, each base station (or cell group) PDCP is included in the RRC message in the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information or the radio resource configuration-only information or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may also include ratio information for calculating the amount of available data of the layer and / or information for indicating it. Alternatively, the above-described information for calculating the amount of available data of the PDCP layer in the terminal may be preset. Alternatively, the aforementioned ratio information may be received with a new MAC control element defined. For example, the newly defined MAC control element may be a first base station established through an RRC connection (or a first base station confirmed by a second base station) or a first base station confirmed by a first base station with an RRC connection established. The terminal may be transmitted through a second base station supporting the base station or through a second base station supporting the first base station.

단말은 기지국으로부터 수신된 비율정보에 기반하여 단말 내 PDCP 계층에서 각 기지국의 RLC 개체에 매핑되는 단말 내 RLC 개체로 데이터(PDU)를 전달/제출할 수 있다.The terminal may transmit / submit data (PDU) from the PDCP layer in the terminal to the RLC entity in the terminal mapped to the RLC entity of each base station based on the ratio information received from the base station.

이상에서 예를 들어 설명한 각 방법에 의해서 단말은 각 기지국 별 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보를 산출할 수 있다. 단말은 산출된 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보를 각 기지국에 피어링된 RLC 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양과 합산하여 각 기지국으로 버퍼 상태 리포트를 전송할 수 있다. 즉, 제 2 실시예에서는 PDCP 버퍼 상태 보고가 별도로 전송되는 것이 아닌 기존의 버퍼 상태 리포트(BSR)에 포함되어 전송된다. 다만, 각 기지국 별로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에 포함되는 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보는 전술한 각 방법에 의해서 각 기지국별로 나누어 산출된 정보이다. 단말 내 각 기지국 별(또는 셀그룹별) MAC 개체는 각 기지국으로 버퍼 상태 리포트를 전송할 수 있다.By the above-described methods, the terminal may calculate PDCP buffer status information for each base station. The terminal may add the calculated PDCP buffer status information for each base station (or cell group) with the available data amount of the RLC layer peered to each base station and transmit a buffer status report to each base station. That is, in the second embodiment, the PDCP buffer status report is included in the existing buffer status report (BSR) and not transmitted separately. However, PDCP buffer status information included in the buffer status report transmitted for each base station is information calculated by dividing each base station by each method described above. The MAC entity for each base station (or for each cell group) in the terminal may transmit a buffer status report to each base station.

따라서 각각의 기지국은 각 기지국을 통해 처리되어야 하는 이용 가능 데이터양을 BSR을 통해 수신하게 됨으로 수신된 BSR의 버퍼사이즈 정보에 맞춰 효율적으로 업링크 무선자원을 할당할 수 있으며, PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보의 중복 전송에 대한 문제점을 해결할 수 있다.Therefore, each base station receives the amount of available data to be processed through each base station through the BSR, which can efficiently allocate uplink radio resources according to the buffer size information of the received BSR, and buffer status information of the PDCP layer. It can solve the problem of duplicate transmission of.

제 3 실시예: 각 기지국 별로 이용 가능 데이터 산출방법을 달리하여 리포팅하는 방법.Third embodiment: A method of reporting different data calculation methods available for each base station.

도 27 또는 도 28에 도시된 특정 베어러와 같이 하나 이상의 베어러가 분리 베어러로 구성된 경우, 전술한 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널그룹)에 대한 이용 가능한 데이터양을 기지국 별로 산출방법을 달리하여 기존 BSR(short BSR 또는 Truncated BSR 또는 Long BSR) MAC CE를 통해 통해서 리포팅하도록 할 수 있다.When one or more bearers, such as the specific bearer illustrated in FIG. 27 or 28, are configured as separate bearers, a method of calculating the amount of available data for a logical channel (or logical channel group) mapped to the aforementioned split bearer differs for each base station. It can be reported through the existing BSR (short BSR or Truncated BSR or Long BSR) MAC CE.

일 예로, 단말은 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통해 데이터를 처리하도록 구성된 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널그룹)에 대해서, 제 1 기지국(또는 마스터 셀그룹 또는 또는 제 1 기지국 MAC 개체 또는 제 1 기지국 MAC 개체에 피어링 된 단말 내 제 1 기지국 MAC 개체)을 통한 이용 가능 데이터양은 기존의 이용 가능 데이터양 산출 방법을 이용할 수 있다. 즉, 단말은 제 1 기지국을 통한 이용 가능 데이터양으로 단말 내의 기존의 해당 논리채널에 대한 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양과 제 1 기지국을 위한 RLC 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 합산하여 BSR 리포팅을 할 수 있다. 그리고 단말은 제 2 기지국(또는 세컨더리 셀그룹 또는 제 2 기지국 MAC 개체 또는 제 2 기지국 MAC 개체에 피어링 된 단말 내 제 2 기지국 MAC 개체)을 통한 이용 가능 데이터양으로 단말 내의 제 2 기지국을 위한 RLC 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 이용하여 BSR 리포팅을 할 수 있다. 즉, 제 2 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트는 PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보(이용 가능 데이터양)를 포함하지 않을 수 있다. 단말은 무선상황(품질)에 따라 이를 결정하거나 RRC 연결이 설정된 제 1 기지국을 통해 해당 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널에 대한 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 제 1 기지국을 통한 이용 가능 데이터양에 합산하도록 표시하기 위한 정보를 수신하여 구성(처리)할 수 있다. 이를 위해서 기지국에서 단말로 전송되는 메시지는 RRC 메시지 또는 MAC CE가 이용될 수 있다. 단말이 분리 베어러에 대해 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 제 1 기지국을 통한 이용 가능 데이터양에 포함하도록 구성되는 경우, 단말은 해당 분리 베어러에 대한 PDCP PDU를 제 1 기지국 RLC 개체에 피어링된 단말 내 RLC 개체로만 제출할 수 있다. 즉 해당 베어러에 대한 업링크 데이터를 제 1 기지국을 통해서만 전송하도록 할 수 있다. For example, the terminal may be configured to include a first logical channel (or logical channel group) mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station by using a bearer split user plane structure. The amount of available data through the base station (or the master cell group or the first base station MAC entity or the first base station MAC entity in the terminal peered to the first base station MAC entity) may use the existing available data amount calculation method. That is, the UE may perform BSR reporting by summing the available data amount of the PDCP layer and the available data amount of the RLC layer for the first base station with the available data amount through the first base station. have. And the terminal is an RLC layer for the second base station in the terminal with the amount of available data through the second base station (or the secondary cell group or the second base station MAC entity or the second base station MAC entity in the terminal peered to the second base station MAC entity). The BSR reporting can be performed using the available data amount of. That is, the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station may not include the buffer status information (available data amount) of the PDCP layer. The UE determines this according to radio conditions (quality) or adds the available data amount of the PDCP layer for the logical channel mapped to the corresponding split bearer through the first base station where the RRC connection is established to the amount of available data through the first base station. Information for display may be received and configured (processed). For this purpose, the RRC message or the MAC CE may be used for the message transmitted from the base station to the terminal. If the terminal is configured to include the amount of available data of the PDCP layer for the split bearer in the amount of available data through the first base station, the terminal includes the PDCP PDU for the split bearer in the terminal peered to the first base station RLC entity. It can only be submitted as an RLC entity. That is, the uplink data for the bearer may be transmitted only through the first base station.

다른 예로, 단말은 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통해 데이터를 처리하도록 구성된 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널(또는 논리채널그룹)에 대해서, 제 2 기지국 (또는 세컨더리 셀그룹 또는 또는 제 2 기지국 MAC 개체 또는 제 2 기지국 MAC 개체에 피어링 된 단말 내 제 2 기지국 MAC 개체)을 통한 이용 가능 데이터양은 기존의 이용 가능 데이터양 산출 방법을 이용할 수 있다. 즉, 단말은 제 2 기지국을 통한 이용 가능 데이터양으로 단말 내의 기존의 해당 논리채널에 대한 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양과 제 2 기지국을 위한 RLC 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 합산하여 BSR 리포팅을 할 수 있다. 그리고 단말은 제 1 기지국을 통한 이용 가능 데이터양으로 단말 내의 제 1 기지국을 위한 RLC 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 이용하여 BSR 리포팅을 할 수 있다. 즉, 제 1 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트는 PDCP 계층의 버퍼 상태 정보(이용 가능 데이터양)를 포함하지 않을 수 있다. 단말은 무선상황(품질)에 따라 이를 결정하거나 RRC 연결이 설정된 제 1 기지국을 통해(또는 제 2 기지국의 확인을 받아 제 1 기지국을 통해) 또는 RRC 연결이 설정된 제 1 기지국에 의해 확인을 받은 제 1 기지국을 지원하는 제 2 기지국을 통해 또는 제 1 기지국을 지원하는 제 2 기지국이 제 1 기지국을 통해 해당 논리채널에 대한 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 제 2 기지국을 통한 이용 가능 데이터양에 합산하도록 표시하기 위한 정보를 수신하여 구성(처리)할 수 있다. 이를 위해서 기지국에서 단말로 전송되는 메시지는 RRC 메시지에 새로운 정보를 포함하여 또는 새로운 MAC CE가 정의되어 이용될 수 있다. 단말이 분리 베어러에 대해 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 제 2 기지국을 통한 이용 가능 데이터양에 포함하도록 구성되는 경우, 단말은 해당 분리 베어러에 대한 PDCP PDU를 제 2 기지국 RLC 개체에 피어링된 단말 내 RLC 개체로만 제출할 수 있다. 즉 해당 베어러에 대한 업링크 데이터를 제 2 기지국을 통해서만 전송하도록 할 수 있다.As another example, the second terminal may be configured with respect to a logical channel (or logical channel group) mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station by using a bearer split user plane structure. The amount of available data through the base station (or the secondary cell group or the second base station MAC entity or the second base station MAC entity in the terminal peered to the second base station MAC entity) may use the existing available data amount calculation method. That is, the UE may perform BSR reporting by summing the available data amount of the PDCP layer and the available data amount of the RLC layer for the second base station with the available data amount through the second base station. have. The terminal may perform BSR reporting using the available data amount of the RLC layer for the first base station in the terminal as the amount of available data through the first base station. That is, the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station may not include the buffer status information (available data amount) of the PDCP layer. The UE determines this according to the radio condition (quality) or receives the confirmation by the first base station through which the RRC connection is established (or through the first base station by confirmation of the second base station) or by the first base station through which the RRC connection is established. The amount of available data of the PDCP layer for the corresponding logical channel is added to the amount of available data through the second base station through a second base station supporting one base station or a second base station supporting a first base station through the first base station. Information for display may be received and configured (processed). To this end, the message transmitted from the base station to the terminal may include new information in the RRC message or a new MAC CE may be defined and used. When the terminal is configured to include the amount of available data of the PDCP layer for the split bearer in the amount of available data through the second base station, the terminal includes the PDCP PDU for the split bearer in the terminal peered to the second base station RLC entity. You can only submit as an RLC entity. That is, the uplink data for the bearer may be transmitted only through the second base station.

또 다른 예로, 단말은 베어러 분리(Bearer split)된 사용자 플레인 구조를 이용하여 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국을 통해(또는 하나 이상의 기지국들을 통해) 데이터를 처리하도록 구성된 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널에 대해서 단말과 각각의 기지국간 무선품질 상태 또는 RRM 측정정보 등을 기반으로 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 우선 할당할 기지국을 선택할 수 있다. 이를 위해 RRC 메시지 상에 무선자원구성전용 정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 논리채널 구성정보 또는 무선자원구성전용 정보에 포함되는 MAC-MainConfig 구성정보에 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양을 우선 할당할 기지국 정보, 우선 할당할 기지국을 선택하기 위한 정보, 측정주기, 측정이벤트 및 이를 표시하기 위한 정보 중 하나 이상의 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또는 단말에 전술한 정보가 사전 설정될 수도 있다.As another example, the terminal may be configured for a logical channel mapped to a split bearer configured to process data through a first base station and a second base station (or through one or more base stations) using a bearer split user plane structure. A base station to first allocate the available data amount of the PDCP layer may be selected based on radio quality status or RRM measurement information between the terminal and each base station. To this end, the amount of available data of the PDCP layer is first assigned to the RRC message to the logical channel configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information, the radio resource configuration-only information, or the MAC-MainConfig configuration information included in the radio resource configuration-only information. It may include one or more pieces of information of the base station information, information for selecting the base station to be assigned first, a measurement period, a measurement event and information for displaying the same. Alternatively, the above-described information may be preset in the terminal.

따라서 각각의 기지국은 각 기지국을 통해 처리되어야 하는 이용 가능 데이터양을 BSR을 통해 수신하게 됨으로 각 기지국은 요청된 버퍼사이즈에 맞춰 효율적으로 업링크 무선자원을 할당할 수 있다. 즉, PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보를 복수의 기지국 중 어느 하나의 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함함으로써 PDCP 버퍼 상태 정보가 기지국으로 중복하여 전송되는 문제를 해결할 수 있다.Thus, each base station receives the amount of available data to be processed through each base station through the BSR, so that each base station can efficiently allocate uplink radio resources according to the requested buffer size. That is, by including the PDCP buffer status information only in the buffer status report transmitted to any one of the base stations, it is possible to solve the problem that the PDCP buffer status information is repeatedly transmitted to the base station.

이상에서 설명한 바와 같이 본 발명에 따르면 특정 베어러에 대해 서로 다른 기지국이 별도의 스케줄러를 통해 무선자원을 병합하여 데이터를 전송하도록 구성된 경우에도 각 기지국은 실제로 필요한 이용 가능 데이터양에 대해서만 무선자원을 할당할 수 있어서, 무선자원을 효율적으로 할당하는 효과가 있다.As described above, according to the present invention, even when different base stations for a specific bearer are configured to transmit data by merging radio resources through separate schedulers, each base station may allocate radio resources only for the amount of available data actually needed. Thus, there is an effect of efficiently allocating radio resources.

이하에서는 전술한 각 실시예가 모두 수행될 수 있는 단말 및 기지국의 동작을 도면을 참조하여 다시 한 번 설명한다.Hereinafter, the operation of the terminal and the base station in which all the above-described embodiments can be performed will be described once again with reference to the drawings.

도 33은 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 단말의 동작을 도시한 흐름도이다.33 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 단말은 버퍼 상태 정보를 전송하는 방법에 있어서, 상위 계층 시그널링에 의해 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹을 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결되도록 구성하는 단계 및 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹의 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국으로 전송하는 단계를 포함할 수 있다.In a method for transmitting buffer status information, a terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention is configured to dually connect one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to a split bearer by higher layer signaling with a first base station and a second base station. And configuring the PDCP layer available data amount of one or more logical channels or logical channel groups to the first base station or the second base station.

도 33을 참조하면, 단말은 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 적어도 하나의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹에 대해서 이중 연결(Dual connectivity)을 구성할 수 있다(S3310). 즉, 단말은 도 27 및 도 28에 도시된 바와 같이 적어도 하나 이상의 기지국과 베어러를 구성할 수 있고, 하나 이상의 베어러는 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국에 분리되어 구성되도록 할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 33, the terminal may configure dual connectivity for at least one logical channel or logical channel group mapped to the split base bearer with the first base station and the second base station according to higher layer signaling (S3310). ). That is, the terminal may configure a bearer with at least one base station as illustrated in FIGS. 27 and 28, and the at least one bearer may be configured separately from the first base station and the second base station.

단말은 전술한 분리되어 구성된 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널 또는 해당 논리채널을 포함하는 논리채널그룹의 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국으로 전송할 수 있다(S3320).The UE may transmit the PDCP layer available data amount of the logical channel mapped to the above-described separated bearer or logical channel group including the corresponding logical channel to the first base station or the second base station (S3320).

단말은 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 전송함에 있어서, 전술한 실시예에 기존의 버퍼 상태 리포트에 포함하여 전송할 수 있다. 기존의 버퍼 상태 리포트에 포함되어 전송되는 경우에 제 3 실시예와 같이 어느 하나의 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함하여 전송할 수 있다.In transmitting the PDCP layer available data amount, the terminal may include the existing buffer status report in the above-described embodiment and transmit the same. When the transmission is included in the existing buffer status report, the transmission may be included only in the buffer status report transmitted to any one base station as in the third embodiment.

또한, 단말은 MAC개체에 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹을 구성함에 있어서, 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 기지국별 또는 셀그룹별 버퍼 상태 리포트(Buffer status report, BSR) 타이머를 포함하여 구성할 수도 있다.In addition, in configuring a logical channel or a logical channel group in a MAC object, the terminal may include a buffer status report (BSR) timer for each base station or cell group according to higher layer signaling.

일 예로, PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 제 1 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 또는 제 2 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 중 어느 하나의 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되어 전송될 수도 있다.For example, the PDCP layer available data amount may be included in only one of the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station or the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station according to higher layer signaling.

이와 같이 단말은 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국으로 중복되지 않도록 전송할 수 있고, 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국은 무선자원의 효율적인 할당이 가능하다.As such, the terminal may transmit the PDCP layer available data amount so as not to overlap with the first base station or the second base station, and the first base station and the second base station can efficiently allocate radio resources.

도 34는 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 기지국의 동작을 도시한 흐름도이다.34 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

본 발명의 다른 실시예에 따른 제 1 기지국은 버퍼 상태 정보를 수신하는 방법에 있어서, 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹에 대해서 제 2 기지국과 단말에 이중 연결을 구성하는 단계 및 단말로부터 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 수신하는 단계를 포함할 수 있다.In a method for receiving buffer status information, a first base station according to another embodiment of the present invention comprises: configuring a dual connection between a second base station and a terminal for at least one logical channel or logical channel group mapped to a split bearer; Receiving a layer available data amount from the terminal.

도 34를 참조하면, 제 1 기지국은 단말과 이중 연결(Dual connectivity)를 구성할 수 있다(S3410). 즉, 제 1 기지국은 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹에 대해서 제 2 기지국과 함께 단말에 이중 연결을 구성할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제 1 기지국은 도 27 및 도 28에 도시된 바와 같이 하나 이상의 베어러를 분리하여 제 2 기지국과 함께 단말에 이중 연결을 구성할 수도 있다.Referring to FIG. 34, the first base station may configure dual connectivity with the terminal (S3410). That is, the first base station may configure a dual connection with the terminal along with the second base station for one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to the split bearer. For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 27 and 28, the first base station may separate one or more bearers to configure dual connectivity with the second base station.

제 1 기지국은 단말로부터 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을수신할 수 있다(S3420). 제 1 기지국은 수신된 버퍼 상태 리포트에 기초하여 단말에 업링크 무선자원을 할당한다. 제 1 기지국은 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 수신함에 있어서, 전술한 실시예에 따라서 기존의 버퍼 상태 리포트에 포함하여 수신할 수 있다. 기존의 버퍼 상태 리포트에 포함되어 수신되는 경우에 제 3 실시예와 같이 제 2 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에는 포함되지 않고 제 1 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함하여 수신할 수 있다.The first base station may receive the PDCP layer available data amount from the terminal (S3420). The first base station allocates an uplink radio resource to the terminal based on the received buffer status report. In receiving the PDCP layer available data amount, the first base station may receive the PDB by including it in an existing buffer status report according to the above-described embodiment. When received in the existing buffer status report, it is included in the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station and not included in the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station as in the third embodiment.

일 예로PDCP의 이용 가능 데이터양은, 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 제 1 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되어 수신될 수도 있다. 즉, 제 2 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에는 PDCP 계층의 이용 가능 데이터양에 대한 정보가 포함되지 않을 수도 있다.For example, the available data amount of PDCP may be included in only the buffer status report received by the first base station according to higher layer signaling. That is, the buffer status report transmitted to the second base station may not include information on the amount of available data of the PDCP layer.

이상의 방법으로 기존의 버퍼 상태 리포트에 기초하여 제 1 기지국은 단말에 할당할 무선자원을 산출할 수 있다. 구체적인 산출방법은 전술한 각 실시예에 기재된 방법이 사용될 수 있다.In the above manner, the first base station may calculate a radio resource to be allocated to the terminal based on the existing buffer status report. As a specific calculation method, the method described in each embodiment described above may be used.

제 1 기지국은 산출된 무선자원을 단말로 할당하고, 단말로부터 업링크를 수신할 수 있다.The first base station may allocate the calculated radio resource to the terminal and receive an uplink from the terminal.

제 2 기지국의 경우에도 제 1 기지국과 동일한 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 다만, PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양이 제 1 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되는 경우에는 제 2 기지국은 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양 이 제외된 버퍼 상태 리포트를 수신할 수 있다.In the case of the second base station, the same operation as that of the first base station may be performed. However, when the PDCP layer available data amount is included only in the buffer status report transmitted to the first base station, the second base station may receive a buffer status report in which the PDCP layer available data amount is excluded.

본 발명의 각 실시예가 모두 수행될 수 있는 단말 및 기지국의 구성을 도면을 참조하여 설명한다.A configuration of a terminal and a base station in which each embodiment of the present invention can be performed will be described with reference to the drawings.

도 35는 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 사용자 단말의 구성을 도시한 도면이다. 35 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a user terminal according to another embodiment of the present invention.

본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 버퍼 상태 정보를 전송하는 단말은, 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹을 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결되도록 구성하는 제어부(3520) 및 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹의 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 제 1 기지국 또는 제 2 기지국으로 전송하는 송신부(3530)를 포함할 수 있다.The terminal for transmitting the buffer status information according to another embodiment of the present invention, the control unit 3520 configured to dually connect one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to the split bearer with the first base station and the second base station and The transmitter 3530 may transmit a PDCP layer available data amount of one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to the split bearer to the first base station or the second base station.

도 35를 참조하면, 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 의한 사용자 단말(3500)은 수신부(3510), 제어부(3520) 및 송신부(3530)를 포함한다.Referring to FIG. 35, a user terminal 3500 according to another embodiment of the present invention includes a receiver 3510, a controller 3520, and a transmitter 3530.

수신부(3510)는 기지국으로부터 하향링크 제어정보 및 데이터, 메시지를 해당 채널을 통해 수신한다. 즉, 업링크 무선자원 할당 정보와 같은 하향정보를 수신할 수 있다.The receiver 3510 receives downlink control information, data, and a message from a base station through a corresponding channel. That is, downlink information such as uplink radio resource allocation information can be received.

제어부(3520)는 전술한 본 발명을 수행하기에 필요한 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하는 데에 필요한 단말의 동작을 제어한다. 또한, 제어부(3520)는 베어러 분리되어 구성된 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹의 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을전술한 각 실시예에 따라서 분배 또는 구분하여 전송하는 데에 따른 단말의 동작을 제어할 수 있다. The controller 3520 controls the operation of the terminal required to form a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station required to carry out the above-described present invention. In addition, the controller 3520 may control the operation of the terminal according to the distribution or division and transmission of the amount of PDCP layer available data of the logical channel or logical channel group configured by bearer separation according to each embodiment described above.

그 외에도 송신부(3530)는 상향링크 제어정보 및 데이터, 메시지를 해당 채널을 통해 전송한다. In addition, the transmitter 3530 transmits uplink control information, data, and a message through a corresponding channel.

이외에도 단말은 전술한 각 실시예를 수행하는 데에 있어서 필요한 모든 동작을 수행할 수 있다.In addition, the terminal may perform all operations necessary for performing each of the above-described embodiments.

도 36은 본 발명이 또 다른 실시예에 따른 기지국의 구성을 도시한 도면이다.36 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a base station according to another embodiment of the present invention.

본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 따른 버퍼 상태 정보를 수신하는 제 1 기지국은, 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹에 대해서 제 2 기지국과 단말에 이중 연결을 구성하는 제어부(3610) 및 단말로부터 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 수신하는 수신부(3630)를 포함할 수 있다.The first base station receiving the buffer status information according to another embodiment of the present invention, the control unit 3610 configures a dual connection between the second base station and the terminal for one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to the split bearer And a receiver 3630 that receives the amount of PDCP layer available data from the terminal.

도 36을 참조하면, 본 발명의 또 다른 실시예에 의한 기지국(3600)은 제어부(3610), 송신부(3620) 및 수신부(3630)를 포함한다.Referring to FIG. 36, the base station 3600 according to another embodiment of the present invention includes a controller 3610, a transmitter 3620, and a receiver 3630.

제어부(3610)는 제 2 기지국과 함께 단말에 이중 연결을 구성하기 위해서 필요한 기지국의 동작을 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 제어부(3610)는 각 실시예에 따라서 단말로부터 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에 기초하여 업링크 무선자원을 할당할 수 있다. The controller 3610 may control an operation of the base station required to configure a dual connection with the terminal together with the second base station. In addition, the controller 3610 may allocate an uplink radio resource based on a buffer status report received from the terminal according to each embodiment.

송신부(3620)는 단말로 하향링크 제어 정보, 메시지를 전송할 수 있다. The transmitter 3620 may transmit downlink control information and a message to the terminal.

수신부(3630)는 단말로부터 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 수신할 수 있다. 구체적으로, 수신부(3630)는 전술한 본 발명의 실시예에 따라서 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을, 버퍼 상태 리포트에 포함하여 수신할 수 있다. 또한, 수신부(3630)는 그 외 본 발명을 수행하기에 필요한 상향링크 신호나 메시지 또는 데이터를 수신할 수 있다.The receiver 3630 may receive a PDCP layer available data amount from the terminal. In detail, the receiver 3630 may receive the PDCP layer available data amount in the buffer status report according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention. In addition, the receiver 3630 may receive an uplink signal, a message, or data necessary for carrying out the present invention.

이외에도 기지국은 전술한 각 실시예를 수행하는 데에 있어서 필요한 모든 동작을 수행할 수 있다.In addition, the base station may perform all the operations necessary for performing each of the above-described embodiments.

이상의 설명은 본 발명의 기술 사상을 예시적으로 설명한 것에 불과한 것으로서, 본 발명이 속하는 기술 분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자라면 본 발명의 본질적인 특성에서 벗어나지 않는 범위에서 다양한 수정 및 변형이 가능할 것이다. 따라서, 본 발명에 개시된 실시예들은 본 발명의 기술 사상을 한정하기 위한 것이 아니라 설명하기 위한 것이고, 이러한 실시예에 의하여 본 발명의 기술사상의 범위가 한정되는 것은 아니다. 본 발명의 보호 범위는 아래의 청구범위에 의하여 해석되어야 하며, 그와 동등한 범위 내에 있는 모든 기술 사상은 본 발명의 권리범위에 포함되는 것으로 해석되어야 할 것이다.The above description is merely illustrative of the technical idea of the present invention, and those skilled in the art to which the present invention pertains may make various modifications and changes without departing from the essential characteristics of the present invention. Therefore, the embodiments disclosed in the present invention are not intended to limit the technical spirit of the present invention but to describe the present invention, and the scope of the technical idea of the present invention is not limited by these embodiments. The protection scope of the present invention should be interpreted by the following claims, and all technical ideas within the equivalent scope should be interpreted as being included in the scope of the present invention.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONCROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION

본 특허출원은 2013년 09월 26일 한국에 출원한 특허출원번호 제 10-2013-0114769 호 및 2013년 11월 26일 한국에 출원한 특허출원번호 제 10-2013-0144656 호 및 2014년 03월 14일 한국에 출원한 특허출원번호 제 10-2014-0030422 호 및 2014년 04월 11일 한국에 출원한 특허출원번호 제 10-2014-0043696 호에 대해 미국 특허법 119(a)조 (35 U.S.C § 119(a))에 따라 우선권을 주장하며, 그 모든 내용은 참고문헌으로 본 특허출원에 병합된다. 아울러, 본 특허출원은 미국 이외에 국가에 대해서도 위와 동일한 이유로 우선권을 주장하면 그 모든 내용은 참고문헌으로 본 특허출원에 병합된다.This patent application is filed with Korea Patent Application No. 10-2013-0114769 filed on September 26, 2013, and Korea Patent Application No. 10-2013-0144656 filed on November 26, 2013, and March 2014. 119 (a) (35 USC §) of the US Patent Act No. 10-2014-0030422 filed with Korea on 14 and patent application No. 10-2014-0043696 filed with Korea on April 11, 2014 Priority is claimed under 119 (a)), the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In addition, if this patent application claims priority for the same reason for countries other than the United States, all its contents are incorporated into this patent application by reference.

Claims (17)

단말이 업링크 데이터를 전송하는 방법에 있어서,In the method for the terminal to transmit the uplink data, 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 수신하는 단계;Receiving higher layer signaling including information for establishing a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station; 상기 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 상기 제 1 기지국 및 상기 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하는 단계; 및Configuring dual connectivity with the first base station and the second base station based on the higher layer signaling; And PDCP 개체가 하나 이상의 무선 베어러 각각에 대한 PDCP PDU를 상기 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국에 피어링되어 구성된 RLC 개체로 제출하는 단계를 포함하는 방법.And a PDCP entity submitting PDCP PDUs for each of one or more radio bearers to an RLC entity peered to the first base station or the second base station based on the higher layer signaling. 제 1항에 있어서,The method of claim 1, 상기 하나 이상의 무선 베어러는,The one or more radio bearers, 상기 제 1 기지국 및 상기 제 2 기지국에 스플릿(split)되어 구성된 무선 베어러인 것을 특징으로 하는 방법.And a radio bearer configured to be split into the first base station and the second base station. 제 1항에 있어서,The method of claim 1, 상기 상위계층 시그널링은,The higher layer signaling, 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위해 업링크 셀 또는 업링크 기지국을 식별하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법.And index or identification information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station. 제 3항에 있어서,The method of claim 3, wherein 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보는,Index or division information for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station, 상기 제 1 기지국을 통해 상기 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값과 상기 제 2 기지국을 통해 상기 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법.And a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the first base station and a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the second base station. 제 1항에 있어서,The method of claim 1, 상기 RLC 개체로 제출하는 단계 이후에,After submitting to the RLC entity, 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국에 피어링되어 구성된 MAC 개체에서 논리채널 우선순위 프로시져를 수행하는 단계를 더 포함하는 방법.And performing a logical channel priority procedure at the MAC entity peered to the first base station or the second base station. 제 1 기지국이 단말의 업링크 데이터 전송을 제어하는 방법에 있어서,In the first base station to control the uplink data transmission of the terminal, 상기 단말과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 생성하는 단계;Generating higher layer signaling including information for forming a dual connection with the terminal; 상기 상위계층 시그널링을 상기 단말로 전송하는 단계; 및Transmitting the higher layer signaling to the terminal; And 상기 단말에 대해 스플릿 무선베어러(split radio bearer)를 구성하는 단계를 포함하는 방법.And configuring a split radio bearer for the terminal. 제 6항에 있어서,The method of claim 6, 상기 상위계층 시그널링은,The higher layer signaling, 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 1 기지국 또는제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위해 업링크 셀 또는 업링크 기지국을 식별하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법.And index or identification information for identifying an uplink cell or uplink base station for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station. 제 7항에 있어서,The method of claim 7, wherein 상기 업링크 데이터를 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하기 위한 인덱스 또는 구분정보는,Index or division information for transmitting the uplink data to the first base station or the second base station, 상기 제 1 기지국을 통해 상기 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값과 상기 제 2 기지국을 통해 상기 업링크 데이터를 전송하도록 구성하기 위한 값을 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법.And a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the first base station and a value for configuring to transmit the uplink data through the second base station. 업링크 데이터를 전송하는 단말에 있어서,In the terminal for transmitting uplink data, 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 수신하는 수신부; 및A receiver configured to receive higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with the first base station and the second base station; And 상기 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 상기 제 1 기지국 및 상기 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결을 구성하고,Configure dual connectivity with the first base station and the second base station based on the higher layer signaling, PDCP 개체가 하나 이상의 무선 베어러 각각에 대한 PDCP PDU를 상기 상위계층 시그널링에 기초하여 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국에 피어링되어 구성된 RLC 개체로 제출하도록 제어하는 제어부를 포함하는 단말.And a controller for controlling a PDCP entity to submit a PDCP PDU for each of at least one radio bearer to an RLC entity peered to the first base station or the second base station based on the higher layer signaling. 단말의 업링크 데이터 전송을 제어하는 제 1 기지국에 있어서,In the first base station for controlling the uplink data transmission of the terminal, 상기 단말과 이중 연결을 구성하기 위한 정보를 포함하는 상위계층 시그널링을 생성하는 제어부; 및A controller configured to generate higher layer signaling including information for configuring a dual connection with the terminal; And 상기 상위계층 시그널링을 상기 단말로 전송하는 송신부를 포함하되,Includes a transmitter for transmitting the higher layer signaling to the terminal, 상기 제어부는 상기 단말에 대해 스플릿 무선베어러(split radio bearer)를 구성하도록 제어하는 기지국.The control unit is a base station for controlling to configure a split radio bearer (split radio bearer) for the terminal. 단말이 버퍼 상태 정보를 전송하는 방법에 있어서,In the method for the terminal to transmit the buffer status information, 상위 계층 시그널링에 기초하여 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹을 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결되도록 구성하는 단계; 및Configuring at least one logical channel or logical channel group mapped to the split bearer based on higher layer signaling to be dually connected with the first base station and the second base station; And 상기 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹의 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양(data available for transmission in a PDCP layer)을 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하는 단계를 포함하는 방법.Transmitting a data available for transmission in a PDCP layer of the at least one logical channel or logical channel group to the first base station or the second base station. 제 11항에 있어서,The method of claim 11, 상기 상위 계층 시그널링에 기초하여 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹을 구성하는 단계는, Configuring a logical channel or logical channel group mapped to a split bearer based on the higher layer signaling, 기지국별 또는 셀그룹별 버퍼 상태 리포트(Buffer status report, BSR) 타이머를 포함하여 구성하는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법.And a buffer status report (BSR) timer for each base station or cell group. 제 11항에 있어서,The method of claim 11, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은,The PDCP layer available data amount is 상기 상위 계층 시그널링에 기초하여 상기 제 1 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송되는 버퍼 상태 리포트 중 어느 하나의 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되어 전송되는 방법.And a buffer status report of only one of a buffer status report transmitted to the first base station and a buffer status report transmitted to the second base station based on the higher layer signaling. 제 1 기지국이 버퍼 상태 정보를 수신하는 방법에 있어서,In the first base station to receive the buffer status information, 상위 계층 시그널링에 기초하여 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹에 대해서 제 2 기지국과 단말에 이중 연결을 구성하는 단계; 및Configuring a dual connection between the second base station and the terminal for at least one logical channel or logical channel group mapped to the split bearer based on higher layer signaling; And 상기 단말로부터 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 수신하는 단계를 포함하는 방법.Receiving a PDCP layer available data amount from the terminal. 제 14항에 있어서,The method of claim 14, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은,The PDCP layer available data amount is 상기 상위 계층 시그널링에 기초하여 상기 제 1 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되거나, 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되어 상기 제 1 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에는 포함되지 않는 것을 특징으로 하는 방법.Included only in the buffer status report received by the first base station or based on the higher layer signaling, or not included in the buffer status report received by the second base station. How to feature. 버퍼 상태 정보를 전송하는 단말에 있어서,In the terminal for transmitting the buffer status information, 상위 계층 시그널링에 기초하여 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹을 제 1 기지국 및 제 2 기지국과 이중 연결되도록 구성하는 제어부; 및A controller configured to dually connect one or more logical channels or logical channel groups mapped to the split bearer based on higher layer signaling with the first base station and the second base station; And 상기 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹의 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 상기 제 1 기지국 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 전송하는 송신부를 포함하는 단말.And a transmitter for transmitting the PDCP layer available data amount of the at least one logical channel or logical channel group to the first base station or the second base station. 버퍼 상태 정보를 수신하는 제 1 기지국에 있어서,A first base station for receiving buffer status information, 상위 계층 시그널링에 기초하여 분리 베어러에 매핑되는 하나 이상의 논리채널 또는 논리채널그룹에 대해서 제 2 기지국과 단말에 이중 연결을 구성하는 제어부; 및A control unit for configuring dual connectivity between the second base station and the terminal for at least one logical channel or logical channel group mapped to the split bearer based on higher layer signaling; And 상기 단말로부터 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양을 수신하는 수신부를 포함하는 수신부를 포함하되, Includes a receiver including a receiver for receiving the PDCP layer available data amount from the terminal, 상기 PDCP 계층 이용 가능 데이터 양은 상기 상위 계층 시그널링에 따라 상기 제 1 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되거나 또는 상기 제 2 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼 상태 리포트에만 포함되어 상기 제 1 기지국으로 수신되는 버퍼상태 리포트에는 포함되지 않는 것을 특징으로하는 기지국.The PDCP layer available data amount is included only in the buffer status report received by the first base station or in the buffer status report received by the second base station according to the higher layer signaling. It is not included in the base station.
PCT/KR2014/008311 2013-09-26 2014-09-04 Method for transmitting uplink data and apparatus for same Ceased WO2015046780A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US15/024,484 US10362590B2 (en) 2013-09-26 2014-09-04 Method for transmitting uplink data and apparatus for same
CN201480053616.3A CN105580419B (en) 2013-09-26 2014-09-04 Uplink data transmission method and device thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR20130114769 2013-09-26
KR10-2013-0114769 2013-09-26
KR10-2013-0144656 2013-11-26
KR20130144656 2013-11-26
KR20140030422A KR20150034588A (en) 2013-09-26 2014-03-14 Methods for transmitting the Buffer status report and Apparatuses thereof
KR10-2014-0030422 2014-03-14
KR10-2014-0043696 2014-04-11
KR1020140043696A KR101930114B1 (en) 2013-04-11 2014-04-11 Methods for transmitting uplink data and Apparatuses thereof

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015046780A1 true WO2015046780A1 (en) 2015-04-02

Family

ID=52743848

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2014/008311 Ceased WO2015046780A1 (en) 2013-09-26 2014-09-04 Method for transmitting uplink data and apparatus for same

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2015046780A1 (en)

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016183708A1 (en) * 2015-05-15 2016-11-24 华为技术有限公司 Uplink data transmission method for split bearer, user equipment, and base station
CN108307522A (en) * 2016-08-10 2018-07-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 The processing method and processing device of radio bearer, terminal, base station
CN110583084A (en) * 2017-05-05 2019-12-17 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Method and apparatus in a radio network
CN110612739A (en) * 2017-04-28 2019-12-24 三星电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for communication in a wireless communication system
CN110786064A (en) * 2017-09-26 2020-02-11 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Method and terminal device for data processing
CN112437491A (en) * 2015-05-15 2021-03-02 夏普株式会社 User equipment and method executed by user equipment
CN112752305A (en) * 2019-10-29 2021-05-04 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Flow control method, flow control device, related equipment and storage medium

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7346363B2 (en) * 2003-08-19 2008-03-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Apparatus and method for sharing radio protocol entities in wireless communication system
US20100118752A1 (en) * 2008-11-10 2010-05-13 Research In Motion Limited Method and Apparatus of Transition to a Battery Efficient State or Configuration by Indicating End of Data Transmission in Long Term Evolution
US20130135987A1 (en) * 2007-09-28 2013-05-30 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Operation of control protocol data units in packet data convergence protocol
US20130242897A1 (en) * 2012-03-16 2013-09-19 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for heterogeneous carrier aggregation

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7346363B2 (en) * 2003-08-19 2008-03-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Apparatus and method for sharing radio protocol entities in wireless communication system
US20130135987A1 (en) * 2007-09-28 2013-05-30 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Operation of control protocol data units in packet data convergence protocol
US20100118752A1 (en) * 2008-11-10 2010-05-13 Research In Motion Limited Method and Apparatus of Transition to a Battery Efficient State or Configuration by Indicating End of Data Transmission in Long Term Evolution
US20130242897A1 (en) * 2012-03-16 2013-09-19 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for heterogeneous carrier aggregation

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
LARMO, A ET AL.: "The LTE Link-Layer Design.", IEEE COMMUNICATIONS MAGAZINE, vol. 47, no. ISSUE., April 2009 (2009-04-01), Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://ieeexplore.ieee.org/apls/abs_all.jsp?arnumber=4907407> *

Cited By (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106538024A (en) * 2015-05-15 2017-03-22 华为技术有限公司 Uplink data transmission method for split bearer, user equipment, and base station
WO2016183708A1 (en) * 2015-05-15 2016-11-24 华为技术有限公司 Uplink data transmission method for split bearer, user equipment, and base station
CN112437491A (en) * 2015-05-15 2021-03-02 夏普株式会社 User equipment and method executed by user equipment
CN108307522B (en) * 2016-08-10 2022-12-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and device for processing radio bearer, terminal and base station
CN108307522A (en) * 2016-08-10 2018-07-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 The processing method and processing device of radio bearer, terminal, base station
CN110612739A (en) * 2017-04-28 2019-12-24 三星电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for communication in a wireless communication system
US12058566B2 (en) 2017-04-28 2024-08-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Method and apparatus for communication in wireless communication system
CN110612739B (en) * 2017-04-28 2024-05-03 三星电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for communication in a wireless communication system
CN110583084A (en) * 2017-05-05 2019-12-17 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Method and apparatus in a radio network
CN110583084B (en) * 2017-05-05 2023-04-07 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Method and arrangement in a radio network
US11743760B2 (en) 2017-05-05 2023-08-29 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method and device in a radio network
CN110786064B (en) * 2017-09-26 2024-05-24 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Method and terminal device for data processing
CN110786064A (en) * 2017-09-26 2020-02-11 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Method and terminal device for data processing
CN112752305A (en) * 2019-10-29 2021-05-04 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Flow control method, flow control device, related equipment and storage medium

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2019160342A1 (en) Method and apparatus for supporting rach-less mobility with pre-allocated beams in wireless communication system
WO2020067813A1 (en) Apparatus and method for performing dual connectivity in wireless communication system
WO2018056785A1 (en) Method and apparatus for communication in next-generation mobile communication system
WO2015064972A1 (en) Method and apparatus for configuring dual connection in mobile communication network
WO2015142104A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving signal in mobile communication system supporting a plurality of carriers
WO2020032578A1 (en) Resource using method of node in wireless communication system and device using same method
WO2015020356A1 (en) Method for transmitting buffer status report in device-to-device communication, and device thereof
WO2015170812A1 (en) Method for performing comp operation in wireless communication system and an apparatus for supporting the same
WO2016186401A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting or receiving scheduling request in mobile communication system
WO2013169048A2 (en) Method and apparatus for transceiving data using plurality of carriers in mobile communication system
WO2017039042A1 (en) Data transmission and reception method and device of terminal in wireless communication system
EP3100376A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data using a plurality of carriers in mobile communication system
WO2018164499A1 (en) Buffer state report transmission method and device therefor
WO2015046780A1 (en) Method for transmitting uplink data and apparatus for same
WO2018004278A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting or receiving data in dual connectivity state
WO2018169242A1 (en) Method for duplicately receiving control message, and device therefor
WO2014109580A2 (en) Method for enhancing small cell
WO2021251559A1 (en) Method for causing smf to effectively perform redundant transmission by improving function of nwdaf
WO2014182009A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving response signal and apparatus therefor
WO2019059638A1 (en) Method for processing data by relay node and apparatus therefor
WO2015152554A1 (en) Method for controlling secondary cell operation of terminal, and apparatus therefor
WO2014157888A1 (en) Method for handover in environment connected to multiple base stations and apparatus therefor
WO2014163419A1 (en) Method for processing radio link failure and device therefor
WO2014133271A1 (en) Method for transmitting buffer status report of terminal in small cell environment and device therefor
WO2016159634A1 (en) Method for reconfiguring wireless bearer and device thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201480053616.3

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14846865

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 15024484

Country of ref document: US

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

32PN Ep: public notification in the ep bulletin as address of the adressee cannot be established

Free format text: NOTING OF LOSS OF RIGHTS PURSUANT TO RULE 112(1) EPC (EPO FORM 1205 DATED 08/07/2016)

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14846865

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1